Home

Version 4 User's Guide

1. Elevation This is the height of the borehole in either feet or metres above mean sea level Total Depth This is the vertical displacement of the borehole in either feet or metres from the collar to the bottom of the borehole WinLoG User s Guide 411 412 Reports There are also 5 buttons on the form that are used for the following Preview Button The preview button does an on screen preview of the report Clicking on the button will display the Print Preview Form dis cussed in the section below Print Button The Print Button allows the user to output a report directly to the printer Export Button The Export Button allows the user to export the report in one of 19 different file formats Clicking the export button opens up the export wizard which takes the user through an 8 step process in which they may select the file type to export to and other formatting issues This feature is discussed in the section below Cancel Button Cancels the report generation without generating a report Help Button Displays additional information about reports WinLoG User s Guide General Reports Previewing a Report When the Preview button is pressed on the General Reports form a preview of the report is displayed in the Borehole Listing Preview form below ACES DDD een SB BS ml a a a an ti m en En HE m IE H r Zi HE Hi a Fage lof 2 At the top of the Borehol
2. Border Position UA A je BEW Left KE his is an example of a Paragraph text box Fight 6 05 Top 2 02 Bottom 4 6 Background coll Fram t No te Yez width fi A p Frame Color HA rn HX x Cancel 7 Help If the template has two pages the Paragraph Text form will have two tabs as shown below The first tab is for paragraphs on the first page and the second tab is for paragraphs on the second page The data entry for both tabs is identical WinLoG User s Guide 333 334 Templates The following information can be entered and edited using this form Text This is the text for the paragraph There 1s no limit to the length of the text The Rich Text toolbar at the top of the form is used to for mat the text This toolbar is described below Left This is the position of the left border of the paragraph in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Paragraph button on the toolbar is used to create the paragraph this position will be filled in by the program The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Right This is the position of the right border of the paragraph in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Paragraph button on the toolbar is used to create the paragraph this position will be filled in by the program Top This is the position of the top border of the paragraph in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Paragraph bu
3. WinLoG User s Guide 373 3 4 Legends The buttons on the toolbar perform the following actions The Clear button is used to erase the current symbol and provide a blank page The Import Picture button is used to import a bitmap picture re from a file into the current symbol When this button is pressed the Open bitmap form below will be displayed Select the bitmap file to import and then press the Open button Open KEI Look irr a _ Bitmaps amp al Al ci mal 40x40 jE acme bmp Bottom5 bmp Britizhl1 bmp Z Blank bmp z Bottom bmp he British 2 bmp he Botton bmp he Bottom bmp he British 3 bmp hee Battom2 bmp hee British 4 bmp hee Bottom bmp be British 5 bmp fee Bottom4 bmp hee British 0 bop hee British 6 bmp gt File name Bottom8 bmp Files of type AI gif brop ico ennf vmf Cancel ZF The Erase button is used to delete parts of the symbol When this button 1s pressed the cursor will change to an eraser To erase a part of the symbol hold the left mouse button down and move the cur sor over the area to be erased rr The Fill button is used to fill regions of symbols When this but ton is pressed the cursor will change to a paint can To fill an area click inside the region The Undo button is used to undo the previous edit operation The Curve button is used to draw a curved line on the symbol When pressed the cursor will change to a pencil To draw a cu
4. x Cancel 7 Help The following information can be entered and edited using the Text Intervals form shown above Top Depth This is the top depth of the text interval If a line 1s speci fied it will be drawn across the column at this depth Bottom Depth This is the bottom depth of the text interval If a line is specified it will be drawn across the column at this depth Text This is the text to display in the column up to 255 characters WinLoG User s Guide Text Interval Data Line Type This is the style of the line When this column is selected a button will be displayed for the line type After this button is pressed the Line Properties form below is displayed This form is used to set the line style thickness color Line Properties Line Style Thickness Color Solid Min Mar In x Cancel 7 Help The buttons at the bottom of this form are used for the following jg The Start button moves to the first interval q The Previous button moves to the previous interval p The Next button moves to the next interval p The End button moves to the last interval f The Insert button creates a new interval x The Delete button deletes this interval WinLoG User s Guide 217 218 Borehole Logs Linked Text Intervals Form Linked Text Intervals Stat Depth 20 End Depth 5 Line Style Constituents Sediment Structure Fossils Grain Size Sorting aas y Ok x
5. Fill Size fi Contact Angle jo f Left Right Ke Top Line Style I Same as Description fT Split Column y Foreground cor gt Background coo C Unzplit Column 44 bp HHK x Cancel 7 Help To add a second layer select the Description tab and press the Add but ton The following information can be entered for this layer Name Title Silty Clay Description Mottled brown and grey silty clay with embedded sand and gravel Top Depth 20 Horizontal Alignment Left Press the Symbol tab to select a symbol for this layer Select the first symbol on the third row of the USCS Library WinLoG User s Guide 51 52 Tutorial Press the Add button and the Description tab again to add the third layer The following information can be entered for this layer Name Title Sand Description Compact medium to coarse sand Top Depth 9 Horizontal Alignment Left Press the Symbol tab to select a symbol for this layer Select the fifth symbol on the first row of the USCS Library After the Ok button is pressed the borehole log will appear as shown below ii WinloG Project Tutorial Progect Dorehole 101 Oh Ele Edi View Window Heb leif esse en ijssel tes gel EEL EGOBEEULEEREEN NEE EERENS Praject No 2000 Borehole Number 101 Project Tworial ACME Consulting Company Client Enclo 1 44 Canadian Qaks Drive inhet Wihiiby Ontario Site Locator Geologist You
6. Show Sample Type Symbols Symbols Aow E Horz Size pixels 30 Vert Size Pixels 20 The following information can be entered on the Layout tab Lithologic Libraries The current lithologic libraries are displayed in a list To include a lithologic library in the legend select it from the list Show Well Symbols Select whether to show well symbols in the leg end Choose none Well Type 1 Well Type 2 or Well Type 3 WinLoG User s Guide 361 362 Legends Show Sample Symbols Check to show sample symbols in the legend Symbols Row This is the default number of symbols to draw per row The number can be changed later in the layout Horizontal Pixel Size This is the width to use when drawing the sym bols Vertical Pixel Size This is the height to use when drawing the sym bols Layout Page Setup Size Letter s nehes Er Milinetes Width EE Length i Orientation Portrait Landscape Page Setup Tab The following information can be entered on the Page Setup tab shown above Size This is the page size of the template When the arrow at the right is pressed a list of available page sizes is displayed WinLoG User s Guide Creating a New Legend Inches or Millimeters The units for the width and length of the page These units will be used when specifying the layout of the legend If the Page Size is Custom the units can be set to either inches or mil limet
7. ton is pressed the cursor will change to a paint can To fill an area click inside the region The Undo button is used to undo the previous edit operation The Curve button is used to draw a curved line on the symbol When pressed the cursor will change to a pencil To draw a curve hold down the left mouse button and move the mouse When finished drawing the line release the mouse button WinLoG User s Guide Symbol Descriptions The Line button is used to draw a straight line on the symbol When pressed the cursor will change to a pencil To draw a line press and hold down the left mouse button at the start of the line Move the mouse to the end of the line and release the mouse button The Rectangle button is used to draw a hollow rectangle on the symbol When pressed the cursor will change to a cross To draw a rectangle press and hold down the left mouse button at the upper left corner of the rectangle Move the mouse to the lower right corner of the rectangle and release the mouse button The Filled Rectangle button is used to draw a filled rectangle on the symbol When pressed the cursor will change to a cross To draw a rectangle press and hold down the left mouse button at the upper left corner of the rectangle Move the mouse to the lower right corner of the rectangle and release the mouse button The Ellipse button 1s used to draw a hollow ellipse on the symbol When pressed the cursor will change
8. Horizontal Alignment Use the horizontal alignment buttons to set the alignment of the layer title The layer title can be left aligned centered or right aligned The horizontal alignment of the description 1s set using the justification buttons in the Rich Text toolbar at the top of the tab Vertical Alignment The three vertical alignment buttons are used to set the vertical alignment of the layer title and description Using these buttons the alignment can be set to the top middle or bottom of the layer At the top of the Description tab is the Rich Text toolbar this toolbar can be used to modify the font characteristics add symbols spell check the description and add lithology macros Before selecting a speed but ton the text to be modified should be selected with the mouse or the cursor should be placed at the desired insertion point T Arial 10 jm JB Z U AS A amp SE SY Ld The speed buttons of the toolbar perform the following functions The Font Typeface box is used to E Arial select the name of the font to use for the selected text The Font Size box is used to set the size of the font for the l zl selected text The Font Color box is used to select the color of the font for E the selected text WinLoG User s Guide Te i a Mi m Lithology The Bold button is used to toggle the bold attribute of the selected text on and off The Italics button
9. Sample Data Soil rock ice and other samples are generally taken with split spoon samplers Shelby tubes Core Barrels etc at various depths of the bore hole These samples are later used for detailed identification lab analy sis and other purposes An unlimited number of samples may be entered into a borehole log The samples of the borehole log can be entered and edited by selecting the Samples menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mouse but ton inside one of the sample columns of the borehole log After per forming one of the above tasks the Sample Data form below will be displayed This form is used to enter and edit the data for each sample that is then displayed in one or more columns of the borehole log The template determines the type of information displayed on the borehole log for the sample 1 40 l aU ro BO 55 a 45 LEE S a HX x Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide Sample Data The buttons at the bottom of the form are used for the following r The Start button moves to the first sample d The Previous button moves to the previous sample The Next button moves to the next sample P The End button moves to the last sample F The Insert button creates a new sample The Delete button deletes the sample The following information can be entered and edited using the Sample form Number This is the optional sample number up to 255 characters The number can contain text c
10. Sample Length This is the default length to use when entering sam ples For a typical split spoon sampler this would be 2 feet Sample Type This is the default text used to describe the sample type when entering samples in a log Sample Symbol This is the default symbol to use when entering sam ples The symbol can be changed by pressing the Sample Symbol but ton Text Justification This is the justification to use for displaying the sample number type N Value and other data WinLoG User s Guide Sample Columns Vertical Alignment This the vertical alignment of the text within the sample It is used for the sample number type N Value and other data Show As The sample recovery can be displayed as a number or as a shaded box representing the percentage of recovery When calculating the percentage of sample recovery the program assumes that 1f the recovery number is greater than the sample size then the number is a percentage otherwise it will assume the number is a length Alignment If the recovery is displayed as a shaded box then the box can be aligned at the top center or bottom of the sample If the recov ery is displayed as a number this field will not appear Color This is the color of the shaded box to use for the recovery If the recovery is displayed as a number this field will not appear Line Style This is the default line style to use for the top and bottom of the sample To change the line style
11. The size of the bitmap can be changed using the Bitmap Information form above or the mouse To adjust the size using the mouse follow the procedure below 1 Position the cursor at the boundary of the bitmap The cursor should change to a set of arrows and the Status line should display Edit Size of Bitmap The orientation of the arrows will indicate the direction that the boundary can be changed 2 Press and hold the left mouse button down and drag the boundary to its new position 3 While dragging the boundary a rectangle will be displayed showing its current location 4 When the boundary is in the desired location release the left mouse button WinLoG User s Guide 385 386 Legends Lines and Arrows Horizontal vertical and diagonal lines and arrows can be added any where on a legend There is no limit to the number of lines and arrows that can be added Adding a Line or an Arrow There are two methods that can be used to add a line or arrow to a leg end 1 By clicking on the Line button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the starting point of the line or arrow Then while holding down the left mouse button drag the cursor to the end of the line or arrow and release the mouse button The Edit Lines form described in the next section will then be displayed 2 By selecting the Lines menu item from the Edit menu or Popup menu and then clicking on th
12. For this tutorial enter the following information and then press the Ok button Borehole Number 101 Project No 2000 Project Tutorial Enclosure l Geologist your name Drilled By ABC Drilling Co Drill Method H S Auger Drill Date 01 31 2000 Hole Size 8 Datum Local After the Ok button is pressed the borehole log will appear as shown below WinLoG User s Guide Adding the Lithology Wi WinkoG Project Tutorial Progect Dorehole 101 ok File El Wiw Window Hen xi ENEN NEE a Re aa SIR aS HOSSURS S A0 m 4 rauso NT TENEN CER REL hie Project No 2000 Borehole Number 101 Project Tworial ACME Consulting Company Client Enclosure 1 44 Canadian Qaks Drive Whiley Onlan Site Location Geologist Your Name SUBSURFACE PROFILE SAMPLE l Well Completion en ine Details Desoniplon Ground Surface a5 Deepti Edt Semple Sheet 1 of 1 Adding the Borehole Depth After the borehole has been created and the general information entered as described above the depth of the borehole should be entered To enter the depth click on the depth column with the left mouse button In the Depth form shown below enter the Depth as 15 feet Depths amp Elevations Log Depths Elevation Start Depth fo End Depth E Optional Specify Depth Page C Depth Scale Depth Page jo x Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide 49 Tip Wh
13. GAEA Symbols that contains a variety of well and other symbols Symbol x Font Fn eh g Gib on ete Rew kk EE ee NE AE ee AK SEE SE SE SE SCHEDEL w a 0 tebe o oo ot at my ceo oo M je daja fF Je gt je Re fel 2 JF piep ft e e fe eal eht la wie Se RAL Ta poe Pe in x eae ee Sp FRE Mee oe FR REE Ee ee tg eee et op Cancel se The Spell Check button will display the Spell Checker form shown below and will check the spelling in the description The dictionary used to check the spelling is set in the program Preferences see Chapter 3 When the Add button 1s pressed the word will be appended to the custom dictionary Spell Checker Not found Sita Replace With Silty LR Replace Add or Skip Once or Skip Always 7 Suggest x Close Suggestions WinLoG User s Guide Lithology al The Macro button will display the Lithology Description Macros form shown below This form can be used to select a lithology macro to insert into the description When the Ok button is pressed the selected text will be inserted into the description In addition by check ing the Update Symbol box the lithology symbol for the layer will be set to the symbol for the macro selected Lithologic Description Macros Weall graded gravels gravel sand mistures little or no fires Silk clay laminated to massive Fine laminated zand silt mud Silt Clay laminated to massive a i Gr
14. GTGS Version 5 had both templates and logs associated with it Win LoG Version 4 has the ability to import both WinLoG User s Guide Importing GTGS Data Importing a GTGS Template GTGS Version 5 Templates can be imported into WinLoG by selecting the Version 5 Template menu item from the Import GTGS Data sub menu of the Import submenu This will display the Import GTGS Ver sion 5 Templates Form Import GTGS Version 5 Template Files raed Look in Templates de ci Er Files of type Template Files Cancel ZA The Import GTGS Version 5 Template File Form 1s used to select the name of the GTGS template After the file has been selected press the Open button to display the Enter Template Name form The Enter Template Name form shows the current templates in the database The user must enter a unique name for the new template and press the Ok button Importing a GTGS Log GTGS Version 5 Logs can be imported into WinLoG by selecting the Version 5 Log menu item from the Import GTGS Data submenu This will open up the Import GTGS Version 5 Log form on the next page The Import GTGS Version 5 Log File form allows users to select the name of the GTGS Log they would like to import WinLoG User s Guide 127 128 Projects Import GTGS Version 5 Log Files 2 x Lookin Logs e Er Files of type eres Version 5 Log Files Cancel Help After the file has been selected press the Open butto
15. PY Log Plot Data Import x Do you want to use the detault template or chose from alist Choose From List The LogPlot Data Import form has two options e Use Default Template e Choose From List The Use Default Template option will create a default template based on the LogPlot file you are importing And the Choose From List option will allow you to select the template from a list of available tem plates Both of these are options are discussed in the sections below After an option has been selected the Import LogPlot Data form on the next page will be displayed The Import LogPlot Data Files form allows the user to select and open the LogPlot file they wish to Import Select the file you wish to import and then click on the Open button WinLoG User s Guide Importing LogPlot Data Import LogPlot Data Files ef Logi ef Logs ef Logs E Log E Log E Lagda E Lag E Log a E Logit Load Loa Log11 E Logi E Log4b Eil Logra E Logi 2 Loots E Logs E Log i Logis Ej Tutorial File name Logi Files of type LogPlat Data Files Cancel 2 Use Default Template Option If you selected to Use a Default Template previously the Default Log Plot Template Format form below will be displayed after you select the LogPlot file to import This form has two tabs one for the Data Format and one for the Page Setup Default LogPlot Template Format x Input Units Display Units Fee
16. Top This is the position of the top border of the bitmap in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Bitmap button on the tool bar 1s used to create the bitmap this field will not be displayed If Stretch Bitmap is set to No then this field will not be displayed WinLoG User s Guide Bitmaps Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the bitmap in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Stretch Bitmap is set to No or Maintain Aspect Ratio is set to yes then this field will not be displayed and the bottom will be calculated by the program Center X This is the bitmap s horizontal center in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If Stretch Bitmap 1s set to Yes this field will not be displayed If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to add the bitmap this field will be filled in by the program Center Y This is the bitmap s vertical center in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If Stretch Bitmap is set to Yes this field will not be displayed If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to add the bitmap this field will be filled in by the program Sizing a Bitmap The size of the bitmap can be changed using the Bitmap Information form above or the mouse To adjust the size using the mouse follow the procedure below 1 Position the cursor at the boundary of the bitmap The cursor should change to a set of arrows and the Status line should display E
17. map of the surface features and displayed This form is used to specify how the location map for the boundaries If a DXF file is speci i l AEN fied you will have the option to project will be displayed There are tabs for adjusting the scales grid ii Th h B d use the minimum and maximum axes etc e most important parameters to set are the minimum an grid values from the file The DXF maximum values for the horizontal and vertical axes For this tutorial will then be overlain on top of the we will use the default values for all of the parameters location map of the project FN Location Map Setup Grid and Location Map Map Defaults Grid Defaults show Location hap show Grid Wo je ves No e Ves Min Horizonal Value 0 Horizontal Spacing 00 Max Horizonal Value 500 Vertical Spacing 100 Min Vertical walte DO Line Style een so Max Vertical Value W Ok X Cancel 7 Help The Location Map Setup form can be edited later by clicking on the Grid button on the Location Map toolbar For a detailed description of the parameters in this form see Chapter 3 After the parameters for the location map have been specified and the Ok button pressed the location map for the project will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide 45 Tutorial FE WinLeG Project Tutorial Fie Reports View Window Hep p beJa naelte i Grd Cordingtes X o 511 010 Fm 25125 Creating a New Borehole Lo
18. plate _ The Rectangle button is used to draw rectangles on the template Legend Toolbar The Legend Toolbar is displayed below and is used to edit legends Each of the speed buttons on the toolbar is explained below L my FO ge wow FB amp 4 amp Ge 4 Bas o The New button is used to create a new legend The Open button is used to open an existing legend The speed buttons below will be dimmed if no legend is currently opened fi The Close button is used to close a legend El The Save button is used to save changes to the legend WinLoG User s Guide 25 26 Getting Started E IE O0 Z Bl The SaveAs button is used to save the legend under a different name The Print button is used to print the legend The Undo button is used to undo changes to the legend The Zoom in button is used to expand the legend by a factor of 25 this button will be dimmed if the legend 1s already zoomed to a factor of 200 The Zoom out button is used to shrink the legend by a factor of 25 this button will be dimmed if the legend 1s already zoomed to a factor of 25 The Full Screen button is used to reset the zoom factor to full screen 100 The Paragraph Text button is used to add paragraph text to the legend The Bitmap button is used to add a bitmap to the legend The Line button is used to draw lines and arrows on the legend The Rectangle button is used to draw rectangles
19. 1 GAEABeta winLoG4 Bitmaps fa Temporary FiledC PROGRA 1 GAEABeta WinLoG4 Lags R Import Directories Logs C PROGRA 1 GAEABeta vinLoG4 Loqgs Templates C PROGRA 1 GAEAB etal yyinLoG4 Templates Pocket Data CAPROGRA GAEAB eta winLoGd Logs VWintence Program Directory WinFence c Program Files GAEA Win encen ence exe Directories Tab The Directories tab shown above is used to specify the following para meters Main Database This is the directory where the Master Project Data base is located It should only be changed if the database has been moved The directory can be changed by entering the new directory or pressing the Select Directory button to the right of the input line Bitmaps This is the directory where the bitmaps for lithologic well and sample symbols are stored This directory should only be changed if these symbols have been moved Temporary Files This is the directory where temporary files are stored These files are created by the undo process when editing logs templates and legends If you are using the program on a network this directory should be on the local computer WinLoG User s Guide Tip If you are using the program on a network the default direc tory should be on the local computer 145 146 Projects Logs The default directory to use when importing or exchanging logs To change the directory specify the directory name in the input line or press the S
20. 282 Borehole Logs Inclination Column This is the column of data from the ascii data file to use for the inclination data Azimuth Column This is the column of data from the ascii data file to use for the azimuth data After all of the above information has been specified press Ok to process the file Saving a Borehole Log To save a borehole log after it has been edited either select the Save Borehole Log menu item of the Borehole Logs submenu of the File menu or press the Save button on the borehole log toolbar To save the borehole log under a different borehole number press the SaveAs button on the borehole log toolbar The Enter Borehole Number form shown below will be displayed Enter a unique borehole number and then press the Ok button Enter Borehole Number Existing Boreholes Unique Borehole Humber X cont Zi WinLoG User s Guide Printing a Borehole Log amp Printing a Borehole Log To print a borehole log either click the right mouse button and select the Print menu item from the popup menu or press the Print button on the borehole log toolbar Alternatively several or all of the borehole logs in the project can be printed using the Print button on the Project toolbar or the Print menu item in the File menu This approach is discussed in Chapter 3 Copying a Borehole Log Once entered a borehole log can be easily copied The copy will be placed in a new window which
21. 345 346 Templates Mi add Table Form Ioj x Setup Headers Cell widths Fg 2 Setup Po 2 Headers Pg 2 Cell widths Table Number 0 Number of Rows 5 Mumber of Columns 5 Number of Fixed Rows 1 l Number of Fixed Columns 1 l Op Fixed Color Border Nomen Drom 44 Pb NAX y DE x Cancel Help If the template has two pages the Table form will have 6 tabs as shown below The first three tabs are for tables on the first page and the sec ond three tabs are for tables on the second page The data entry for both sets of tabs is identical Setup Tab or Pg 2 Setup Tab The following information can be entered and edited using the Setup tab shown above Number of Rows The number of rows in the table Number of Columns The number of columns in the table WinLoG User s Guide Tables Number of Fixed Rows The number of fixed rows in the table Fixed rows contain information that can only be entered edited from the tem plate Usually information such as titles for tables 1s entered from the template Number of Fixed Cols The number of fixed columns in the table Fixed columns contain information that can only be edited or entered from the template Usually information such as titles for tables is entered from the template Left This is the position of the left border of the table in inches or mil limeters from the left side of the page The units of me
22. Columns tab When the button is pressed a Font form shown in the previous section will be displayed Using this form the font name style size and color can be selected Layer Title Font This is the font to use for the titles of the lithologic layers of the borehole data When the button 1s pressed a Font form shown in the previous section will be displayed Using this form the font name style size and color can be selected Section Headings Sections are used to group a set of similar columns together such as sample data or layer data The section titles are displayed at the top of the column titles There is no limit to the number of section headings that can be used The Layout tab and Page 2 Layout tab shown in the previous section can be used to edit the following section heading information WinLoG User s Guide Columns Heading This is the text to display in the section heading up to 255 characters Left This is the position of the left side of the section heading in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page The units of mea surement are specified in the page layout Right This is the position of the right side of the section heading in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page Top This is the position of the top side of the section heading in inches or millimeters from the top of the page Normally this will be the same as the top border of the column block Bottom This is t
23. GAEA to see if support for that format can be added Select the format of the geophysical log file and then press the OK button Geophysical File Type ASC Log ASCII Standard LAS Schlumberger LAS Mount Sopris General Mount Sopris MGs 1000 Combined Log Mount Sopris MGs 1000 Gamma Log Mount Sopris MGs 1000 Resistivity amp SP x Cancel Depending upon the format of the geophysical file you will then be prompted to select which curve gamma ray resistivity SP etc in the file to display Some geophysical file formats support multiple curves in one file 234 WinLoG User s Guide Geophysical Data If the file format is LAS the Geophysical Log Type form shown below will be displayed Select the curve to display from the list of available curves in that file Geophysical Log Type 1 Depth 2 Caliper 3 Density Porosity 4 Delta AHO 5 Photoelectric Factor 6 Bulk Density T NPHI Output From an Application Program 8 HIGH RESOLUTION GAMMA RATY 9 Gamma Ray 0 SFL Resistivity Unaveraged 1 INDUCTION DEEP PHASOR RESISTIVITY 2 INDUCTION MEDIUM PHA amp SOR RESISTIVITY 3 Spontaneous Potential 4 SFL Resistivity averaged F CON DEEP PHASOR RESISTIVITY If the file format is Generic ASCII the Generic File Format form below will be displayed Generic File Format Column Format f Depths and Readings f Readings Only Number of Header Lines fo Number of Columns i FA Reading Column fi ts Depth Co
24. If no frame is selected above this field will not be displayed Frame Color This is the color of the frame to display around the para graph text When the Frame Color button is pressed a Color form is dis played Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color can be specified If no frame is selected above this field will not be dis played At the top of the Paragraph Text form is the Rich Text toolbar this tool bar can be used to modify the font characteristics of the text Before selecting a speed button the text to be modified should be selected with the mouse OP Arial fio Hm H F UA s4 EEIE MB U WinLoG User s Guide 247 Borehole Logs The speed buttons of the toolbar perform the following functions The Font Typeface box is used to E Arial select the name of the font to use for the selected text The Font Size box is used to set the size of the font for the 10 Ef selected text Cel The Font Color box is used to select the color of the font for a the selected text The Bold button is used to toggle the bold attribute of the H selected text on and off F The Italics button is used to toggle the italic attribute of the selected text on and off jg The Underline button is used to toggle the underline attribute of the selected text on and off RE The Superscript button is used to toggle the superscript attribute of the selected text on and off i T
25. If this checkbox 1s checked then the Win LoG main database will be backed up at a regular interval defined by the combobox to the right of it If this checkbox is not selected then the WinLoG main database will not be backed up WinLoG User s Guide 151 Projects 152 WinLoG User s Guide Borehole Logs ithology paid ft I Bz Usa SHB amp Br B A EE SY Mame Title Fi Top Depth 0 5 Bottom Depth Sn Top Line Style sand and gravel fill some organic debris m Horizontal Algnmen Vertical Algnmen Je elel 44 bp HHK x Cancel 7 Help Borehole Logs Borehole logs are used to display the results of oil and gas mining geotechnical and environmental drilling and sampling Logs can be used to display soil rock and ice samples Using WinLoG there are no limits to the types of borehole logs that can be created In WinLoG the term borehole logs also includes boring logs and well logs Borehole logs are grouped into projects and are stored in the WinLoG project database The format of the project database is Microsoft Access Each project is stored in a separate directory which can be on the same computer or spread across a network For a detailed discussion of the database structure see Database Structure in the Intro duction Chapter or Appendix B Logs can contain general borehole data ex location client project number lithologic descriptions and sym bols for each l
26. Width This is the width of the line expressed as a percentage of the column width For example a width of 50 would draw a line halfway across the column width and a width of 100 would draw a line across the column The width and offset should be less than or equal to 100 WinLoG User s Guide 213 Borehole Logs Style This is the style of the line When this column is selected a but ton will be displayed for the line type After this button is pressed the Line Properties form below is displayed This form is used to set the line style thickness color The buttons at the bottom of this tab are used for the following ld The Start button moves to the first line q The Previous button moves to the previous line p The Next button moves to the next line p The End button moves to the last line The Insert button creates a new line x The Delete button deletes this line Adding A Remark To add a new Remark column to a borehole log select the Add Remark menu item of the Remarks submenu of the Edit menu The Add Remark Name form below will then be displayed To add a new Remark dataset specify a unique name for the dataset and the type of dataset to create The remark data for this dataset will not be displayed on the borehole log unless the template contains a Remark column with the same name Add Remark Column Name 214 WinLoG User s Guide Text Interval Data Deleting a Remark To delete a remark
27. Wint eG Template Tutorial okee Fae Veer windows Help miaz ies gale Daa ee la OND Ss EE Hs OR a AAA moe els la Osse slaan 4 A s lt 0 Praject No Borehole Number Project ACME Consulting Company Client Encl T 44 Canadian Oaks Drive innn Viehiiby Onlan Site Location Geologist SUBSURFACE PROFILE SAMPLE Shear Strength Remarks DRIES 20 40 60 80 a os b Ed Elevation Column Modied Shea lofi Customizing the Depth Column The depth column can be customized to change the depth per page and type of depth axis To customize the depth column click on the depth column with the left mouse button The Columns form will be dis played and the current column will be the depth column Click on the Customize Column button to display the Customize Depth Column form on the next page For this tutorial change the Default Plot Depth Page to 20 and the Display Units to Feet Click on the Ok buttons on the Customize Depth Column and Columns forms to display the modified template WinLoG User s Guide 37 38 Tutorial Customize Depth Column Specify Default Depth Page Depth Scale DepthPage 2 Input Units i Feet Metres Asis Locatio C Left Side te Fight Side Major Tic Interval fi Minor Tic Interval 0 2 Labels fon of Number of Digits after Decimal 0 Xema 2 ve Customizing the Graph Column Graph columns can be used to dis
28. acters Directory The directory to store the project database tables up to 255 characters This directory can be on a local computer or a network server This is the directory where the project databases will be stored If the directory entered does not exist the program will create it Location The location of the project up to 255 characters This field is not currently used in WinLoG Reference Grid The reference grid for the X and Y co ordinate system up to 255 characters This field is not currently used in WinLoG Project DXF File The name of the DXF file that contains the Auto CAD drawing for the site This is an optional file and it will be overlain on the location map After the Ok button is pressed the Location Map Setup form will be displayed This form is used to specify how the location map for the project will be displayed FN Location Map Setup Grid and Location Map Map Defaults Grid Defaults show Location Map show Grid No je Yes 0 No je Yes Min Horizonal Value 0 Horizontal Spacing 100 Max Horizonal Value 500 Vertical Spacing 100 Min Vertical alue DO Line Style een so Max Vertical Value y Ok X Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide Opening an Existing Project There are tabs for adjusting the scales grid axes etc The most impor tant parameters to set are the minimum and maximum values for the horizontal and vertical axes The Location Map Setup form
29. lt WinLoG Database gt Samples lt Windows Fonts gt lt Common Files gt Microsoft Shared DAO lt Common Files gt Muicrosoft Shared DAO lt Windows System gt lt Windows System gt lt Windows System gt lt Windows System gt lt Windows System gt lt Windows System gt lt Windows System gt lt Windows System gt lt Windows System gt lt Windows System gt lt Windows System gt lt Windows System gt lt Windows System gt lt Windows System gt lt Windows System gt lt Windows System gt Sample WinLoG project GAEA symbol font Access database driver Access database driver Access database driver Access database driver Access database driver Access database driver Access database driver Access database driver Access database driver Access database driver Access database driver Access database driver Access database driver Access database driver Access database driver HTML Help driver Rich Text driver Rich Text driver lt WinLoG gt WinLoG program directory specified during installation lt WinLoG Database gt WinLoG database directory specified during installation lt Windows Fonts gt Microsoft Windows font directory typically Windows Fonts lt Common Files gt Microsoft Windows common files directory typically Program Files Common Files lt Windows System gt Microsoft Windows system directory typically Windows System Published by GAEA Technologies 87 Garden Street Whitby
30. ple just click the left mouse button on the table The table data will be displayed in the Table Data form shown below Table Data Form EE Ioj x pm jo fe fe 34 4 43 35 4 0 4 6 44 4 0 38 44 46 38 Hole 4 45 5 52 45 Hoed Text Justification Vertical Alignment a ole H y OK aE Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide 259 Borehole Logs The data for the table can be edited in the rows and columns on the form The text justification and font for the log data in the table can be set separately from the template using the buttons at the bottom of the form The Left Justify button will left justify the selected text The Center Justify button will center justify the selected text The Right Justify button will center justify the selected text Hl The Top Align button will align table headers with the top of the table cells The Center Align button will align table headers in the center of E the table cells Hi The Bottom Align button will align table headers with the bottom of the table cells The Value Font button lets the user set the font type of Value Font the text in the table The final result will be a table that will be very similar to the one below k mwa e oe foe foe 260 WinLoG User s Guide Tables Log Based Tables Floating tables can be added anywhere on a log These tables are dis played over top of any information on the log Ther
31. press the Line Style button A Line Properties form will be displayed shown in the Columns section This form can be used to set the line style width and color WinLoG User s Guide 317 318 Templates Text Columns The text column style can be changed by selecting the column and using the Customize button on the Columns tab When the Customize button is pressed the Customize Text Column form below will be dis played Customize Text Column Justification Onientatio i Horizontal Vertical x Cancel 7 Help The Customize Text Column form can be used to set the following defaults Justification The text can be justified left center or right within the column This justification only applies to text lines and will not apply to memos entered in the text column Orientation The text can be oriented either horizontally or vertically This orientation only applies to text lines and will not apply to memos WinLoG User s Guide Text Interval Columns Text Interval Columns The text interval column style can be changed by selecting the column and using the Customize button on the Columns tab When the Cus tomize button is pressed the Customize Text Interval Column form on the next page will be displayed This form is also displayed for the Facies Constituents and Members columns These columns use the same defaults as the text interval columns Customize Text Interval Column Ver
32. sandy clay till with embedded gravel Silty Clay saturated grey clay with pockets of sand 4 Silty Sand Grey well sorted fine grained silty sand with clay lenses sand Dark grey fine to medium grained sand with abundant shell fragments Deltaic Sand Fine grained dark brown deltaic sand with interbedded clay Oil Sand z Black fine grained well sorted Set oil sand with interbedded grey TE clay Limestone Blue to green highly weathered limestone with occassional fractures WinLoG User s Guide 241 242 Borehole Logs Percent Cuttings Data Percent cuttings data are collected normally during mud logging and are used to denote the relative percentage of different lithologies at a depth For example the relative percentages of sand shale and silt may be entered at several depth intervals The lithologies that can be entered for the percent cuttings are specified in the percent cuttings column of the template The symbols for each of the lithologies will be scaled and drawn at each of the depth intervals Log Percent Cuttings Form a0 25 44 PHH X Cancel Help To add or edit the percent cuttings data select the Percent Cuttings menu item from the Edit menu or click the left mouse button inside the Percent Cuttings column The Log Percent Cuttings form below will be displayed On this form you can enter the Start and End Depths of the cuttings interval and the perc
33. they can include bitmaps and para graph text A company logo and or site map stored as bitmaps can also be included in a legend Although you can use an unlimited number of lithologic libraries each with 18 symbols only one library can be represented on the legend If you need to show more libraries it is recommended to create additional legends If more symbols are specified then can be fit on the page they will be truncated at the bottom of the page Each symbol also has a default symbol description stored in the library which 1s used when creating legends When a legend is created the default description will be used for the symbol description in the legend If this description is then edited in the legend the new descrip tion will only appear in that legend The new description in the legend will not replace the default description in the library To change the default description in the library the description must be changed in the library as discussed in the next chapter However the actual sym bols are the same in the legend as in the library and if edited in the legend the symbols in the library will change as well Legends Legends are stored in the WinLoG master database The format of the master database is Microsoft Access 97 This database is stored in the Main Database Directory For a detailed discussion of the database structure see Database Structure in the Introduction Chapter or Appen dix B Thi
34. 240 Borehole Logs The Insert button creates a new data point The Delete button deletes this data point Lithologic Cross Plots Lithologic cross plots are used to show the relationship between lithol ogy and a depth dependent variable for example porosity lead con tent resistivity A graph a bar graph or a geophysical log can represent the depth dependent variable The cross plot is generated by filling the region on the left side of the curve formed by the graph bar graph or geophysical log with the lithology symbols for each layer Other then setting the column type in the template to a lithologic cross plot the editing of data for cross plots 1s identical to that of graphs bar graphs and geophysical logs These types of editing are discussed above and are not repeated here An example of a lithologic cross plot using a gamma ray geophysical log is provided on the next page WinLoG User s Guide Gamma Ray Log Density Correction OOM OO Mz she ly de shy she Ate hte y 5 PAA le nee nn E a E ien eo oe eS De eer AE De Toms ce Poe nye oa ey Hee ee a Ee oie Sire Tae en en te E aoe g DE CEDI pans an ee nme SEOs en Gm on ee fate Een ene H EE EI IE IEI ES El En ES i el EE B El ptt ttt nS aS ha ES EE IEEE Sees ee nn ttt tt tt BE ee es eree herria p Lithology Lithologic Cross Plots Description Muskeg aq Black organic muskeg Sandy Clay Till Brown
35. AE SE SE SE SESE SEND a d p lea Fe o la la la o jl die ts eono Wk I a aa 3 gna OE SEA l REEF k r a Pele tai lTi lolo le T i Ean xer diie bbe a x D FRE Mee Oe b e A Ee ee tg eee p e Cancel teg The Spell Check button will display the Spell Checker form shown below and will check the spelling in the memo field The dictionary used to check the spelling is set in the program Preferences see Chapter 3 When the Add button 1s pressed the word will be appended to the custom dictionary Spell Checker Not found Sita Replace With Silty eplace gy Add or Skip Once Suggestions or Skip Always 7 Suggest x Close idad WinLoG Users Guide Depths and Elevations Depths and Elevations Before entering any log data in the main block of the log the borehole depth should be entered The borehole depth is usually depending upon the template displayed in a column in the main block of the log There is no limit to the depth of a borehole log The depth entered must be in the same units as the input units for the template The depth and elevation parameters of the borehole log can be entered and edited by selecting the Depths amp Elevations menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mouse button inside the depth or elevation column of the borehole log After performing one of the above tasks the Depth and Elevation form below will be displayed This form has two tabs one for
36. Button The Zoom In button allows the user to zoom in the field of view to a specific area To zoom into a specific area all the user needs to do is click on the Zoom In button on the toolbar Next using the left mouse button cliek on the location of the upper left corner of the desired view ing area Then while holding the left mouse button down drag the mouse to the location of the lower right corner of the viewing area Then release the mouse button Once the mouse button is released the new viewing area is shown Ch Zoom Out Button The Zoom Out button allows the user to zoom out from the users field of view by 50 each time the button 1s clicked WinLoG User s Guide Location Map Toolbar Zoom Full Button The Zoom Full button adjusts the location map view to the grid coordi nates that are set in the Location Map setup Just click once to view the full map size Location Map Setup Button The Location Map setup button allows the user access to the setup pref erences of the location map Clieking on the button opens up the Loca tion Map Preferences Form There are four tabs on this form e Grid Map tab e Axis tab e Fence Line tab e Units Tab Grid Map Tab The Grid Map Tab sets the Grid and Map defaults for the project loca tion map Fi Location Map Preferences Form Oj xi Grid and Location Map Map Defaults Grid Defaults Show Location Map Show Grid C No Yes C No Yes Min Horizonal
37. Cancel 7 Help The following information can be entered and edited using the Linked Text Intervals form shown above Top Depth This is the top depth of the text interval If a line 1s speci fied it will be drawn across the column at this depth Bottom Depth This is the bottom depth of the text interval If a line is specified it will be drawn across the column at this depth Text This is the text to display in each of the linked columns up to 255 characters If the Facies Constituents or Members columns are linked to the text intervals they will also be displayed Line Type This is the style of the line When this column is selected a button will be displayed for the line type After this button is pressed a Line Properties form is displayed This form is used to set the line style thickness color WinLoG User s Guide Text Interval Data The buttons at the bottom of this form are used for the following r The Start button moves to the first interval 4 The Previous button moves to the previous interval pk The Next button moves to the next interval p The End button moves to the last interval The Insert button creates a new interval pd The Delete button deletes this interval Adding A Text Interval Dataset To add a new Text Interval dataset to a borehole log select the Add Text Interval Type menu item of the Text Intervals submenu of the Edit menu The Add Text Interval Column form below will then be di
38. Field Name Data Type Field Size Key 1 ProjectNumber Text 100 ij BoreholeNumber Text 100 Integer ij Text 255 Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Yes No AspectRatio Yes No Database Structure Data Type _ Field Size Key coe pe Text 100 1 BoreholeNumb Text 100 er LineNumber Integer Integer Double Double Double Double Integer Integer Long Integer Yes No ArrowPosition Integer Arrowsize Integer Table Name Field Name Data Type Field Size Key 1 ProjectNumber Text 100 ij BoreholeNumber Text 100 RectangleNumber Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Long Integer Integer Integer Long Integer Database Structure Table Name Field Name Data Type Field Size Key ProjectNumber BoreholeNumber HeaderFontSize HeaderFontFont ValueHorzAlign Text Text Integer Integer Double Double Double Double Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Text Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Text Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer 100 100 255 259 Database Structure Data Type Field Size Key MapBitmaps MapEllipses sere rere BoreholeNumber Text Text Long Integer Long Integer Text Long Integer Long Integer Data Type Text Long Intege
39. File menu item from the Export submenu of the Import Export Data submenu The Export AGS Project form below will be displayed FN Export AGS Project lol x Boreholes to Export All Boreholes El X Cancel Help 3 On this form you can select to export all of the boreholes or as many as desired to the AGS project file ax Save in Logs ci Er Save as type AGS Files Cancel ZA WinLoG User s Guide Importing Exporting Pocket WinLoG Data After the boreholes have been selected the Export AGS File form on the previous page will be displayed Specify the name of the AGS file to use and then press the Ok button to export the logs Importing Exporting Pocket WinLoG Data Pocket WinLoG is a separate program sold by GAEA Technologies that is used on Pocket PCs Pocket WinLoG can be used to collect boring and well information in the field with a minimum of data entry After the data has been collected it can be uploaded or emailed to a desktop computer and imported into WinLoG This method of data collection eliminates the need to record boring and well information on paper forms in the field and then enter the data into WinLoG at the office As in the desktop version of WinLoG the program is designed around the project concept for storing log data This concept allows the user to have numerous projects and an unlimited number of logs within each project When it is time to upload the log dat
40. Help The Excel spreadsheet to be imported should be specified as the File Name on the form It can be selected using the button to the right After the Excel file has been specified the form will be updated as shown on the next page with the available data that can be imported using the template WinLoG User s Guide 271 272 Borehole Logs Import Excel Data q File Mame C MyFiles exceldata xls gt Open Script IA Save Script Layer Bottom Depth Layer Title Layer Description Layer Macro sample Depth sample Size Jf OK sample Number sample Type X Cancel sample M alue sample Recovery Core Top Depth Core Bottom Depth Core Macro Description Depth Description Text Facies Top Depth Facies Bottom Depth Facies Value Constituents Top Depth Constituents Bottom Depth Constituents Value The Data Type column on the form shows the types of data from the template that can be imported One or more of these data types can be imported by specifying the cell range in the Cells column The cell range can be specified by typing it in or by clicking on the Select column A Select button will be displayed in the column click on this button to display the spreadsheet in the Excel Spreadsheet form shown on the next page To select the cell range click on the first cell and then hold the left mouse button down while selecting the cells When the cell range has been selected click the right mouse butto
41. Kik Sand massive A Gand w hedded ue H aas x Cancel 7 Help Text This is the text of the lithology macro up to 255 characters The text of the macro will be inserted into the layer description Symbol This is the lithologic symbol for the macro When the macro is inserted into the layer description there will be the option to change the layer symbol to this symbol When this column is selected a button will appear for the symbol To change the symbol click on the button and the Select Lithologic Symbol form below will be displayed This form can be used to select the lithologic library and symbol Select Lithologic Symbol ae ant 2 ar x Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide 141 142 Projects Creating and Editing Well Macros Well macros can be used to quickly add standard well components water level information and text annotation to a log Macros can be used for single well installation complex nested wells above ground well casings etc All well macros are stored as Type 3 wells Well macros can be created using the Well Macros menu item on the File menu or by saving existing well completion details of a log as a well macro There is no limit to the number of macros that can be used To create or edit a Well Macro using the File menu select the Well Macros menu item The Select Well Macros form below will be dis played listing all of the current well macros Select Well Mac
42. Ontario LIN 9E7 Canada
43. Size Key Long Integer Text Memo Text Integer Database Structure The WinLoG Project database consists of the following tables Table Name Field Name Data Type Field Size Key 1 Borehole ProjectNumber Text 100 ij BoreholeNumber Text 100 Integer Double Double Double Double Double Double NoElevData Yes No LastTemplate Text 255 Data Type Field Size Key _ eee Text zeen Text BoreholeNumber Text Integer Text Text Yes No Yes No BroiociNumber Text BoreholeNumber Text Integer Text Memo Database Structure Data Type _ Field Size Key ee Text 1 BoreholeNumb Text Integer Double Text Text Text Text Double Double Double Integer Integer Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer er ple Text EE Text 1 BoreholeNumb Text Integer Double Text Text Database Structure Data Type _ Field Size Key _ 7 ProjectNumber Text BoreholeNumber Text Integer Double Double Text Memo Text Integer Integer Integer Integer Long Integer Integer Text Integer StratumLibrary2 Text ContactAngle Double FillSize Double FillSize2 Double StratumFGColor Long Integer StratumBGColor Long Integer StratumFGColor2 Long Integer StratumBGColor2 Long Integer StratumLineStyle Integer StratumLineW idth Integer StratumLineColor Integer Table Name Field Name Data Type Field Size Key ProjectNumber Text 100 BoreholeNumber Text 100 i Number Integer ij Depth Double WaterConte
44. The Delete button deletes this rectangle paf The following information can be entered and edited using this form Left This is the position of the left border of the rectangle in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Rectangle button on the toolbar is used to create the rectangle the program will fill in this posi tion The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Right This is the position of the right border of the rectangle in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Rectangle button on the toolbar is used to create the rectangle this position will be filled in by the program WinLoG User s Guide Rectangles Top This is the position of the top border of the rectangle in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Rectangle button on the toolbar is used to create the rectangle this position will be filled in by the program Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the rectangle in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Rectangle button on the toolbar is used to create the rectangle this position will be filled in by the program Line Style This is the style of the rectangle border The line style can be changed by pressing the Line Style button A Line Properties form will then be displayed Using this form the style color and width of the rectangle can be set Fill Color This is the color to use to fill the insi
45. This is the symbol to use for the packing material in this inter val One of the 8 symbols shown can be selected by clicking on it with the mouse Well Type 3 Column Well Type 3 columns can be used to represent complicated well details Almost all of the well information is drawn to scale including casings screens covers caps and miscellaneous fittings This type of well col umn can contain multiple piezometers casings and screens with vari able diameters annotation and multiple water depths Besides being able to represent very complicated wells this type of well column 1s also very easy to use and is recommended for most well displays An example of the type of well diagram that can be created is shown on the next page This data can be entered individually for each log or by using a well macro Well macros can be used to quickly add standard well compo nents water level information and text annotation to a log Macros can be used for single well installation complex nested wells above ground well casings etc All well macros are stored as Type 3 wells WinLoG User s Guide 195 Borehole Logs Well macros can also be created after the well data has been input for a log using the Save as Well Macro button on the Well form When this button is pressed a form will be displayed where you can specify the name of the well macro tom r El T n Z 7 a E ni a T a a E i be Ll Fan
46. This is the vertical position of the start of the line in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line the program will fill in this field End X This is the horizontal position of the end of the line in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line this field will be filled in by the pro gram End Y This is the vertical position of the end of the line in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line this field will be filled in by the program Line Style This is the style of the line The line style can be changed by pressing the Line Style button A Line Properties form will then be displayed Using this form the style color and width of the line can be set Arrowhead To display an arrowhead at the start or end of the line select yes Arrow Position This is position to place the arrowhead either at the start or end of the line If no arrowhead is selected above this field will not appear Arrowhead Size This is the size of the arrowhead If no arrowhead is selected above this field will not appear WinLoG User s Guide Rectangles Rectangles Rectangles can be added anywhere on a legend There is no limit to the number of rectangles that can be added Adding a Rectangle There are two methods that can be used to add a
47. To change the name of the file edit this name or click on the but ton to the right of the name If the button to the right is pressed an Open bitmap file form will be displayed Select the desired file and then press the Open button Stretch Bitmap Select yes to stretch the bitmap to fit within the speci fied borders If no 1s selected only the center of the bitmap and page can be entered for the position If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to add the bitmap Stretch Bitmap is set to No Maintain Aspect Ratio Select yes to keep the aspect ratio of the bitmap the same as stored in the file If yes is selected the bottom of the bitmap will be automatically adjusted to maintain the aspect ratio If Stretch Bitmap is set to No then this field will not be displayed and it is assumed that the aspect ratio 1s maintained Left This is the position of the left border of the bitmap in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to create the bitmap this field will not be displayed If Stretch Bitmap is set to No then this field will not be displayed The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Right This is the position of the right border of the bitmap in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to create the bitmap this field will not be displayed If Stretch Bitmap is set to No then this field will not be
48. Value f 1 000 Horizontal Spacing fi 00 Max Horizonal Value fi 608 Vertical Spacing fi 00 Min Vertical Value 200 Max Vertical Value f 392 X Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide 83 84 Projects The following information can be entered and edited using this tab Show Location Map This radio button allows the user to turn the location map on or off Min Horizontal Value This is the position of the left border of the location map in real grid coordinates of either feet or meters The units of measurement are specified on the Units tab Max Horizontal Value This is the position of the right border of the location map in real grid coordinates of either feet or meters The units of measurement are specified on the Units tab Min Vertical Value This is the position of the bottom border of the location map in real grid coordinates of either feet or meters The units of measurement are specified on the Units tab Max Vertical Value This is the position of the top border of the loca tion map in real grid coordinates of either feet or meters The units of measurement are specified on the Units tab Show Grid This is used to turn the grid on and off Horizontal Spacing This is the spacing between horizontal grid lines as shown on the location map in real grid coordinates of either feet or meters Vertical Spacing This 1s the spacing between vertical grid lines as shown on the location map in
49. When pressed the cursor will change to a cross To draw an ellipse press and hold down the left mouse button at the upper left corner of the ellipse Move the mouse to the lower right corner of the ellipse and release the mouse button WinLoG User s Guide 375 3 6 Legends Paragraphs Floating paragraph text boxes can be added anywhere on a legend These text boxes are displayed over top of any information on the leg end There is no limit to the number of paragraph text boxes that can be displayed Paragraph text boxes are typically used to add comments to a legend Adding a Paragraph There are two methods that can be used to add a Paragraph Text box to a legend 1 By clicking on the Paragraph button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the upper left corner of the paragraph text box Then while holding the left mouse button down drag the mouse to the location of the lower right corner and then release the mouse button While the mouse button is held down a mar quee box will be drawn to indicate the location of the paragraph box After the button has been released the Paragraph Text form shown in the section below will be displayed 2 By selecting the Paragraph Text menu item from the Edit menu or Popup menu and then clicking on the Add button on the Paragraph Text form This will create a new paragraph Using this method the location of the paragraph must be specified o
50. WinLoG Data Borehole Data List GEDPHY Geophyscial Example Grill Method Sheet x Cancel 7 Help After the Ok button of the Import Version 2 Logs form has been pressed the logs will be imported into the project During the importa tion the program will check to make sure that the Borehole Numbers specified are unique If the Borehole Number is not unique you will be asked for a unique borehole number Templates To import version 2 templates into the WinLoG Master Database select the Templates menu item from the Import Version 2 Data submenu The Import Version 2 Template Files form on the next page will then be dis played Only one template at a time can be imported into the master database Select a template and then press the Open button WinLoG User s Guide 101 102 Projects Import Version 2 Template Files i 2 x Look in Template d e E HENVTECHI TEM ENVTECH TEM E GEOTECH5 TEM ENVTECH2 TEM Farch tem GEOTECH6 TEM ENVTECH3 TEM GEOPHY2 TEM PENNDOT TEM ENVTECH4 TEM E GEOPHY TEM ROCK1 TEM ENVTECHS TEM amp GEOTECH1 TEM S TUTORIAL TEM ENVTECH6 TEM S GEOQTECH2 TEM E USARMY1 TEM ENVTECH7 TEM amp GEOTECH3 TEM S WATER1 TEM ENVTECHS TEM GEOTECH4 TEM X Files of type Template Files Cancel ZA The Enter Template Name form shown below will be displayed when the template is saved Enter a unique template name not currently in the database and press the Ok bu
51. WinLoG User s Guide 399 400 Symbol Libraries Pk The Next button displays the next symbol P The End button displays the last symbol Description Tab The Description tab shown on the previous page is used to enter and edit the description for the symbol There is no limit to the length of the description At the top of the tab there is a Rich Text toolbar used to format the description add symbols and perform spell checking OP Arial IE E B IUa a E Et Ee B The use of the Rich Text toolbar is described below Before selecting a speed button the text to be modified should be selected with the mouse or the cursor should be placed at the desired insertion point The Font Typeface box is used to T Arial select the name of the font to use for the selected text The Font Size box is used to set the size of the font for the a selected text The Font Color box is used to select the color of the font for MN the selected text WinLoG User s Guide T i Mi Lithology Symbols The Bold button is used to toggle the bold attribute of the selected text on and off The Italics button is used to toggle the italic attribute of the selected text on and off The Underline button is used to toggle the underline attribute of the selected text on and off The Superscript button is used to toggle the superscript attribute of the selected text on and off The Subscri
52. WirFence Example 3 C Program Files G 4E4 0 atabase ink ences 4 4 gt Pl XC Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide Managing a Project Database After a project has been selected the Select Backup Database form below will be displayed This form lists all the backup databases for an individual project The date and time information indicates the date and exact time at which the project databases were backed up Mi select Backup Database O x Date Time Infomation 1570172003 4 22 28 PM 3756358227 32705 Sampleswinlog b 15 01 72005 4 27 28 PM 37635605 A3EES Sampleswinlog ba 15 01 42003 4 32 28 PM 3 636 6892161343 Sampleswinlog b 15 01 42003 4 37 28 PM 3763652550 355 Sampleswinlog b 1570172003 4 42 25 PM 3 636 6961603919_ Sampleswinlog b 15 01 2003 4 54 47 PM 37636 7047216435 Sampleswinlog y OF x Cancel Help Select the database you wish to restore and then press the Ok button The project database will then be restored Restoring the Project List Database To restore a backup of the Project List Database select the Project List menu item from the Restore Backup Database submenu A confirma tion form will be displayed select yes to continue and the Select Backup Database form on the next page will be displayed The Select Backup Database form lists all the backup databases for the project list database The date time information indicates the date and exact time at which the p
53. You can email technical support by selecting the Email Technical Support menu item from the Help menu This menu item will create an email message using your default email program WinLoG User s Guide Getting Technical Support To connect to GAEA s Internet site select the GAEA s Web Site menu item from the Help menu Below are the various methods to contact technical support Service Contact Method Web Site http www gaea ca E mail support dgaea ca Phone 905 666 7527 FAX 905 666 3744 Mail GAEA Technologies Ltd 87 Garden Street Whitby Ontario Canada LIN 9E7 After receiving your communication GAEA will respond promptly with either the solution to the problem or a schedule for solving the problem Before Contacting GAEA Before contacting technical support we suggest you try the following to help us resolve your problem e Determine if the problem is specific to the cross section you are creating Does it occur with other templates or other cross section e Does the problem occur every time or intermittently e If you have another PC does the problem occur on it WinLoG User s Guide 431 432 Help Information to Provide When contacting GAEA please include or have the following informa tion available e The 3 digit version of the WinLoG program you are using This can be obtained from the About form on the Help menu e A description of the problem to help us duplicate the problem In
54. an ASCII file When the AutoCAD DXF menu item of the Export Version 3 Data sub menu is selected the Export AutoCAD DXF File form below will be displayed Specify the file name to use and press the Save button Export AutoCAD DXF File El E a test DXF aal test DF Save as type AutoCAD Exchange Files Cancel The AutoCAD DXF format does not allow for the exchange of bitmaps or Windows fonts In addition the color palettes used can vary depend ing upon the application Because of these limitations with the format the exported logs will not contain any bitmap or font information and the colors may vary All of the text in the log will be exported in ROMAN font and none of the bitmaps used to draw the soil symbols well seals and packing and sample types will be exported If you require this information in the exported file it 1s recommended that you export the log as a bitmap file or enhanced metafile instead The bitmap file or enhanced metafile can then be imported into Auto CAD Only borehole logs can be exported to DXF file format Since legends are primarily comprised of bitmaps there is no facility to export them to DXF format It is recommended that legends be exported in bitmap or enhanced metafile format and then imported if required WinLoG User s Guide 133 134 Projects Exporting to an AGS File One or more borehole logs in a project can be exported to an AGS file by selecting the AGS
55. be crosseplotted with lithology e Either one or two geophysical logs can be displayed in a column WinLoG User s Guide X E ntroduction Template Features e New templates can be created by specifying the number of columns the inclusion of a header and footer page size and page layout e Templates can have either a one or two page format The two page format allows for a larger header or footer on the first page of the log and a more concise header or footer on the second and subsequent pages of the log e The location of header and footer titles columns and other text can be positioned easily and accurately e Horizontal vertical and diagonal lines and arrows can be drawn any where on a template The thickness style and color of the lines can be specified e An unlimited number of header and footer titles can be specified for each template titles are then displayed when entering and displaying log data e Headers and footers can contain checkboxes that can be checked when entering log data e An unlimited number of columns can be used in each template e Columns can be for depth elevation lithologic symbol lithologic description sample data well completion details graphs geophysical logs or text e An unlimited number of section titles can be specified each section can include any number of columns e Added four new types of columns that can be used in a template These are text interval f
56. buttons on the toolbar is explained below I a cy Eeten He amp 4 amp al a Ee O The New button is used to create a new template WinLoG User s Guide 24 Getting Started al Lar The Open button is used to open an existing template The speed buttons below will be dimmed if no template 1s currently opened F O Ee The Close button is used to close a template The Save button is used to save changes to the template The SaveAs button is used to save the template under a different name The Print button is used to print the template The Undo button is used to undo changes to the template The Zoom in button is used to expand the template by a factor of 25 this button will be dimmed 1f the template is already zoomed to a factor of 200 The Zoom out button 1s used to shrink the template by a factor of 25 this button will be dimmed 1f the template is already zoomed to a factor of 25 The Full Screen button is used to reset the zoom factor to full screen 100 The Up button 1s used to scroll the borehole log up one page The Down button is used to scroll the borehole log down one page The Table button is used to add a table to the log WinLoG User s Guide Toolbars az The Paragraph Text button is used to add paragraph text to the template Ta The Bitmap button 1s used to add a bitmap to the template The Line button is used to draw lines and arrows on the tem
57. checked the Library Toolbar will be dis played Window Menu This menu contains the standard Windows commands for selecting and arranging windows on the desktop Help Menu This menu contains the following commands Contents displays the contents of the online help Search for Help On displays help on a specified topic How to Use Help shows how to use the online help Transfer Registration used to transfer the registration from one Contents Search for Help On How to Use Help Transfer Registration Email Technical Support Email Current Log Template computer to another Ug ae pe ue Email Technical Support used GAEAS Web Site to send an email to technical sup Ahat port Email Current Log Template used to email the currently displayed log and template to technical support Upgrade WinLoG used to download and install the latest upgrade from the Internet GAEA s Web Site used to display GAEA s web site in the default Internet browser About used to display version information about the program WinLoG User s Guide Tip The exact version number of the program can be obtained by selecting the Help and About command This version number should be reported when obtaining technical support 15 Getting Started Popup Menus Popup menus can be displayed at any time by pressing the right mouse button The menu that will be displayed depends upon what is currently displ
58. coordinates either feet or meters If the Paragraph button on the toolbar is used to create the paragraph the program will fill in this posi tion The units of measurement are specified in the location map grid settings Top This is the position of the top border of the paragraph in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the Paragraph button on the toolbar is used to create the paragraph the program will fill in this position The units of measurement are specified in the location map grid set tings Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the paragraph in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the Paragraph button on the toolbar is used to create the paragraph the program will fill in this position The units of measurement are specified in the location map grid settings Background Color This is the background color of the paragraph text box When the Background color button is pressed a Color form 1s dis played Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color can be specified Frame Select yes to display a frame around the paragraph text Frame Width This is the line width of the frame around the paragraph text If no frame is selected above this field will not be displayed Frame Color This is the color of the frame to display around the para graph text When the Frame Color button is pressed a Color form is dis played Using this form a basic color can be select
59. currently displayed borehole log template or legend select the Exchange File menu item from the Export submenu An Export form similar to the one on the previous page will be displayed Specify the file name for the exported data and then press the Save but ton Borehole log exchange files have the extension lg3 for version 3 and 1g4 for version 4 template exchange files have the extension tm3 for version 3 and tm4 for version 4 and legend exchange files have the extension lgd3 for version 3 and lgd4 for version 4 After the data has been exported from another project it can then be imported into the current project Exporting to the Clipboard Any currently displayed borehole log template or legend can be exported to the Windows clipboard The format used to store the data in the clipboard is similar to a bitmap file To export the data to the clip board select the Clipboard menu item from the Export submenu The Bitmap Information form shown below will be displayed Bitmap Information Horizontal Number of Pixels zoo Vertical Humber of Pixels fi 150 x Cancel 7 Help The horizontal and vertical number of pixels determines the resolution used to store the bitmap in the clipboard The higher the resolution the clearer the picture will be The number of colors is the same as the cur rent screen resolution WinLoG User s Guide 131 Tip Higher resolutions should
60. custom the page vertical length in inches must be specified Orientation This is the orientation of the page either portrait longer side 1s vertical or landscape longer side is horizontal WinLoG User s Guide Saving a Legend Saving a Legend To save a Legend after it has been edited either select the Save Fi Legend menu item of the Legends submenu of the File menu or press the Save button on the legend toolbar wy To save the legend under a different name press the SaveAs but ton on the legend toolbar The Enter Legend Name form shown below will be displayed Enter a unique legend name and then press the Ok button Enter Legend Name Existing Legends British USCS Unique Legend Mame wf Ok x Cancel 7 Help Deleting a Legend To delete a legend select the Delete Legend menu item from the Leg ends submenu of the File Menu The Delete Legends form will be dis played A single legend can be selected by clicking on it and pressing the Open button A range of legends can be selected by clicking on the beginning of the range and then holding down the Shift key while clieking on the end of the range Multiple legends can be selected by holding down the CTRL key while clicking on the legends WinLoG User s Guide 393 Legends amp Printing a Legend To print a legend either click the right mouse button and select the Print menu item from the popup menu or press the Print butt
61. depth information and one for elevation information Depth Tab The Depth tab shown above is used to enter and edit the following Depths amp Elevations Start Depth f End Depth 14 5 Optional Specify f Depth Page Depth Scale Depth Page zi x Cancel 7 Help information Start Depth This is the start depth of the borehole normally equal to 0 for ground surface If you would like to show an aboveground well cover or stick up enter a negative number The units can be in either feet or meters depending upon the template settings WinLoG User s Guide 167 168 Borehole Logs End Depth This is the bottom depth of the borehole in the same units as specified in the template settings There 1s no limit to the depth of the borehole Depth Page The vertical scale of the borehole log can be specified as a depth per page or as a depth scale The depth per page specified in the template normally determines the plot depth per page however this can be overridden in the log by specifying a depth per page here This feature allows you to change plot depths per page without changing the template To accept the default template plot depth per page specify the plot depth per page as zero when editing the log Depth Scale The vertical scale of the borehole log can be specified as a depth per page or as a depth scale The depth scale specified in the template normally determines the vertical scale however t
62. depth scale Depth Page If the depth per page 1s selected there will be an input field for the depth page The depth per page specified in the template normally determines the plot depth per page however this can be over ridden in the log by specifying a depth per page when editing the log 310 WinLoG User s Guide Depth Column Depth Scale If the depth scale 1s selected there will be an input field for the scale factor The scale factor is specified such that 1 unit on the page is equal to a specified number of units of the log The units are determined from the display units Input Units This is the units that will be used when entering depths for borehole log data The input units do not have to be the same as the display units Display Units This is the display units of the depth axis They can be feet meters or both These units do not have to be the same as the input depth units If both are specified then the depth axis will have feet displayed on the left and meters displayed on the right Axis Location The depth axis can be located on the left or right side of the depth column If it is located on the left side of the column the labels will appear on the right side of the tics If itis located on the right side of the column the labels will appear on the left side of the tics Major Tic Interval This is depth interval between labels on the depth axis Minor Tic Interval This is the depth interval between tic
63. dif ferent name amp The Print button is used to print the borehole log a The Undo button is used to undo changes to the borehole log The Zoom in button is used to expand the borehole log by a fac tor of 25 this button will be dimmed if the cross section is already zoomed to a factor of 200 The Zoom out button is used to shrink the borehole log by a Ch factor of 25 this button will be dimmed if the cross section is already zoomed to a factor of 25 The Full Screen button is used to reset the zoom factor to full screen The Copy button is used to make a copy of the borehole log 42 The Change Template button is used to change the template that is used to format the borehole log WinLoG User s Guide Toolbars i The Up button is used to scroll the borehole log up one page The Down button is used to scroll the borehole log down one page The Table button is used to add a table to the log The Paragraph Text button is used to add paragraph text to the IE cross section zl The Bitmap button is used to add a bitmap to the cross section The Line button is used to draw lines and arrows on the cross section oo E The Rectangle button is used to draw rectangles on the cross section 4 The Deviation button is used to toggle between true and mea sured depths for the log Template Toolbar The Template Toolbar is displayed below and is used to edit templates Each of the speed
64. e Borehole logs can be exported to the Windows clipboard a bitmap file a metafile or an AutoCAD DXF file e The ability to import borehole data from Excel files has been added This feature is available in the Edit menu and can be used to import lithologic descriptions and macros core macros samples graphs and remarks Each of these data types is mapped to a range of cells in the spreadsheet A script file can be created containing the cell ranges for each data type The script file can then be used to import spreadsheet data into several boreholes without resentering the cell ranges In addi tion to cell ranges formulas can be entered to calculate the data values from one or two ranges Lithologic e An unlimited number of lithologic layers can be added e Each lithologic layer can have an optional title e Macros can be used to insert selected text comments into the layer descriptions e Macros contain text and symbol definitions and can be added and edited by the user e Layer descriptions can contain rich text i e varying fonts colors and symbols e Symbols for each lithologic layer can be selected from an unlimited number of lithologic libraries each library contains 18 symbols e Lithologic symbols can be split vertically to display two symbols for each layer WinLoG User s Guide vil vill E ntroduction e The contact angle between lithologic symbols can be specified and used to represen
65. hs Line Style Border Position n E Right Top Main Title Font Title Font Well Title Font Bottom Horizontal Bitmap Size 30 Vertical Bitmap Size 20 Th layout tab shown above is used to enter and edit the following infor mation for the legend Main Title Font This is the font to use for the main title of the legend When the button is pressed the Font form below is displayed This form can be used to select the font name style size and color Font Ei Ed Font Font style Size Cancel Arial Black d Italic Fr Arial Narrow Fp Arial Narrow Special G Fr Arial Narrow Special G F Arial Rounded MT Bol FP Arial Special G1 Effects Sample T Strikeout Underline AaB b Yy2z Color Maroon ki Script Wester WinLoG User s Guide Titles and Layout Title Font This is the font to use for the lithologic library title well symbols title and sample symbols title When the button 1s pressed the Font form shown on the previous page is displayed This form can be used to select the font name style size and color Well Title Font This is the font to use for the sub titles of the well symbols For example a Well Type 3 has the following sub titles Well Covers Well Caps Casings and Screens Joints and Miscellaneous When the button is pressed the Font form shown on the previous page is displayed This form can be used to select the font name s
66. information and press the Ok button to import the data If the data is to be imported into an existing project the Open Project form will be displayed after the Existing Project button is pressed Select the project and press the Ok button to import the data Exporting Templates to Pocket WinLoG One or more templates in WinLoG can be exported and downloaded to Pocket WinLoG by selecting the Export Templates menu item from the Pocket PC Data submenu of the File menu in the desktop WinLoG The Export Templates to Pocket form below will be displayed Export Templates to Pocket Templates Army Corps of Engineers Drilling Log Letter Army Corps of Engineers HT Drilling Log CompletedT utorial Environmental CMT Environmental Monitoring Well Environmental OYA and Well Environmental Three Graphs Environmental Two Graphs Environmental YOC and Well Environmental YOC Concentration Environmental Well Flood Control Geophysical 2 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs Legal Geophysical Water Supply Geotechnical Basic Geotechnical Basic feet ee ee See ee ee 44 gt i x Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide Exporting Lithology Macros to Pocket WinLoG A template can be selected by clicking on it with the mouse To select additional templates use the Ctrl or Shift key After the Ok button is pressed the templates will be exported The exported templates will then be automatically
67. insertion point WinLoG User s Guide Remarks raa gom der zusse iG AY 44 2 Depth OOOO The speed buttons of the toolbar perform the following functions The Font Type face box is used to i Arial select the name of the font to use for the selected text The Font Size box is used to set the size of the font for the 10 El selected text The Font Color box is used to select the color of the font for E the selected text The Bold button is used to toggle the bold attribute of the selected text on and off The Italics button is used to toggle the italic attribute of the selected text on and off The Underline button is used to toggle the underline attribute of the selected text on and off The Superscript button is used to toggle the superscript attribute of the selected text on and off The Subscript button is used to toggle the subscript attribute of the selected text on and off T i The Left Justify button will left justify the selected text The Center Justify button will center justify the selected text WinLoG User s Guide 211 212 Borehole Logs The Right Justify button will right justify the selected text Mi The Select All button will select all of the text The Cut button will remove the selected text and place it in the clipboard Shee The Copy button will copy the selected text to the clipboard m The Pas
68. is the vertical position of the end of the line in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line this field will be filled in by the program Line Style This is the style of the line The line style can be changed by pressing the Line Style button A Line Properties form will then be displayed Using this form the style color and width of the line can be set Arrowhead To display an arrowhead at the start or end of the line select yes Arrow Position This is position to place the arrowhead either at the start or end of the line If no arrowhead is selected above this field will not appear Arrowhead Size This is the size of the arrowhead If no arrowhead 1s selected above this field will not appear Rectangles Rectangles can be added anywhere on a legend There is no limit to the number of rectangles that can be added WinLoG User s Guide Adding a Rectangle There are two methods that can be used to add a rectangle to a log 1 By clicking on the Rectangle button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the upper left corner of the rectangle Then while holding down the left mouse button drag the cur sor to the lower right corner of the rectangle and release the mouse but ton The Edit Rectangle form described in the next section will then be displayed 2 By selecting the Rectangles menu item from the Edit menu or P
69. is used to toggle the italic attribute of the selected text on and off The Underline button is used to toggle the underline attribute of the selected text on and off The Superscript button is used to toggle the superscript attribute of the selected text on and off The Subscript button is used to toggle the subscript attribute of the selected text on and off The Left Justify button will left justify the selected text The Center Justify button will center justify the selected text The Right Justify button will right justify the selected text The Select All button will select all of the text in the description The Cut button will remove the selected text and place it in the clipboard The Copy button will copy the selected text to the clipboard The Paste button will paste the text in the clipboard at the cur rent position of the cursor in the memo field The Replace button will replace the specified text in the descrip B tion WinLoG User s Guide 173 174 Borehole Logs The Symbol button will display the Symbol form shown below This form is used to place a symbol at the current cursor position in the description To select a symbol use the Font box to select the font containing the symbol and then select the desired symbol After the desired symbol has been selected press the Ok button to insert it into the description The WinLoG program comes with a font called
70. layer boundary If the elevations are displayed as tics this field will not appear WinLoG User s Guide Elevation Column Major Tic Interval This is depth interval between labels on the eleva tion axis If elevations are displayed as layers this field will not appear Minor Tic Interval This is depth interval between tics on the eleva tion axis If elevations are displayed as layers this field will not appear Display Units This is the units to use to display the elevation column The display units do not have to be the same as input units Line Style This is the line style to use when drawing the layer bound aries or tics in the elevation column When the Line Style button is pressed a Line Properties form will be displayed shown in the Columns section This form can be used to set the line style width and color Number of Digits after the Decimal This is the number of digits to display after the decimal in the labels For example if the number of digits is 1 then the elevation 101 feet will be labeled as 101 0 WinLoG User s Guide 313 314 Templates Lithologic Description Column The style of the lithologic description column can changed by selecting the column and using the Customize button on the Columns tab When the Customize button is pressed the Customize Description Column form below will be displayed Customize Description Column Ground Surface Bottom of Borehole Show Titl
71. of the borehole log After performing one of the above tasks one of the Graph forms below will be displayed depending on the type of graph If the graph type for the column is a double graph and the Edit menu or Popup menu is used to edit the graph data only the data for the one graph selected will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide 223 224 Borehole Logs The name of the graph can be changed by clicking on the Edit Name button at the bottom of the tab A new unique name can then be entered in the Edit Graph Name form shown below Changing the name of the graph will affect whether the graph is displayed in the borehole log For the graph to be displayed the template must contain a graph column with the same name Edit Graph Name Hame LEL x Cancel 7 Help Adding a Graph To add a new graph to a borehole log select the Add Graph menu item of the Graph Data submenu of the Edit menu The Add Graph Name form below will then be displayed To add a new graph specify a unique name for the dataset and the type of graph to create Add Graph Hame Name Graph Typ Graph Bar Graph x Cancel 7 Help The graph data will not be displayed on the borehole log unless the template contains a graph column with the same name WinLoG User s Guide Graph Data Deleting a Graph To delete a graph from a borehole log select the Delete Graph menu item of the Graph Data submenu of the Edit menu T
72. on the legend WinLoG User s Guide Toolbars Symbol Library Toolbar The Symbol Library Toolbar is displayed below and is used to edit symbol libraries Each of the speed buttons on the toolbar is explained below peang 1 The New button is used to create a new symbol library The Open button is used to open an existing symbol library The speed buttons below will be dimmed if no symbol library is cur rently opened fm The Close button is used to close a symbol library ll The Save button is used to save changes to the symbol library Eh The Print button is used to print the symbol library WinLoG User s Guide 27 Getting Started Desktop The desktop is used to display numerous child windows These child windows can contain cross sections templates and symbol libraries The data is displayed graphically and you can add new data or edit existing data by clicking on the data in the window Each child window has the standard Windows icons for minimizing maximizing and closing the window When a child window is mini mized an icon for the window will be displayed at the bottom of the desktop The display of the child windows can also be adjusted using the Window command on the menu bar Status Line The status line displayed at the bottom of the screen is used to provide information about the current state of the program It 1s divided into four fields to display the following information e The first and
73. one of the options are selected on the Import gINT Database form the Open gINT Project File form shown on the previous page will be displayed The Open gINT Project File is used to select and open the gINT Project file to Import When the gINT project has been selected the Select gINT Borehole form below will be displayed The Select gINT Borehole form displays a list of all the boreholes that are available in the gINT Project The user has the option to select one or more boreholes to import at a time A single borehole can be imported by left clicking on a borehole and clicking OK Multiple boreholes can be imported at once by holding down the Ctrl key and then clicking on multiple boreholes with the mouse Then click OK to import the boreholes Select gINT Borehole 4 4 Pb bl WinLoG User s Guide Importing gINT Data Use Default Template Option If the Use Default Template option was selected previously the gINT Default Template Format form below will be displayed after the bore holes to import are selected This form has two tabs one for Data For mat and one for Page Setup GINT Default Template Format X Input Units Display Units Feet Feet C Metres C Metres Scaling Factor Depth Page f Depth Page 20 Depth Scale MX Cancel Help Data Format Tab The following information can be entered on the Data Format tab Input Units The user can select to have the input units as either
74. or millimeters If set to zero then the width is not used The width should only be used when specifying header lines for memo s Height This is the vertical height of the title and borehole data in inches or millimeters If set to zero then the height is not used The height should only be used when specifying header lines for memo data WinLoG User s Guide 295 296 Templates Footers Tab Template Header and Footer Entry Drilled By T 0 75 3 59 T 0 Drill Method O 0 75 9 89 0 0 Drill Date L 0 75 10 19 0 Hale Size O E 3 59 0 D atum O E 3 59 0 Sheet L E 10 19 0 44 PH HX x Cancel 7 Help wf Ok The Footers tab and Page 2 Footers tab shown above can be used to edit the following information Current Title This is the current title of the footer line New Title This is the new title to use for the footer line up to 255 characters It defines the type of data for the borehole log The title will be used to prompt for information when entering borehole data If the title is for text data or a checkbox it will be displayed on the bore hole log If the title 1s for memo data it will not be displayed on the borehole log If the title is Sheet or Page the sheet number of the bore hole log will be automatically filled in by the program Checkbox If checked a checkbox will be displayed to the right of the title This checkbox can then be checked and unchecked when ente
75. rectangle to a legend 1 By clicking on the Rectangle button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the upper left corner of the rectangle Then while holding down the left mouse button drag the cur sor to the lower right corner of the rectangle and release the mouse but ton The Edit Rectangle form described in the next section will then be displayed 2 By selecting the Rectangles menu item from the Edit menu or Popup menu and then clicking on the Add button on the form The Edit Rec tangles form described in the next section will then be displayed Using this method the location of the rectangle must be specified on the form Editing a Rectangle Existing rectangles can be edited by selecting the Rectangles menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mouse button inside the rec tangle on the template After performing one of the above tasks the Edit Rectangle form on the next page will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide 389 390 Legends Edit Rectangles Line Style H 0 34 y Fill Color 3 2 Bottom 14 PW H x Cancel 7 Help The buttons at the bottom of the this form are used for the following The Start button displays the first rectangle h The Previous button displays the previous rectangle 4 The Next button displays the next rectangle p The End button displays the last rectangle d The Insert button adds a new rectangle
76. selected with the mouse or the cursor should be placed at the desired insertion point The Font Typeface box is used to T Arial z select the name of the font for the selected text Fo el The Font Size box is used to set the size of the font for the selected text Lo z The Font Color box is used to select the color of the font The Bold button is used to toggle the bold attribute of the selected text on and off The Italics button is used to toggle the italic attribute of the selected text on and off The Underline button is used to toggle the underline attribute of the selected text on and off The Left Justify button will left justify the selected text WinLoG User s Guide 371 372 Legends The Center Justify button will center justify the selected text The Right Justify button will right justify the selected text The Select All button will select all of the text in the company information The Cut button will remove the selected text and place it in the clipboard dh The Copy button will copy the selected text to the clipboard a The Paste button will paste the text in the clipboard at the current position of the cursor in the company information Ea The Symbol button will display the Symbol form shown below This form is used to place a symbol at the current cursor position in the memo field To select a symbol use the Font box to select the fo
77. several speed buttons that can be used to perform the same tasks as the menu bar at the top of the desktop These speed buttons are described below 20 WinLoG User s Guide Toolbars Project Toolbar The Project Toolbar 1s used to create open and close projects Each of the speed buttons on the toolbar is explained below beds a ef The New button is used to create a new project Eil The Open button is used to open an existing project a The Close button is used to close an open project this button will be dimmed if no project is currently opened The Print button is used to print the sieve analysis or template this button will be dimmed if no project is currently opened The Help button is used to display help on using the program _ The Exit button is used to exit the program Borehole Log Toolbar The Borehole Log Toolbar is used to create and edit borehole logs Each of the speed buttons on the toolbar is explained below Demi ere amp Qo BS os amp ES eN DA GIO WinLoG User s Guide 21 22 Getting Started LI The New button is used to create a new borehole log t The Open button is used to open an existing borehole log The speed buttons below will be dimmed if no borehole log is currently opened fi The Close button is used to close a borehole log Il The Save button is used to save changes to the borehole log ag The SaveAs button is used to save the borehole log under a
78. symbol inverted filled triangle in the column WATERSTRIKE Water strike symbol inverted hollow triangle in the column The recommended method for inserting lines and symbols is to use the Lines and Memos tabs The buttons at the bottom of this tab and the Memos tab are used for the following The Start button moves to the first remark 4 The Previous button moves to the previous remark P The Next button moves to the next remark Pl The End button moves to the last remark The Insert button creates a new remark The Delete button deletes this remark WinLoG User s Guide 209 210 Borehole Logs Memos Tab Text Memos Lines E Arial fic Ae Ber u ata 2A 4 EB ti T Depth o as af Ok x Cancel Help The following information can be entered and edited using the Memos tab shown above Depth This is the depth to display the memo in the same units as set in the template Remark This is the text to display There is no limit to the length of the text At the top of the tab there is a Rich Text toolbar that is used to format the text add symbols and perform spell checking on the text At the top of the Memos tab is the Rich Text toolbar this toolbar can be used to modify the font characteristics add symbols and spell check the text Before selecting a speed button the text to be modified should be selected with the mouse or the cursor should be placed at the desired
79. text boxes that can be displayed These boxes can overlap boundaries between the header footer and columns Paragraph text boxes are typically used to add comments or a legend Adding a Paragraph There are two methods that can be used to add a Paragraph Text box to a template 1 By clicking on the Paragraph button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the upper left corner of the paragraph text box Then while holding the left mouse button down drag the mouse to the location of the lower right corner Then release the mouse button While the mouse button is held down a marquee box will be drawn to indicate the location of the paragraph box After the button has been released the Paragraph Text form shown in the section below will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide Paragraphs 2 By selecting the Paragraph Text menu item from the Edit menu or Popup menu and then clicking on the Add button on the Paragraph Text form This will create a new paragraph Using this method the location of the paragraph must be specified on the form as described below Editing a Paragraph Existing Paragraph data can be edited by selecting the Paragraph Text menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mouse button inside the Paragraph Text of the template After performing one of the above tasks the Paragraph Text form below will be displayed Paragraph Text Paragraphs T Arial apo HAm BZ
80. the name of the remark dataset will affect whether the remark dataset 1s displayed in the borehole log For the remark dataset to be displayed the template must contain a remarks column with the same name Edit Remark Type x Cancel 7 Help Text Tab The following information can be entered and edited using the Text tab shown on the previous page Depth This is the depth to display the text in the same units as set in the template Text This is the text to display up to 255 characters The default alignment of the text is set in the template The alignment of each text line can be specified individually using the following codes LEFT Text is aligned to the left CENTRE Text is aligned in the centre RIGHT Text is aligned to the right WinLoG User s Guide Remarks In addition to text lines and symbols can be entered using the special codes below When entering these codes a number preceding the code will represent the percentage of the column width that the line or sym bol should cover For example 50 LEFTLINE will draw a line from the left side of the column across 50 of the width of the column LINE Horizontal line across the column LEFTLINE Partial horizontal line across the column starting from the left RIGHTLINE Partial horizontal line across the column starting from the right CENTERLINE Partial horizontal line centered in the column WATERLEVEL Water level
81. the Legend menu item from either the Import Version 3 Data or Import Version 4 Data submenus from the Import submenu The Import Exchange Legend File form on the next page will be displayed Select the legend file that you would like to import and then press the Open button All legend exchange files have the extension lgd3 for version 3 files and lgd4 for version 4 files WinLoG User s Guide 105 106 Projects Import Yersion 3 Exchange Legend File Ei E Look in A Myfiles el ci File name Files of type Exchange Legend Files Cancel Libraries Since libraries are not associated with any project you do not to have a project opened to import a library To import a library that is stored in exchange file format select the Library menu item from either the Import Version 3 Data or Import Version 4 Data submenus from the Import submenu The Import Exchange Library File form below will be displayed Select the library file that you would like to import and then press the Open button All library exchange files have the extension lib3 for version 3 files and lib4 for version 4 files Import Version 3 Exchange Library Fle Look in Bitmaps de ci Er el LogSymboli ib3 LogSymbol4 lib3 LogSymbol5 lib3 LogSymbol6 ib3 LogSymbol lib3 LogSymbols lib3 4 File name WinLoG User s Guide fl MAT1 lib3 MAT2 lib3 MAT3 lib3 test1 lib3 test lib3 USG
82. the above information has been entered a blank library will be created and displayed This library will contain 18 blank symbols and descriptions that can be edited and saved as discussed below le Opening a Symbol Library To open an existing library either select the Open Library menu item of the Symbol Libraries submenu of the File menu or click the Open but ton on the Library Toolbar The Open Library form below will be dis played Select the library to open and then press the Ok button Library Hames British Symbols Common Symbols Igneous and Metamorphic Hack Sands and Gravels Sedimentary Hocks Sits and Clays USCS Symbols Well Materials WinLoG User s Guide Editing a Library Editing a Symbol Library Each library can contain 18 lithologic symbols Lithologic symbols are used to represent soils and rocks The lithologic symbols and descrip tions in the library can be changed by selecting the Lithologie Symbols menu item of the Edit menu or clicking on one of the lithologic sym bols in the library The Symbol Descriptions form below will then be displayed This form has two tabs one for the description and one for the symbol Symbol Descriptions T Arial SIE E B ruUAs S223 ER oara Sand 44d x Cancel Help The buttons at the bottom of the form are used for the following The Start button displays the first symbol dq The Previous button displays the previous symbol
83. the borehole head ers footers borehole number coor dinates and symbol Depths amp Elevations used to edit the depths and elevation Lithology used to edit the litho logic layers Sample Data used to edit the sam ple data of the borehole log Well Data displays a submenu that can be used to add delete or edit a well Remarks displays a submenu that can be used to add delete or edit a remark column Graph Data displays a submenu that can be used to add delete or edit a graph column Geophysical Data displays a sub menu that can be used to add delete or edit the geophysical data Text Intervals displays a submenu that can be used to add edit and delete text interval data Symbol Logs displays a submenu Borehole Data Depths amp Elevations Lithology Core Log Sample Data Well Data Remarks Graph Data gt Geophysical Data d Text Intervals Symbol Logs Water Content Data Facies Constituents Members Paragraph Text Bitmaps Lines Rectangles Deviation Survey Tables Import Excel Log Data Import Excel Project Data Import Deviation Survey that can be used to add edit or delete symbol log data Water Content Data used to edit the water content data Facies used to edit facies data Constituents used to edit constituent data Members used to edit members data Paragraph Text used to add edit and delete paragraph text WinLoG User s
84. the clipboard at the current position of the cursor in the company information Ea The Symbol button will display the Symbol form shown below This form is used to place a symbol at the current cursor position in the memo field To select a symbol use the Font box to select the font containing the symbol and then select the desired symbol After the desired symbol has been selected press the Ok button to insert it into the memo field The WinLoG program comes with a font called GAEA Symbols that contains a variety of well and other symbols Symbol Font GABA Symbols Y Foa tf g Bb doen t ka Tk EE OEE NE E E F AK SEREN SE SE SCHEDEL a Bn nl E5 a3 He Fle Eo lo a lo fo A Sym cela fo Ae a a eaa F ehna a Oecd AIN NEA PE nk oe ts ad LT amer dS Enk def PP po F a la D FRE Mee b g A EE ee e ee ed e Cancel e The Spell Check button will display the Spell Checker form shown on the next page and will check the spelling in the memo field The dictionary used to check the spelling is set in the program Preferences see Chapter 3 When the Add button is pressed the word will be appended to the custom dictionary WinLoG User s Guide Symbol Descriptions Spell Checker Not found Sita Replace With Silty LR Replace mn Add or Skip Once or Skip Always 7 Suggest x Close Suggestions Symbol Tab Symbol Descriptions Description Symbol OON 5E
85. the project to be deleted and then press Ok Note that once a project is deleted the data can not be recovered The arrow buttons at the bottom of the list can be used to move the selection to the start of the list the previous project the next project or the end of the list WinLoG User s Guide Deleting a Project Delete Project Project Number Project Name g CompletedT utorial Completed Tutorial C Program Files GAE440 atabazse Complet Samples Samples C Program Files GAE440 atabase 5 amples test test C Program FilestGAEAest Tutorial Tutorial Project C Program Files GAE ST utorial Froject Information ld SE gt PH Edit Directary X Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide 67 68 Projects Using the GIS Interface Projects are now displayed using a geographic information system GIS The GIS displays a project location map that can be used to dis play and edit boreholes and cross sections if WinFence has been pur chased In addition site features and AutoCAD files can also be displayed The project location map can also be printed to be included with the boring logs IE eld Fe Reports View Window Help Heg gl aale nb o a nal a laam e lad s HBOS SeBoode 16E gt r Cordnates X 41 092 Y IH O Adding a Borehole To add a new borehole to the project click on the New button on either the Borehole Log or Location Map toolbars Then click on the position of the
86. the right border of the column The line style of the left border will be controlled by the previ ous column To change the line style press the Right Line Type button A Line Properties form will be displayed This form can be used to set the line style width and color Position This is the position of the right column border in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page The units of measurement are specified in the page layout WinLoG User s Guide 305 Tip When specifying the Name it must match exactly what is in WinLoG 306 Templates Use Default Font This should be checked to use the default column font specified in the layout tab If this is checked the Column Font but ton will not be enabled Column Font Press this button to change the font to use for this col umn Each column can use a different font if desired The title of the column will still be displayed in the default column font However all of the column data will use this font When pressed the Font form on the next page will be displayed This form can be used to select the font name font style font size and color Customize Depending upon the type of column this button will be enabled or disabled Ifthe column can be customized it will be enabled Press the button to customize the specific properties of the col umn The form displayed will depend on the type of column as described in the next section Layout Tab gt
87. then press the Ok button WinLoG User s Guide Transferring the Registration ia WinLoG Network License Viewer Maximum Users Current Usage Update Users a View Log amp Unlock Network OF Update Network 7 Help Transferring the Registration After the WinLoG program has been registered the unlocked program can be transferred to a different computer using the Transfer utility This utility allows you to move the WinLoG program between comput ers without requiring assistance from GAEA After the registration has been transferred the WinLoG program will only run on the new com puter Transfer Registration Serial Number of Current Computer 40426354 aerial Number of New Computer ae Transfer Registration Inlock Code Kore two WinLoG User s Guide Tip The Transfer utility should be used with caution since if incorrect ser ial numbers are entered you will lose the registration on both com puters If this happens contact GAEA for a new unlock code Transferring the registration is a two step process 8 Getting Started Step 1 The first step is to obtain the unique serial number of the new computer Install and run WinLoG on the new computer Initially the program will start in Demo mode and the Demo form will be displayed Press the Register button and write down the unique serial number for the new computer Step 2 In the second step the Transfer utility is us
88. to a cross To draw an ellipse press and hold down the left mouse button at the upper left cor ner of the ellipse Move the mouse to the lower right corner of the ellipse and release the mouse button The Filled Ellipse button is used to draw a filled ellipse on the symbol When pressed the cursor will change to a cross To draw an ellipse press and hold down the left mouse button at the upper left corner of the ellipse Move the mouse to the lower right corner of the ellipse and release the mouse button WinLoG User s Guide 375 3 6 Legends Paragraphs Floating paragraph text boxes can be added anywhere on a legend These text boxes are displayed over top of any information on the leg end There is no limit to the number of paragraph text boxes that can be displayed Paragraph text boxes are typically used to add comments to a legend Adding a Paragraph There are two methods that can be used to add a Paragraph Text box to a legend 1 By clicking on the Paragraph button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the upper left corner of the paragraph text box Then while holding the left mouse button down drag the mouse to the location of the lower right corner and then release the mouse button While the mouse button is held down a mar quee box will be drawn to indicate the location of the paragraph box After the button has been released the Paragraph Text form shown in th
89. to the output file WinLoG User s Guide 417 418 Reports Export General Report Form OOOO E Step 6 of 8 You can add a custom header and or footer Header Golden Triangle Borehole Report Whitby Ontario Canada Footer Date Dec 12 2002 Specifications lt lt lt Back Lees gt gt Cancel Step 7 In step 7 you choose the desired layout of the exported data Choose between three different layout types Columnar Reversed Columnar Tabular x Step f of 8 rou can select desired layout of exported data Layout te columnar C reverzed columnar C tabular form Color Style Hormal WinLoG User s Guide General Reports The user can also select between 12 different color styles Step 8 In step 8 you choose a file name to export the data to You can also select the number of records to include in the exported file x Step 8 of 8 That s all of the information the wizard needs to export your data Export to a File C GENERALREPORT XLS Bel Records per each file Action after exportin f None C open for file view e mail with file attachment Specifications lt Back ext gt gt gt In addition you can choose one of three options to occur after the exporting has completed None do nothing Open File for View Email with file attachment Click Execute to export th
90. top of the well Bottom Cover This is the type of symbol to use to depict the bottom of the well The name of the well dataset can be changed by clicking on the Edit Name button at the bottom of the tab A new unique well name can then be entered in the Edit Well Name form Changing the name of the well dataset will affect whether the well is displayed in the borehole log For the well to be displayed the template must contain a well column with the same name Interval Data Tab Well welll water amp Well Data Interval Data os Foreground Background Top Depth le TTTT l HE HAAAA AHHH LIL HHHHH SAAS RARE ae se x Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide Well Data The Interval Data tab shown on the previous page is used to enter the layers of riser and screen pipes The buttons at the bottom of the form are used for the following lg The Start button displays the first layer d The Previous button displays the previous layer Pk The Next button displays the next layer P The End button displays the last layer The Insert button creates a new layer The Delete button deletes the layer The following information can be entered and edited using the Interval Data tab Top Depth This is the top depth of the well interval layer in the same units as set in the template The bottom depth will be the top depth of the next riser or screen or the bottom depth of the well S
91. utorial Environmental Three Graphs Environmental Two Graphs Environmental YOC and Well Environmental YOC Concentrations Environmental Well Geophysical 2 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs Legal Geotechnical Basic Geotechnical Core Log Geotechnical Core Log Legal Geotechnical PENN DOT Unique Template Mame x Cancel Deleting a Template To delete a template log select the Delete Template menu item from the Templates submenu of the File Menu The Delete Templates form will be displayed A single template can be selected by clicking on it and pressing the Open button A range of templates can be selected by clicking on the beginning of the range and then holding down the Shift key while clicking on the end of the range Multiple templates can be selected by holding down the CTRL key while clicking on the tem plates WinLoG User s Guide Creating the Second Template Page Creating the Second Template Page The optional second page of the template can be used to display a dif ferent log format for the second and subsequent pages of the borehole log This technique is often used to display a first page with a large header or footer with a large number of header footer text lines and second and subsequent pages with a smaller header or footer with less header footer text lines To create the second template page select the 2 Pages menu item from the of Pages subme
92. 101 Project Tutorial ACME Consulting Company Client Enc 4 44 Canadian Oaks Drive aie Whiley Onlan Site Location Geologist Your Mame SUBSURFACE PROFILE SAMPLE Well Completion i 5 Ting hehehe Desonplon Details aan BEM es 200 E00 1000 m a E a Sand and Gravel Fill 1 Loose helerogeneous medium to fine zand wath t to inch Sub arngukar Gravel Silty Clay 4 Motthed brown and gray a cilty clay with ambedded fd sand and gravel Sain sooo eee ea eee crete et EE nn fz Ed Graph Modified Sheet 1 of I Adding Graph Data The graph data for the zinc concentrations can be entered next To enter the graph data click on the graph column with the left mouse button 44d bw X Med Name x Cancel Help 5A WinLoG User s Guide Adding Well Completion Details The graph data shown in the Graph form on the previous page can then be entered To enter the next graph value press the tab key when at the end of a line or press the Add button at the bottom of the form Adding Well Completion Details Next well completion details will be added to the borehole log The well completion details consist of the following a 4 foot 2 PVC screen from 10 to 14 feet a 11 5 foot 2 PVC riser from 1 5 feet aboveground to 10 feet a 10 inch casing from 0 to 3 feet a sand pack from 9 to 15 feet a bentonite seal from 0 to 9 feet a Steel aboveg
93. 3 n albian lg3 zamplelog lg3 we o ar Files of type Exchange Log Files Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide Importing Version 3 and 4 Exchange Files Templates Since templates are not associated with any project you do not to have a project opened to import a template To import a template that 1s stored in exchange file format select the Template menu item from either the Import Version 3 Data or Import Version 4 Data submenus from the Import submenu of the Import Export Data submenu The Import Exchange Template File form below will be displayed Select the template file that you would like to import and then press the Open button All template exchange files have the extension tm3 for ver sion 3 files and tm4 for version 4 files Import Yersion 3 Exchange Template File EES Look ir E My Files amp ic El el Ea El _ Samples aa komen tras a8 template tris a end column shrinking tmd probehole tris test tris a albian_mike tmd SECOR temp tris tutorial tris albian_rev1 tm3 al SECOR temp2 tm3 US Steel Log tm3 a Bug Templete tma SECOR temp tm3 a WardropT emplate a ealloge tris stdtemp tras washington boreho gt Files of type Exchange Template Files Cancel Legends Since legends are not associated with any project you do not to have a project opened to import a legend To import a legend that is stored in exchange file format select
94. 3 Verify that the drive letters that you specify during installation are consistent with those that are available on your server 4 Make sure the total number of WinLoG copies in use does not exceed the number that is licensed If you need more copies than are currently licensed contact GAEA to order additional licenses To install the WinLoG program on a network server follow the installa tion instructions provided above After the WinLoG program has been installed the users must be given network access to the WinLoG pro gram directories and databases README File Any last minute changes additions or trouble shooting tips are docu mented in the README file When the SETUP program has finished installing the WinLoG program it will automatically install an icon for the README file in the application group To view the README file click on this icon Uninstalling WinLoG The WinLoG program files can be removed from your hard disk using the Add Remove programs option in the Windows Control Panel Unin stalling the WinLoG program will also remove the WinLoG icons and application group WinLoG User s Guide Registering WinLoG Registering and Unlocking WinLoG Before WinLoG can be used it must be registered Prior to registration process the program will run in Demo mode During the registration the program will be unlocked WinLoG Demo WinloG Demo Version 4 00 Geophysics Enabled TM EEN Registered Tra
95. 329 Company Name 331 Paragraphs 332 BitmapS vana arta 336 Lines and Arrows 339 Rectangles 342 ADIOS wan berken des 345 Page Layout 351 Saving a Template 3992 Deleting a Template 352 Creating the Second Template Page 353 Setting a Password 355 Chapter 6 Legends Creating a New Legend 361 Editing a Legend 364 Titles and Layout 364 Lithologic Symbols 368 Well Symbols 368 Sample Symbols 369 Symbol Descriptions 370 Paragraph S aonaaanaanaan 376 BitmapS onaannnnaananaanan 381 Lines and Arrows 386 Rectangles 389 Page Layout 392 saving a Legend 393 Deleting a Legend 393 Printing a Legend 394 Chapter 7 Symbol Libraries Creating a New Symbol Library 397 Opening a Symbol Library 398 Editing a Symbol Library 399 Saving a Symbol Library 406 Deleting a Symbol Library 406 Printing a Symbol Library 407 Chapter 8 Reports General Reports 411 Previewing a Report 413 Exporting a Report 414 Lithology Reports 420 Samples Reports 421 Water Level Reports 422 Graph
96. 49 125 3276708 24 3276705 35 5 Br 23 931 AREA 26 46307 471 130 31 2067 29 3120675 40 fi fo 24 33071680 26 61755756 135 20301 IE 34 25391951 45 a4 BY 25 91 497486 2 22114227 139 937082 36 03 758204 50 45 ag 20 9693118 27 7982411 143 6782500 42 6782500 55 23 100 31 69879072 2765948311 147 74r 204E 46 747 2046F BO 12 120 331 TOAT EL 27 22997081 152 49391 72 51 49391 722 44 rh x XC Cancel Help Switching Between Measured Values and True Values Winlog allows the user to easily switch between measured depth values and the calculated depth values by clicking the button on the log tool bar The type of data being plotted at anytime 1s shown by the Status Bar at the bottom of the log It should say MEASURED VALUES PLOTTED when plotting the measured values dit Footer MEASURED VALUES PLOTTED Saved Sheet 1 and TRUE VALUES PLOTTED for the true depth data dit Header TRUE VALUES PLOTTED Saved Sheet 1 WinLoG User s Guide Importing Excel Log Data Importing Excel Log Data Several types of data for a borehole log can be imported from an Excel spreadsheet The types of data that can be imported will depend on the template for the log Most of the data in the template columns can be imported To import the data select the Import Excel Log Data menu item from the Edit menu The Import Excel Data form below will be displayed Import Excel Data i File Name e gt Open Script m save script X Cancel
97. 80 WinLoG User s Guide Bitmaps Sizing a Paragraph The size of the paragraph can be changed using the Paragraph Text form above or the mouse To adjust the size using the mouse follow the procedure below 1 Position the cursor at the boundary of the paragraph The cursor should change to a set of arrows and the Status line should display Edit Size of Paragraph The orientation of the arrows will indicate the direction that the boundary can be changed 2 Press and hold the left mouse button down and drag the boundary to its new position 3 While dragging the boundary a rectangle will be displayed showing its current location 4 When the boundary is in the desired location release the left mouse button Bitmaps Bitmaps contained in Windows bitmap BMP files can be added any where on a legend These bitmaps can be used to show company logos site plans and other graphical information Bitmaps are displayed over top of any information on the legend There is no limit to the number of bitmaps that can be displayed WinLoG User s Guide 381 382 Legends 5 Adding a Bitmap There are two methods that can be used to add a bitmap to a legend 1 Click on the Bitmap button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the center of the bitmap The Open form below will then be displayed Select the bitmap file and then press the Open button 2 Select the Bitmaps menu item from t
98. Columns 5 Humber of Fined Rows 1 Number of Fired Columns 1 Ke Border Line Style Ful Celer Inner Line Style op Fill Color i 4 Border Position 4 d re x x Cancel Help The following information can be entered and edited using this tab Number of Rows The number of rows in the table Number of Columns The number of columns in the table Number of Fixed Rows The number of fixed rows in the table Fixed rows contain information that can only be entered edited from the template Usually information such as titles for tables is entered from the template Number of Fixed Cols The number of fixed columns in the table Fixed columns contain information that can only be edited entered from the template Usually information such as titles for tables is entered from the template WinLoG User s Guide Tables Left This is the position of the left border of the table in inches or mil limeters from the left side of the page The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Right This is the position of the right border of the table in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Top This is the position of the top border of the table in inches or mil limeters from the top of the page The units of measurement are speci fied in the page layout Bottom This is the position of the bottom
99. E FA aximurn fi o0 a e Log Scale a Increment 50 No Yes Gap at Edges C No te Yes Show Gri C No ie Yes Horizontal Spacing jo Color Vertical Spacing 0 Sp Line Style Ne Line Style Type Filled Triangle Size fi EA _ gt E Label Point C No i Yez Decimal Digits E EA x Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide 321 322 Templates The Customize Graph Columns form can be used to set the following parameters Graph Title This is the title to use for the graph up to 255 charac ters The Graph Title will be displayed in the same area as the Column Title It is recommended that either the Graph Title or Column Title be used and not both If the column type is a double graph or double geo physical log then both Graph Titles will be displayed over top of each other Units Title This is the units of the graph up to 255 characters The unit title will be displayed below the graph title Minimum This is the minimum value for the horizontal axis of the graph If the value is zero the program will calculate the minimum value based on the data specified Maximum This is the maximum value for the horizontal axis of the graph If the value is zero the program will calculate the maximum value based on the data specified Increment This is the increment to use for labeling the horizontal axis of the graph If the value is zero the program will
100. Edit menu The Add Well Name form below will then be displayed To add a new well dataset specify a unique name for the dataset and the type of dataset to create Add well Name Manne Well Typ Type 1 C Type 2 i Type 3 x Cancel 7 Help The well data for this dataset will not be displayed on the borehole log unless the template contains a well column with the same name WinLoG User s Guide 185 186 Borehole Logs Deleting a Well To delete a well dataset from a borehole log select the Delete Well menu item of the Well Data submenu of the Edit menu The Delete Well form below will be displayed Select the well to be deleted and press the Ok button Delete Well well x Cancel Help Well type 1 Column Well Type 1 columns were first introduced in version 1 of the program and can be used for very simple well displays All of the well informa tion is represented by bitmaps which can be customized by the user This type of well column cannot be used for wells with multiple piezometers or varying casing diameters and cannot contain annota tion The data for a Well Type 1 column consists of water depth well depth type of surface cap above ground flush mount or stand pipe type of bottom cap plug cap open and layers of risers and screens WinLoG User s Guide Well Data Note that the water depth well depth and types of top and bottom caps are th
101. Excel project data select the Import Excel Project Data menu item from the Edit menu The Import Excel project Data form below will be displayed Import Excel Project Data File Name Open Script i save script X Cancel 7 Help The Excel spreadsheet to be imported should be specified as the File Name on the form It can be selected using the button to the right After the Excel file has been specified the form will be updated as shown on the next page with the available General Borehole data that can be imported using the borehole that is opened WinLoG User s Guide Importing Excel Project Data Import Excel Project Data File Name C borehales le E Open Script FA save Scris Borehole Number Select Coordinate Coordinate Elevation saat PZA OF Start Depth v Depth Per Page x Cancel Borehole Humber Project Mo a Project Client Site Location Enclosure Geologist One or more of these fields can be imported from the spreadsheet and stored in the boreholes for the project To specify the cell range in the spreadsheet to use for the borehole gen eral data type double click on each Select column A Select button will be displayed for that data type click on the button to display the spreadsheet and select the cell range Alternatively if a previously saved Script file is available it can be opened using the Open Script button This script w
102. Guide 11 12 Getting Started Bitmaps used to add edit and delete bitmaps Lines used to add edit and delete lines and arrows Rectangles used to add edit and delete rectang les Deviation Survey used to edit deviation survey data Tables used to add edit and delete table data Import Excel Log Data used to import data for the borehole from Excel Import Excel Project Data used to import data for several boreholes in the project from Excel Import Deviation Survey displays a submenu used to import devia tion survey data for the log Templates If a template is currently displayed on the desktop the edit menu will contain the following commands Headers used to edit the headers Header i fi Footers used to edit a ooters m Columns used to edit the columns Cime Company used to edit the company name Company Paragraph Text used to add edit and Paragraph Text delete paragraph text Bitmaps Bitmaps used to add edit and delete Lines bitmaps Rectangles Lines used to add edit and delete lines and Tables ade Page Layout Rectangles used to add edit and delete rec of Pages tangles Tables used to add edit and delete tables Page Setup used to change the size and orientation of the page of Pages displays a submenu that is used to select whether the tem plate has one or two pages WinLoG User s Guide Menu Bar Legends If a legend is currently d
103. Guide 377 3 8 Legends Left This is the position of the left border of the paragraph in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Paragraph button on the toolbar is used to create the paragraph this position will be filled in by the program The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Right This is the position of the right border of the paragraph in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Paragraph button on the toolbar is used to create the paragraph this position will be filled in by the program Top This is the position of the top border of the paragraph in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Paragraph button on the toolbar is used to create the paragraph this position will be filled in by the program Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the paragraph in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Paragraph button on the toolbar is used to create the paragraph this position will be filled in by the program Background Color This is the background color of the paragraph text box When the Background Color button is pressed a Color form is displayed Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color can be specified Frame Select yes to display a frame around the paragraph text Frame Width This is the line width of the frame around the paragraph text If no frame is selected above this field
104. In addition site features and AutoCAD files can also be displayed The project location map can also be printed to be included with the boring logs 44 Tutorial Creating a Borehole Log After the template has been customized as described above it can be used to create a new borehole log In this tutorial we are going to create a new project for the borehole log create the borehole log and then add the borehole data The borehole data will consist of general borehole data lithology data sample data graph data and well completion details Creating a New Project Before the borehole log can be created a project must be setup to store the borehole data To create a new project click on the New button on the Project toolbar The New Project form shown below will be dis played Enter the following information in this form Project ID Tutorial Project Name Tutorial Project Directory winlog tutorial Project ID Tutorial Project Mame Tutorial Directory C PROGRA 1 GAEABeta database Tutorial 00000000 Client Po Location FO Reference Ci aaa ProjectDAFle fe WinLoG User s Guide Creating a New Borehole Log The project directory can be as shown above or any other directory could be used It 1s not necessary to enter a client location DXF file or Tip reference grid In version 4 you can now enter a AutoCAD DXF file that contains a After the Ok button is pressed the Location Map Setup form will be
105. List Option If the user previously selected Choose From List the Open Template form below will be displayed after the boreholes are selected The Open Template form allows the user to select a Template to use for opening the AGS data borehole Open Template EE Templates Army Corps of Engineers Drilling Log Legal Army Corps of Engineers Drilling Log Letter Army Corps of Engineers HTW Drilling Log British Standard BS 5390 Core Log British Standard BS 5930 Borehole Log British Standard BS 5930 Boring Log British Standard BS S330 Core Boring Log Ec ompletedtutona M Environmental Ch T Environmental Monitoring Well Environmental 0A and Well Environmental Three Graphs Environmental Two Graphs Environmental YOC and Well Environmental YOC Concentrations Environmental Well Flood Control Geophysical 2 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs i a ln l 4 4 Pb Pp x Cancel Help Select the template to use and then click on the Ok button The bore holes will then be imported from the AGS file WinLoG User s Guide 117 118 Projects Importing LogPlot Data Version 4 of WinLoG is now able to import LogPlot files We have pro vided this feature as a means of letting users convert their LogPlot data over to WinLoG To import a LogPlot file select the Import LogPlot Data menu item from the Import submenu of the Import Export Data submenu This will display the LogPlot Data Import form below
106. Look in a Bitmaps Zl el 185x46 l Bottom5 bmp British11 bmp Pe Bottom bmp ft British 2 bmp hee Bottom bmp hee British 3 bmp hee Bottom bmp fet British 4 bop fee British bmp fe British 5 bmp hee British bmp fe British 6 bop File name Jacme bmp Files of type All gif bmp ica emf wmf Cancel Editing a Bitmap Existing Bitmaps can be edited by selecting the Bitmaps menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mouse button inside the Bitmap After performing one of the above tasks the Bitmap Information form on the next page will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide Bitmaps ele koro File Mame C Program Files GAEANWinLoG Bitmaps acme bmp C Program Files GAEANWinLoG Bitmaps acme bmp Files G AE44 inLoG Bitmaps acme bmp fe Stretch Bitmap el No C Yez EE Width 188 Height 45 HA PW HX x Cancel 7 Help The buttons at the bottom of the this form are used for the following ld The Start button displays the first bitmap 4 The Previous button displays the previous bitmap bk The Next button displays the next bitmap P The End button displays the last bitmap The Insert button adds a new bitmap The Delete button deletes this bitmap WinLoG User s Guide 383 384 Legends The following information can be entered and edited using this form File Name This is the name of the bitmap file to display on the tem plate
107. Pocket WinLoG This folder is usually located in c My Documents on Windows 98 systems or in c Documents and Settings USERNAME My Docu ments on Windows 2000 XP and NT systems The name of this folder can be obtained by opening ActiveSync and selecting the Files option in the Options menu Click on the Settings button and the folder name will be displayed at the top of the form Importing Data from Pocket WinLoG The uploading of data from Pocket WinLoG is performed automatically during the synchronization process If the data is to be emailed the files in the Data subfolder should be emailed To import the uploaded data into WinLoG select the Import Logs menu item from the Pocket PC Data submenu of the File menu The Import Pocket PC Data form below will be displayed This form shows the projects and the logs for each project on the Pocket PC Import Pocket PC Data Current Logs Import Project Mew Project Existing Project Import Log New Project Existing Project Current Pocket Projects WinLoG User s Guide 137 138 Projects There are several ways to import the log data The data can be imported for an entire project or for an individual log This data can either be added to a new project or an existing project If the data is to be imported into a new project the New Project form will be displayed after the New Project button is pressed Enter the project
108. Reports 05 423 Geophysics Reports 424 WinLoG User s Guide Chapter 9 Help Displaying Help wesen omen wenen war 427 Using Help eaten sas 427 Getting Technical Support 428 Automated Technical Support 428 Other Methods 430 Before Contacting GAEA 431 Information to Provide 432 Appendix A Database Structure Appendix B Installation Files WinLoG User s Guide Introduction Log of Borehole Project No ELD ACME Consulting Limited Project Port Sidney Oil Terminal 44 Canadian Oaks Drive Client Inter lsland Gas Enclosure 1 Whitby Ontario Location Port Sidney Project Manager M Fraser SUBSURFACE PROFILE SAMPLE o Well Completion Details Description Symbol BE DD Surface ear Asphalt ssi Fill sand and gravel fill same organic debris Depth Elev 180 98 0 an Sandy Silt i Moist brown to grey sandy silt with ne embedded gravel Pets leon SSS F gt e Eem CT mm Sand Medium to fine sand occasional clay lenses Strong hydrocarbon odour j cn 03 co oO EE OO MHIN Kl February 2 2000 1 Steel Casing steel Well Cover i 3 i Cn ao mm o cn oo cn Clay Mottled brown and grey silty clay some sandy lenses Sand Compact coarse to medium sand shell fragments j pin on ho oO E
109. S Default Template Setup form will be displayed after the boreholes to import have been selected This form has two tabs the Data Format tab and the Page Setup tab AGS Default Template Setup Scaling Facto f Depth Page C Depth Scale Depth Page zo x Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide Importing AGS Data Data Format Tab The following information can be entered on the Data Format tab Scaling Factor The user can select either to scale the template Log as either Depth Page or by using a depth scale Depth Page If Depth Page 1s selected for the Scaling Factor then the Depth Page field will be displayed This value scales the template log as a number of metres per page For example if this value is 20 then there will be 20 metres per page on the log right 1 to _ If Depth Scale is selected for the Scaling Factor then the 1 to field will be displayed This would allow the depth scale to lm on screen is equal to metres in real life AGS Default Template Setup a X Size Letter hd T m ME width Length Orientation e Portrait C Landscape MX Cancel Help Page Setup Tab The following information can be entered on the Page Setup tab Size This is the page size of the template When the arrow at the right is pressed a list of available page sizes is displayed WinLoG User s Guide 115 116 Projects Inches or Millimeters The units for the width and lengt
110. S Glacial lib3 USGS Igneous lib3 USGS Metamorphic lib3 2 x El USGS Misc 1 13 USGS Misc 2 lib3 USGS Misc lib3 USGS Sedimentary 1 53 USGS Sedimentary 2 ib3 USGS Sedimentary 3 ib3 USGS Sedimentary 4 lib3 USGS Sedimentary 5 ib3 gt Files of type Exchange Library Files Cancel 4 Importing gINT Data Importing gINT Data To import a gINT project into Winlog select the Import gINT menu item from the Import submenu of the Import Export Data submenu This will display the Import gINT Database form shown below PY Import gINT Database x Do you wantto use the detault template or chose from alist Choose From List The Import gINT Database form has two options e Use Default Template e Choose From List The Use Default Template option will create a default template for the gINT project And the Choose From List option will allow you to select the template from a list of available templates Each of these options are discussed in the sections below Open gINT Project Files TEHE Look ir a projects File name AGWEGNOTI o om Files of type ANT Pijet Files 1 Cancel WinLoG User s Guide New In version 4 WinLoG can import gINT project files We have pro vided this feature as a means of letting users convert their gINT data over to WinLoG 107 108 Projects After
111. Templates displays a submenu used to create open save close and delete tem plates Legends displays a submenu used to create open save close and delete leg ends Symbol Libraries displays a submenu used to create open save close and delete lithologic symbol libraries Lithology Macros used to create and edit lithology macros Well Macros used to create and edit wellmacros Import Export Data displays a sub menu used to import and export data Back Up WinLoG used to create a back up copy of the WinLoG database Pocket PC Data displays a submenu used to export and import data from Pocket WinLoG Projects Templates Legends Symbol Libraries i Lithology Macros Well Macros Import Export Data Back Up Winlog Pocket PC Data i Print Setup Preferences Exit Print used to print borehole logs and templates Print Setup used to adjust the printer settings Preferences used to set program preferences Exit closes the program Edit Menu After a borehole log template legend or symbol library has been opened the Edit menu will appear on the menu bar The contents of the Edit menu will vary depending on what is currently displayed on the desktop WinLoG User s Guide Borehole Logs Menu Bar If a borehole log is currently displayed on the desktop the edit menu will contain the following commands Borehole Data used to edit the general data for
112. The Delete button deletes the layer Description Tab The Description tab shown on the previous page is used to enter and edit lithology descriptions The following information can be entered and edited using this tab Name Title The optional name of the layer up to 255 characters is displayed above the description The font for the name 1s set in the tem plate for the log Description The description is used to describe the lithology of the layer There is no limit to the length of the description At the top of the tab there is a Rich Text toolbar that is used to format the description add symbols insert lithology macros and perform spell checking on the description The use of the Rich Text toolbar is described below Top Depth This is the top depth of the layer and should be between the start and end depths of the borehole Bottom Depth The bottom depth of the layer is optional If it is not specified or is less than the top depth the top depth of the next layer is used WinLoG User s Guide 171 172 Borehole Logs Top Line Style Use the Top Line Style button to change the line style to be used for the top layer boundary If the bottom depth is specified this line style is also used for the bottom boundary When the button is pressed a Line Properties form is displayed This form is used to set the line style thickness and color The line style can be set to none to dis play no line at the boundary
113. Tip If no template or borehole log is currently displayed the Open Template menu item can also be selected from the Project popup menu This menu can be dis played by clicking the right mouse button 292 Templates When this template 1s saved the Enter Template Name form shown below will be displayed This form shows the current templates in the database To save the template enter a unique name for the new tem plate and press the Ok button Enter Template Name Existing Templates Completed T utorial Environmental Three Graphe Environmental Two Graphs Environmental YOC and well Environmental VOC Concentrations Environmental Well Geophysical 2 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs Legal Geotechnical Basic Geotechnical Core Log Geotechnical Core Log Legal Geotechnical PENN DOT Unique Template Name dB rr l kF 1 h n Editing a Template To enter or edit data in a template the template must first be created as described above or an existing template opened Existing templates can be opened for editing by selecting the Open Template menu item of the Templates sub menu of the File menu clicking the right mouse button and select the Open Template menu item from the popup menu or clicking the Open button on the Template Toolbar After the template has been opened and displayed the template data can be entered and edited as described in the sections below WinLoG
114. Title Color m Section Font Column Color m Title Fant 204 Barder Line Log Font 9 43 _N Borderie vom 317 Interior Line Layer Titile Font Section Headings SUBSURFACE PROFILE 3 5 2 04 2 24 5 36 204 2 29 Right Top Bottom Tithe Bottom 44 bp i a ad x Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide Columns The Layout tab and Page 2 Layout tab shown above can be used to edit the following information Left This is the position of the left border of the column block in inches or millimeter from the left side of the page The units of mea surement are specified in the page layout Right This is the position of the right border of the column block in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page Top This 1s the position of the top border of the column block in inches or millimeters from the top of the page Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the column block in inches or millimeters from the top of the page Title Bottom This is the position of the bottom of the title portion of the column block in inches or millimeters from the top of the page Title Color This is the color to use for the title block of the columns Press the button to change the color A Color form will be displayed shown in the previous section and a basic or custom color can be selected Column Color This is the color to use for the data block of the columns Press the button to cha
115. Tr Hl vee 5 Wi fe a ry E i KS EE REN ae E T x 7 m Da er pe nm 5 a Tr _ g a eM Li ve a 4 T Lu c H ran Ig z n J _ Sa T ip l Ep aa En Cap The data for a Well Type 3 column consists of hole diameter and layout well components water level measurements and annotation Well Type 3 data can be entered and edited by selecting the Well Data submenu of the Edit menu and then selecting the name of the well col umn or clicking the left mouse button inside the well column of the borehole log After performing one of the above tasks the Well Type 3 Data form on the next page will be displayed 196 WinLoG User s Guide Well Data This form has four tabs one for the hole diameter and layout one for specifying the components one for specifying the water levels and one for specifying the annotation Before entering the details for the well the hole diameter and lay out of the well should be entered Layout Components Water Levels Annotations Hale Diameter E T Column Width Offset Seal Line Style c er Use Well Macro Led Save as Well Maco Edit Well Name x Cancel 7 Help Layout Tab The following information can be entered and edited using the Layout tab Hole Diameter This is the diameter of the hole The hole diameter w
116. User s Guide Headers and Footers Headers and Footers The header and footer of the template are used to display general infor mation about the borehole This includes information about the bore hole number X and Y coordinates text and memo information Text and memo information can include information such as project name location client date drill method etc The difference between text data and memo data is that there is no limit to the length of memo data and memo data can contain rich text The header is usually located at the top of the page and the footer is usually located at the bottom of the page There are no limits to the number of titles a header or footer can contain Each title can be used to display text data memo data or a checkbox 1n the borehole log The template is used to control what borehole information 1s displayed in the header Unlike previous versions of WinLoG the general bore hole data is now tied to the type of data in the template This way if the template is edited or a different template is used the borehole data will move depending upon the location within the template For example if the data is for the location of the borehole and in the template the loca tion is the first line of the header If later the template is edited and the location is moved to the third line of the footer when the borehole log is displayed the location will show up in the third line of the footer To e
117. WOW Aboveground Cover an Loose heterogeneous Ssd medium to fine sand with od Veto inch sub angular af Ld E E Silty Clay Mottled brown and grey silty clay with embedded sand and gravel Fo Compact medium to 1e coarse sand me ua ua ow u Pa o Z mn 8 D m uw wo a wo ow W 2 PVC Screen M 2 Silica Sand End of Borehole EEE IE Drilled By ACME Drilling Co Hole Size 6 Drill Method H S Auger Datum Local Drill Date 01 31 2000 sheet 1 of 1 Copying the Borehole Log The borehole log can now be easily copied to create additional logs with similar layers and sampling To copy the log press the Copy but ton on the Borehole Log Toolbar This copy can then be edited to create the next borehole log WinLoG User s Guide 59 Tutorial 60 WinLoG User s Guide Project EN WinLoG Project WinLoG Samples Projects As discussed in the introduction the WinLoG program is based upon the project concept for data storage Using this method a separate Microsoft Access 2000 database is used to store each project for each application Each project is stored in a separate directory which can be on the same computer or spread across a network The num ber of databases for each project will depend upon the applications being used for that project If for example the WinLoG and WinFence programs are being used with the project there will be two project dat
118. WinLoG Version 4 User s Guide Copyright 8 2003 GAEA Technologies Ltd All rights reserved Printed in Canada Second Printing GAEA WinLoG Software License Agreement and Limited Warranty This License Agreement is made and entered into by and between GAEA Technologies Ltd having a office at 87 Garden Street Whitby Ontario Canada LIN 9E7 the Distributor and the Licensee with reference to the following terms and conditions A The Distributor has the legal right to distribute software and documentation currently called WinLoG the Licensed Product B The Licensee now desires to license the use of the Licensed Products NOW THEREFORE the parties agree as follows License Distributor grants and the Licensee hereby accepts the nonexclusive license to use the Licensed Product subject to the terms and conditions contained in this agreement Licensee May 1 Unless otherwise agreed in writing use the Licensed Product on any single computer system at the licensed facility 2 Transfer the Licensed Product from one location to another so long as it is not installed simultaneously on more than one computer Licensee May Not 1 Make copies of the Licensed Product 2 Make copies of the software documentation 3 Unless otherwise agreed in writing install the software onto more than one computer at a time 4 Alter decompile disassemble or reverse engineer the Licensed Product 5 Remove alter or o
119. a rectangle anywhere on the location map To use the Rectangle tool select it by clicking on the Rectangle tool button Then click and hold down the left mouse button at the upper left hand corner of the rectangle and drag the cursor across the screen to the bottom right hand corner of the rectangle When the user is satisfied that they have the cursor over the appropriate end point they should release the mouse button Once this 1s done the program will open the Edit Rectangles form below Edit Rectangles l E Rectangles Border kN Line Style Right 976 438 Top 220 600 y Fill Color 19 604 Bottom WinLoG User s Guide Lo 76 Projects The following can be edited from this form Left This is the position of the left border of the rectangle in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the Rectangle button on the toolbar is used to create the rectangle the program will fill in the position oth erwise the user will have to enter in the position Right This is the position of the right border of the rectangle in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the Rectangle button on the toolbar 1s used to create the rectangle the position will be filled in by the program otherwise the user will have to enter in the position Top This is the position of the top border of the rectangle in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the Rectangle button on the toolbar i
120. a to the desktop version of WinLoG the data can be imported on a log by log basis or an entire project at once The types of data collected for a boring or well log are controlled by the template These templates are the same as those used in the desktop version of WinLoG and can be downloaded from the desktop version at any time The template specifies the types of general borehole data header and footer data sample other data remark well and graph data In general all of the boring and well logs in a project would use one or two templates creating a consistent data format for the project To minimize the amount of data entry for a boring and well log lithol ogy and well macros can be created on the desktop and downloaded to Pocket WinLoG WinLoG User s Guide 139 136 Projects Synchronizing Pocket WinLoG Pocket WinLoG can be easily synchronized with the desktop version of WinLoG on your PC Synchronizing Pocket WinLoG will make sure that any data created in Pocket WinLoG is copied to the desktop In addition any templates symbol libraries or macros exported in the desktop version of WinLoG will be available to Pocket WinLoG When you update a file on either your PC or your Pocket PC the file is updated in the other location the next time you synchronize The process of synchronization is performed by Microsoft ActiveSync which must be running on the desktop computer This program is usu ally provided with t
121. abases The names of the project databases are the project name combined with the application name For example if the project name is 980205 then the project database name for WinLoG would be 980205winlog mdb Typically this project would be stored in the subdirectory 980205 In version 4 projects are displayed using a geographical information system GIS The GIS displays a project location map that can be used to display and edit bore holes and cross sections if WinFence has been pur chased In addition site features and AutoCAD files can also be displayed The project location map can also be printed to be included with the boring logs This chapter describes how to 1 Create a new project 2 Open an existing project 3 Open the last project 4 Close a project 5 Delete a project 6 Use the GIS Interface Creating a New Project 7 Import a project 8 Manage a Project Database 9 Backup all WinLoG data 10 Set Project Passwords 11 Print a Project 12 Import Export Data 13 Import Export Pocket WinLoG Data 14 Create and Edit Lithology Macros 15 Create and Edit Well Macros 16 Set Program Preferences Creating a New Project To create a new project either select the New Project menu item of the Projects sub menu or click the New Project button on the Project Tool bar In addition at the start of the program the Create a New Project button can be selected on the Startup Form After one o
122. acies constituents and members columns There can be multiple text interval columns In each of these columns a start depth end depth and text comment can be specified In addition these columns can be linked so that the start and end depths only need to be entered once for all of the linked columns e Font and text color can be specified separately for headers header titles footers footer titles individual columns column titles and sec tion titles e Two specially designed fonts are provided with the WinLoG program for use with the new Constituent and Member columns e The Company Name can be entered anywhere on the template as rich text WinLoG User s Guide Library Features e An unlimited number of company logos site plans or symbols can be Imported as bitmaps and placed anywhere on the template e An unlimited number of floating paragraph text boxes can be added anywhere to a template The text is specified in rich text format The background color and frame color can be specified individually for each text box e An unlimited number of lines arrows and rectangles can be specified anywhere on the template e New multiple symbol columns can be used to show bitmap symbols at various depths from lithologic libraries These can be used for lab sam ples test intervals fossils etc The symbols shown in a symbol column are independent of those specified in the lithology Legend Features e Create a new legend
123. across projects Once a template 1s created it is available to all projects WinLoG comes with numerous easily customized tem plates which can be edited and saved as new templates You can also create a new template by specifying the desired layout Each template consists of a header footer several columns bitmaps lines rectangles and para graph text Templates can be customized to display dif ferent header and footer titles number and type of columns fonts colors etc Templates can have a first and second page where the second page layout is different than the first page layout The second page will be used to format the second and subsequent pages of a log Templates are stored in the WinLoG master database The format of the master database 1s Microsoft Access This database is stored in the Main Database Directory For a detailed discussion of the database structure see Database Structure in the Introduction Chapter or Appen dix B This chapter describes how to These tasks can be performed using menu commands on the File menu 1 Create a new template Templates 2 Enter and edit the following information Header and Footer Titles Columns Paragraph text Bitmaps Lines and arrows Rectangles Tables Page Setup 3 Save a template 4 Delete a template 5 Create a second template page 6 Set a password for the template and Edit menus or speed buttons on the Template toolbar shown belo
124. ad is selected above this field will not appear WinLoG User s Guide Rectangles Rectangles Rectangles can be added anywhere on a legend There is no limit to the number of rectangles that can be added Adding a Rectangle There are two methods that can be used to add a rectangle to a legend 1 By clicking on the Rectangle button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the upper left corner of the rectangle Then while holding down the left mouse button drag the cur sor to the lower right corner of the rectangle and release the mouse but ton The Edit Rectangle form described in the next section will then be displayed 2 By selecting the Rectangles menu item from the Edit menu or Popup menu and then clicking on the Add button on the form The Edit Rec tangles form described in the next section will then be displayed Using this method the location of the rectangle must be specified on the form Editing a Rectangle Existing rectangles can be edited by selecting the Rectangles menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mouse button inside the rec tangle on the template After performing one of the above tasks the Edit Rectangle form on the next page will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide 389 390 Legends Edit Rectangles Line Style H 0 34 y Fill Color 3 2 Bottom 14 PW H x Cancel 7 Help The buttons at the bottom of the th
125. ains data from other applications such as Win Fence or WinSieve you will be asked whether to delete this data as well f the other application data is not deleted the project will still appear in the project list but it will not have any Win LoG data 66 Projects The directory that a project is stored in can be changed by clicking on the Edit Directory button This will display a Select Directory form that can be used to select the new directory for the project Changing the directory will not move any of the project files The purpose of this option is to allow for the movement of projects on a network The arrow buttons at the bottom of the list can be used to move the selection to the start of the list the previous record the next record or the end of the list Opening the Last Project At the start of the program the last opened project can be selected using the Open Last Project button on the Startup Form The program automatically stores the last project used amp Closing the Project The current project can be closed so that no more changes can be made by selecting the Close Project menu item of the Projects submenu or clicking the Close button on the Project Toolbar Deleting a Project An existing project can be deleting by selecting the Delete Project menu item from the Projects submenu When this is selected a list of existing projects will be displayed as shown on the next page Select
126. al and Metric page sizes e Windows network compatible Project Features e No limit to the number of projects e New projects can be easily created Project directories are automati cally created e Existing projects can be opened and closed using toolbar and menu commands e Projects can be deleted including project directories e Projects not in master database can be imported into master database e Multiple borehole logs in a project can be printed at once e Support for uploading and downloading data to Pocket WinLoG on the Pocket PC Borehole Log Features e Standard Windows new open save and print commands e No limit to the maximum depth of a borehole log e The plot depth per page can be set in the template or changed for each log WinLoG User s Guide Borehole Log Features e Borehole data in the headers and footers can contain checkboxes and rich text font type size color etc can be modified e An unlimited number of floating paragraph text boxes can be added anywhere to a borehole log The background and frame colors can be specified individually for each text box e An unlimited number of bitmap files can be imported into a borehole log These files can contain logos site maps sample pictures etc e An unlimited number of lines arrows and rectangles can be added e Version and 2 borehole logs can be imported e Borehole logs can be imported and exported using a text exchange format
127. alanced Tangential method WinLoG User s Guide Deviation Survey Data 3 Minimum Curvature method 4 Radius Of Curvature method 5 Tangential method The user can select which method Winlog uses to correct borehole depths on the Deviation Survey tab of the Preferences form To display the Preferences form shown below select the Preferences menu item from the File menu Preferences Page Directories Other Location Map Deviation Survey Auto Backup Well Deviation Calculation to Use Average Angle Balanced Tangential Mininum Curvature Radius of Curvature Tangential M Cancel Help Editing Borehole Deviation Survey Data Winlog allows the user to edit a Borehole Deviation Survey in the event that there are some spurious points in the data To edit the deviation data select the Deviation Survey menu item from the Edit menu This will open the Deviation Survey Data form on the next page The Deviation Survey Data form allows the user to Add Edit or Delete the deviation survey data After the data has been edited click Ok to save the changes WinLoG User s Guide 269 270 Borehole Logs EE fr Ysa ee 101 10 10 12 22 09025891E 22 64252728 105 9525065 4 952506542 15 25 18 22 SO FO0486 24 07193584 110 660296 9 680296897 20 12 23 23 03656617 2555527001 115 3914370 14 391 43708 25 2 AB 23 31 201091 26 08252292 120 3352832 19 3355260527 30 4 45 23 0076055 26 25462
128. ancel Help WinLoG User s Guide Titles and Layout The Titles tab shown above is used to enter and edit the following information for each type of title Title This is the title to display for this type of symbol up to 255 char acters The types of titles will depend upon what symbols are dis played in the legend X This is the horizontal position to place the title and symbols in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page The symbols asso ciated with this title will be drawn beginning at this position By adjust ing the horizontal position more than one set of symbols can be drawn across the page The units of measurement are specified in the page lay out Y This is the vertical position to place the title and symbols in inches or millimeters from the top of the page The symbols associated with this title will be drawn below the title If Y is set to zero the program will calculate the position Columns This is the number of symbols per row to draw for this type of symbol The number of columns can be different for each type This field is not used for Main Title and Well Symbols types since there are no symbols associated with these types Width This is the width of each column in inches By adjusting the Width and X position more than one set of symbols can be drawn across the page WinLoG User s Guide 365 366 Legends Layout Tab Titles amp Layout Titles Layout
129. and 12 symbols for Joints amp Miscellaneous Lithologic libraries are used for the seal and packing symbols in this type of well All of the descriptions can be edited for this type of well However none of the symbols can be edited since they are all drawn to scale by the program The well symbols and descriptions in the legend can be changed by selecting the well symbol menu item from the Well Symbols submenu of the Edit menu or click the left mouse button on one of the well sym bols in the legend After one of the above tasks has been performed the Symbol Descriptions form will be displayed This form has two tabs one for the description and one for the symbol This form is identical for lithologic symbols well symbols and sample symbols The use of this form is described in the Symbol Descriptions section below Sample Symbols Symbols for the sample types can be displayed in the legend This option 1s selected when the legend 1s created There are 30 different sample symbols The sample symbols and descriptions in the legend can be changed by selecting the lithologic library from the Sample Symbols menu item of the Edit menu or click the left mouse button on one of the sample sym bols in the legend After one of the above tasks has been performed the Symbol Descriptions form will be displayed This form has two tabs one for the description and one for the symbol This form is identical for lithologic symbols well symbols and sa
130. and other boreholes in the project Y Coordinate The Y coordinate for the borehole location The units for the coordinates should be the same as the X coordinate and other bore holes in the project WinLoG User s Guide Well Symbol The well symbol is used to represent the borehole on the location map To change the well symbol click on the Well Symbol but ton the Well Symbols form below will be displayed Select the desired symbol and press the Ok button well Symbols x Cancel Help ff Ok Data Tab The Data tab shown on the next page is used to edit the general text data for the program such as project name location client etc New and edited data up to 255 characters can be entered on the input lines to the right of the data type The buttons at the bottom of the tab are used for the following WinFence User s Guide 161 162 Borehole Logs The 4 d d Pa Borehole Data Number and Location Data Memos Log of Borehole royect Mo roject lient Location Enclosure Technician Drill Method Drill Date Hale Size D atum Checked by Sheet iE Edit Data Type HA PN HX y OF x Cancel 7 Help buttons at the bottom of the tab are used for the following The Start button moves to the first data record The Previous button moves to the previous data record The Next button moves to the next data record The End button moves to the l
131. ap The orientation of the arrows will indicate the direction that the boundary can be changed 2 Press and hold the left mouse button down and drag the boundary to its new position 3 While dragging the boundary a rectangle will be displayed showing its current location 4 When the boundary is in the desired location release the left mouse button Lines and Arrows Horizontal vertical and diagonal lines and arrows can be added any where on a template There is no limit to the number of lines and arrows that can be added WinLoG User s Guide 339 340 Templates gt Adding a Line or an Arrow There are two methods that can be used to add a line or arrow to a tem plate 1 By clicking on the Line button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the starting point of the line or arrow Then while holding down the left mouse button drag the cursor to the end of the line or arrow and release the mouse button The Edit Lines form described in the next section will then be displayed 2 By selecting the Lines menu item from the Edit menu or Popup menu and then clicking on the Add button on the form The Edit Lines form described in the next section will then be displayed Using this method the location of the line must be specified on the form Editing a Line or Arrow Existing Lines can be edited by selecting the Lines menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mous
132. apter 7 The lithologic symbols and descriptions in the legend can be changed by selecting the lithologic library from the Lithologic Symbols sub menu of the Edit menu or click the left mouse button on one of the lithologic symbols in the legend After one of the above tasks has been performed the Symbol Descrip tions form will be displayed This form has two tabs one for the description and one for the symbol This form 1s identical for lithologic symbols well symbols and sample symbols The use of this form is described in the Symbol Descriptions section below Well Symbols Each legend can contain well symbols for a Type 1 2 or 3 well The type of well symbols is selected when the legend is created The num ber of symbols will depend upon the type of well 1 For a Type 1 well there will be 12 symbols used to represent the vari ous casings screens seals and packing All of the descriptions and symbols can be edited for this type of well WinLoG User s Guide Sample Symbols 2 Fora Type 2 well there will be 8 symbols for Pipes amp Screens 8 symbols for Top Fittings 8 symbols for Bottom Fittings and 8 symbols for Packing All of the descriptions can be edited for this type of well However only the Packing symbols can be edited since the other sym bols are drawn to scale by the program 3 For a Type 3 well there will be 12 symbols for Well Covers 12 sym bols for Well Caps 30 symbols for Casings amp Screens
133. assword again of the template If you want to remove the old password then set this to blank Opening a Password Locked Template To open a template that has been password locked simply follow the same procedure as a user would normally follow to open a Template Right click File then Templates then Open Template or use the Tem plate Toolbar to open the template This will open up the Password form on the next page if the template is password locked otherwise the template will open normally WinLoG User s Guide Setting a Password for the Template Flease enter the password for the selected template Password XC Cancel If the template is password locked enter the password and click OK If the user enters the correct password they will be permitted to edit the template otherwise the user is permitted to open the template with read only access WinLoG User s Guide 355 Templates 356 WinLoG User s Guide Legends Symbol Descriptions Description Symbol L Ta a Kk 5 x L _ OQ amp 4 4 gt Pl Legends Legends are used to provide descriptions for the litho logic symbols well components and sample symbols shown in borehole logs WinLoG comes with several pre viously defined legends In addition any number of new legends can be easily created Legends can be customized to display different lithologic symbol libraries well component symbols and sample symbols In addition
134. ast data record The Insert button creates a new data record The Delete button deletes the data record If the data type has a checkbox then a grey checkbox will appear in the input line This checkbox can by checked by clicking on it WinLoG User s Guide General Borehole Data The template being used for the log determines the type of data and previous data entered for the log The data type will appear along the left side of the list To change the type of data press the Edit Data Type button at the bottom of the form The Edit Data Type form below will be displayed KL Edit Data Type Oy x Select Data Type Log of Borehole Add New Data Type Use Checkbo i No C Yes x Cancel 7 Help This form can be used to enter a unique new data type Care should be used in changing the data type since it will effect where the data is dis played on the template The new data type can be selected from the list using the arrow to the right of the Select Data Type line or it can be specified in the Add New Data Type line In addition the data type can contain a checkbox by setting Use Checkbox to Yes Memos Tab The Memos tab shown on the next page is used to enter and edit memos for the general borehole data There is no limit to the length of the memo data and the data can contain rich text The buttons at the bottom of the tab have the same functions as described above The Data Type of the memo is sh
135. asurement are specified in the page layout Right This is the position of the right border of the table in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Top This is the position of the top border of the table in inches or mil limeters from the top of the page The units of measurement are speci fied in the page layout Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the table in inches or millimeters from the top of the page The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Border Line Style This is the line style of the outside border of the template table It includes the lines thickness and style Solid Dash Dot etc Inner Line Style This is the line style of the lines between the indi vidual cells of a template table It includes the lines thickness and style Solid Dash Dot etc Fixed Color This is the background colour of the fixed columns of the table When the button is pressed a Color form will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide 347 348 Templates Fill Color This is the background colour of the non fixed columns of the table When the button is pressed a Color form will be displayed Py Add Table Form O x Setup Headers Cell widths Po 2 Setup Po 2 Headers Pg 2 Cel widths Text Justification al Vertical Algnmen Ale H Headers Tab or Pg 2 Headers Tab The following in
136. ata 0 ces 184 Remarks ee 207 Text Interval Data 215 Facies Data 220 Constituents Data 221 Members Data 222 Graph Data 00 ee 223 Water Content Data 229 Symbol and Core Log Data 230 Geophysical Data 233 Lithologic Cross Plots 240 Percent Cuttings Data 242 Core Photo Data 243 Paragraphs 00008 245 Bitmaps 0 0 ee 250 Lines and Arrows 254 Rectangles 256 Tables vene 259 Deviation Survey Data 268 Importing Excel Log Data 211 Importing Excel Project Data 274 Importing Deviation Survey Data 277 Saving a Borehole Log 282 Printing a Borehole Log 283 Copying a Borehole Log 283 Deleting a Borehole Log 284 Changing the Log Template 285 Chapter 5 Templates Creating a New Template 290 Editing a Template 292 Headers and Footers 293 Columns nee 302 Depth Column 310 Elevation Column 312 Lithologic Description Column 314 Sample Columns 316 Text Columns 318 Text Interval Columns 319 Well Columns 320 Graph and Geophysical Columns 321 Deviation Survey Columns 324 Percent Cuttings Columns 328 Core Photo Columns
137. ata Blows ft This is the blow count or N Value of the sample When enter ing N Value data a line break can be added to the data by specifying a between data values e g 12 18 16 22 In addition the 4 N Values normally specified can be spaced equally across the column by speci fying a at the beginning of the data If the N Value is left blank or specified as NA then it will not be plotted on the SPT graph if there is an SPT graph in the log Recovery This is the sample recovery usually expressed as a percent age or as a length measurement Depending upon the template settings the recovery can be represented on the log as text or as a shaded box that covers the specified portion of the sample interval For example if the recovery were 75 then a box covering 75 of the sample interval would be drawn Other In addition to the above data other types of data can be entered for each sample The number of other data types and the names for this data is specified in the template Other data is stored and dis played as text strings up to 255 characters each The name of the other data is specified as the column name This string is displayed at the top of each other data column when the log 1s edited To enter and edit this data the scroll bar at the bottom of the form should be used WinLoG User s Guide 183 184 Borehole Logs Well Data WinLoG can display a wide variety of wells at varying levels of deta
138. atabase WinFence Tutorial WinFencel WinFence Example 1 C Program Files GAEA D atabase WinF ence WinFence2 WinFence Example 2 C Program Files GA4EA D atabase WinFence2 WinFence3 WinFence Example 3 C Program Files GAEA D atabase WinFence3 44 D gt Di XM Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide Managing a Project Database A confirmation message is then shown on the screen asking if the user is sure they would like to repair the project database If the user selects Yes then WinLoG will display the Repair Project Database form Select the project database you wish to repair and press the Ok button Backing Up a Database WinLoG version 4 has the ability to automatically backup all databases at regular intervals while the user is editing and creating new templates logs and projects You can decide how often you would like to backup your data To set the time intervals between backups select the Preferences menu item from the File menu Preferences Page Directories Other Location Map Deviation Survey Auto Backup iw Back Up Project Databases 5 minutes We Back Up Project List Database 20 minute w Back Up Man Database 30 minutes x Cancel Help On the Auto Backup tab you can set the following Back Up Project Database If this checkbox is checked then the cur rently open project will be backed up at a regular interval WinLoG User s Guide 91 92 Projects Back Up Proje
139. ate time information indicates the date and exact time at which the project list database was backed up Select the data base you wish to restore and then press the Ok button Backing Up All WinLoG Data In addition to the auto backups of the project databases and list data bases All of the WinLoG Data including all databases can be backed up This feature is useful for creating an archive copy of the WinLoG data To backup all of the WinLoG data select the Backup WinLoG menu item from the File menu The Select Directory form below will be dis played Using this form select the directory where you would like the archive to be stored x Directory Name PROGRAT GAEABeta database ProjectBackUp Directories Files ie Cy of 81 3893885532_ Tutorial PROGRA 1 37 781 3963301042 Tutorial GAEABeta of 781 4032 74375_ Tutoriall 3 81 4102188194_ Tutorial 3 82 4888469329_ Tutorial 27729 A057012772_ Tutorial database fe ProjectBackUp Drives c omen __ WinLoG User s Guide 95 Tip It maybe advantageous for some companies to create Projects that have a password associated with them In this way accidental edit ing or deleting of boreholes can be avoided since only employees knowing the password to the pro ject would be able to open or edit it 96 Projects setting Project Passwords Project password locking is done by selecting the Change Password menu item
140. ation where you want to place the center of the logo in this example lets put it above the company name After the mouse is clicked on the location to place the logo the Open bitmap form on the next page will be displayed Select the ACME BMP file or your own company logo then press the open but ton WinLoG User s Guide 35 Tip WinLoG requires logos pic tures to be in Windows bitmap format Many common graphics programs can convert to this for mat 36 Tutorial Open Ei Ed Look irr a Bitmaps l Zl el ES El 188x465 L T EENES he Bottom6 bmp hei British 2 bmp hee Battom bmp hee British 3 bmp hee Bottom bmp fee British 4 bmp hee British bmp fe British 5 bmp hee British 0 bmp ee British 6 bop File name Jacme bmp oen Files of type AIN git bmp ico emf wmf Cancel The Bitmap Information form will then be displayed Set the Stretch Bitmap option to Yes Adjust the Left border to 6 the Right border to 7 8 and the Top border to 0 6 Bitmap Information Bitmap File Mame C Program Files GAEAN inLoG Bitmapssacme bmp R Stretch Bitma iC No ie Yes Maintain Aspect Ratio m No go ro 0 6 Width 188 Height 46 Botton 1 04 LEE SE PW as x Cancel 7 Help After the Ok button is pressed the template will appear as shown on the next page WinLoG User s Guide Customizing the Depth Column i
141. ative percentages of sand shale and silt may be entered at several depth intervals The lithologies that can be entered for the percent cuttings are specified in the percent cuttings column of the template The symbols for each of the lithologies will be scaled and drawn at each of the depth intervals The style of the Percent Cuttings column can be changed by clicking on the column and then on the Customize button on the Columns form The Percentage Cuttings form below will be displayed Percentage Cuttings Form Lithology 1 sand Symbol w mug HLine Lithology 2 sit Symbdl E Line F R HLine Lithology 3 Shale Symbol WLinel FR _HLinel Lithology 4 Pest Symbal de VLinef _HLinel Lithology 5 Breccia Symbol Pore WLinel _HLinel H Lithology 6 Basat Symbol aes WLine Hine FE a Ok aC Cancel Help The Percentage Cuttings form is used to specify the lithologies that will be used in the column Up to 6 lithologies maybe added to the Percent age Cuttings form These are listed as Lithology 1 to Lithology 6 on the percentage cuttings form The following can be specified for each of the six lithologies Name This is the name of the lithology it will be displayed when entering data for the log WinLoG User s Guide Core Photo Column Symbol This is the symbol to use for the lithology V Line This is the vertical line that separates the c
142. attribute of the selected text on and off The Subscript button is used to toggle the subscript attribute of the selected text on and off The Left Justify button will left justify the selected text The Center Justify button will center justify the selected text The Right Justify button will right justify the selected text The Select All button will select all of the text in the memo field The Cut button will remove the selected text and place it in the clipboard The Copy button will copy the selected text to the clipboard The Paste button will paste the text in the clipboard at the cur rent position of the cursor in the memo field The Find button will find the specified text in the memo field WinLoG User s Guide 165 166 Borehole Logs in The Replace button will replace the specified text in the memo field The Symbol button will display the Symbol form shown below a This form is used to place a symbol at the current cursor position in the memo field To select a symbol use the Font box to select the font containing the symbol and then select the desired symbol After the desired symbol has been selected press the Ok button to insert it into the memo field The WinLoG program comes with a font called GAEA Symbols that contains a variety of well and other symbols Symbol x Font GABA Symbols Ta th g Bb oe t g ka we Ee REE EP a a T EIE RENE JE IF
143. ave the necessary equipment Run the installation program Read the README file Start the WinLoG program Register the WinLoG program A A B U NY The Distribution Package The WinLoG distribution package you received should include this User s Guide and a CD ROM Required Equipment WinLoG requires the following hardware and software to run efficiently 1 Windows 2000 XP or NT 2 At least 32 MB of RAM 3 At least 32 MB of hard disk space 4 A screen resolution of at least 600 x 800 with at least 16 bit color 5 A CD ROM drive Installing WinLoG Installation To get WinLoG up and running run the installation program SETUP EXE on the CD ROM For example to install from drive D 1 Start Windows 2 Insert the CD ROM into drive D 3 Choose Start and then Run and type D WinLoG setup exe or double click on D WinLoG setup exe in Windows Explorer or dou ble click on the Add Remove Programs icon in the Control 4 Enter the requested information in the installation forms discussed in the next section On some computer systems depending on how they are configured inserting the CD ROM into the drive will automatically start the GAEA menu program In this case select WinLoG from the menu screen All of the programs listed on the menu screen can be installed and will run in demo mode until an unlock code 1s provided The SETUP program does the following 1 Creates one or mo
144. avel matris supported ae Gravel massive at Gravel x bedded ye Gravel trough s bedded coe Gravel planer bedded hp Sand massive sand a bedded i 4 4 popo I UpdateTite Update Symbol X Cancel Help Symbol Tab Lithology symbols are stored in symbol libraries containing 18 symbols each There is no limit to the number of libraries The program comes supplied with numerous symbol libraries These libraries can be edited and new libraries created using the Libraries submenu of the File menu See Chapter 7 for a detailed description on how to create and edit sym bol libraries WinLoG User s Guide 175 176 Borehole Logs The Symbol tab shown below is used to select the lithologic symbol for the layer These symbols will appear in the lithology symbol column on the log The symbol column can be optionally split vertically to display two different symbols Lithology Description Symbol Library Common Symbols ee Fill Size fi ENE E eal ae E EE UHRE gt rere ates eae ee eae a Contact Angle 0 EN EE e i kta cere ae EE aad ie Left c Right ks Top Line Style W Same as Description RSS He ee ee t kkk kk fT Split Column GA Uneplit Column 44 pW HX wf Ok X Cancel Help The following information can be entered and edited using the Symbol tab Library This combo box 1s used to selec
145. ayed on the desktop Project Popup Menu If the location map for a project is displayed the Project Popup Menu will be displayed This menu contains the following menu items Open Project used to open an existing pro ject New Borehole creates a new borehole Open Borehole opens an existing borehole Open Template opens an existing template North Arrow used to add edit or delete the north arrow Lines used to add edit or delete lines Rectangles used to add edit or delete rec tangles Ellipse used to add edit or delete ellipses PolyLines used to add edit or delete poly lines Paragraphs used to add edit or delete paragraphs Bitmaps used to add edit or delete bitmaps Exit exits the WinLoG program WinLoG User s Guide Open Project New Borehole Open Borehole Open Template North Arrow Lines Rectangles Ellipse Poly Lines Paragraphs Bitmaps Exit Borehole Log Popup Menu Popup Menus If a borehole log is currently displayed on the desktop the Borehole Log Popup Menu will be displayed This popup menu contains the fol lowing commands Save saves the borehole log Close closes the borehole log Print prints the borehole log Borehole Data used to edit the general data for the borehole headers footers borehole number coordinates and sym bol Depths amp Elevations used to edit the depths and elevation Lithology used to edit the lit
146. ayer sample data well completion details water level measurements geophysical logs and numer ous graphs and text columns Once a log is created it can be easily copied using a toolbar button and then edited and saved to represent other boreholes on the same site This chapter describes how to 1 Create a new borehole log 2 Enter and edit the following infor mation General borehole data Borehole Logs Log depth and elevation Lithologie descriptions Sample data Well data Remarks Graph data Water Content data Text data Text Interval data Facies data Constituents data Members data Core log data Geophysical data Cross plots Percent Cuttings data Core Photo data Paragraph text Bitmaps Lines and arrows Rectangles Tables Deviation Survey data Import Excel Log data Import Excel Project data Import Deviation Survey data 3 Save a borehole log 4 Print a borehole log 5 Copy a borehole log 6 Deleting a borehole log 7 Change the template for a borehole log WinLoG User s Guide 199 156 Borehole Logs These tasks can be performed using menu commands on the File menu and Edit menus or speed buttons on the Borehole Log toolbar shown below File Menu Edit Menu Projects d Borehole Data Sa ns Depths amp Elevations Borehole Logs gt tee Templates Y Core Log Legends EE Sample Data Symbol Libraries gt E Orme Well Data Y Rema
147. ayout Right This is the position of the right border of the bitmap in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to create the bitmap this field will not be displayed If Stretch Bitmap is set to No then this field will not be displayed Top This is the position of the top border of the bitmap in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Bitmap button on the tool bar 1s used to create the bitmap this field will not be displayed If Stretch Bitmap is set to No then this field will not be displayed WinLoG User s Guide Bitmaps Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the bitmap in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Stretch Bitmap is set to No or Maintain Aspect Ratio is set to yes then this field will not be displayed and the bottom will be calculated by the program Center X This is the bitmap s horizontal center in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If Stretch Bitmap is set to Yes this field will not be displayed If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to add the bitmap this field will be filled in by the program Center Y This is the bitmap s vertical center 1n inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If Stretch Bitmap is set to Yes this field will not be displayed If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to add the bitmap this field will be filled in by the program Sizing a Bitmap
148. ays a report on Sample Report the lithologies in the project Sample Report displays a report on the sample data in the project Water Level Report Graph Report Geophysics Report Water Level Report displays a report on the water levels in the project Graph Report displays a report on the graph data in the project Geophysics Report displays a report on the geophysical data in the project View Menu This menu contains commands for adjusting the view and toggling toolbars on and off Page Up scrolls the desktop up one page the desktop can also be scrolled up or down by using the vertical scrollbar on the right side of the desktop Page Down scrolls the desktop down one page Zoom displays a submenu that can be used to select a zoom factor between 25 and 200 percent Full Screen displays the desktop in full screen mode zoom factor equal to 100 percent Page Up Page Down Zoom Full Screen w_ Show Project Toolbar Show Borehole Log Toolbar Show Template Toolbar Show Legend Toolbar Show Library Toolbar Show Project Toolbar if checked the Project Toolbar will be dis played WinLoG User s Guide Menu Bar Show Borehole Log Toolbar if checked the Borehole Log Toolbar will be displayed Show Template Toolbar if checked the Template Toolbar will be dis played Show Legend Toolbar if checked the Legend Toolbar will be dis played Show Library Toolbar if
149. be used when the clipboard is to be printed 132 Projects Exporting to a Bitmap File Exporting to a bitmap file is the same as exporting to the clipboard except that the bitmap is stored in a file instead of the clipboard The file format is a Windows bitmap BMP file Any currently displayed cross section or template can be exported to a bitmap file To export to a bitmap file select the Bitmap File menu item from the Export submenu Specify the file name on the SaveAs form shown below and then press the Save button Save As Ei EG Save in E Logs E Til ce Picture El En Save ag type windows Bitmap File Cancel After the Save button is pressed the Bitmap Information form shown on the previous page will be displayed This form 1s used to set the number of vertical and horizontal pixels for the bitmap file Exporting to a Metafile Exporting to an enhanced metafile is the same as exporting to a bitmap file Any currently displayed borehole log template or legend can be exported To export to a metafile select the Metafile menu item from the Export submenu Specify the file name on the SaveAs form shown on the previous page and then press the Save button WinLoG User s Guide Exporting to an AutoCAD File Exporting to an AutoCAD File A DXF file is a format designed by AutoCAD to exchange drawing files The format provides for either ASCII files or binary files In Win LoG the exchange format used is
150. be entered on the Layout tab shown above Header Select yes to include a header box at the top of the template Footer Select yes to include a footer box at the bottom of the tem plate Number of Columns This is the number of columns to include in the template Columns can also be added and deleted while editing the tem plate WinLoG User s Guide Creating a New Template Page Setup Tab Layout Page Setup SIZE Letter i Inches Er Milimetes Width 2 5 Length i Onentatio i Portrait C Landscape x Cancel 7 Help The following information can be entered on the Page Setup tab shown above Size This is the page size of the template When the arrow at the right is pressed a list of available page sizes is displayed Inches or Millimeters The units for the width and length of the page These units will be used when specifying the layout of the legend If the Page Size is Custom the units can be set to either inches or mil limeters Custom Width If the page size is specified as custom the page horizontal width in inches must be specified Custom Length If the page size is specified as custom the page vertical length in inches must be specified Orientation This is the orientation of the page either portrait longer side 1s vertical or landscape longer side is horizontal After the Ok button is pressed the new template will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide 291
151. below will be displayed lolx Report All Boreholes Borehole umber Fields to report Length NYalue Recovery Elevation Sample Type gt Preview Print Export x Cancel Help This form allows the user to select from a list of fields they would like to include in the report The user can select to report the following fields for that Borehole 1 Borehole Number 2 X Coordinate 3 Y Coordinate 4 Elevation 5 Sample Type 6 Depth 7 Length 8 NValue 9 Recovery For a detailed explanation of the Print Preview and Export buttons refer to the General Reports section WinLoG User s Guide 421 Reports Water Levels Reports Water Level reports are used to summarize water level data for the boreholes in a project To generate a water levels report select the Water Level Report menu item from the Reports menu The Water Lev els Report Form below will be displayed lol xi Fields to report Water Level Type Depth Preview E Print Emp Export x Cancel Help This form allows the user to select from a list of fields they would like to include in the report 1 Borehole Number 2 X Coordinate 3 Y Coordinate 4 Elevation 5 Water Level Type 6 Depth 7 Date Measured For a detailed explanation of the Print Preview and Export buttons refer to the General Reports section 422 WinLoG User s Guide Graph Reports Graph R
152. border of the table in inches or millimeters from the top of the page The units of measure ment are specified in the page layout This is the line style of the outside border of the template table It includes the lines thickness and style Solid Dash Dot etc hs Border Line Style This is the line style of the lines between the indi vidual cells of a template table It includes the lines thickness and style Solid Dash Dot etc KN Inner Line Style This is the background colour of the fixed columns op Fixed Color of the table When the button 1s pressed a Color form will be displayed This is the background colour of the non fixed columns D Fill Color of the table When the button is pressed a Color form will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide 263 264 Borehole Logs Headers Tab Pi add Table Form ES Setup Headers Cell widths Jan 1 Jan 10 Feb 1 Feb 10 t PBI Po Pa DI DOI DJ e Labels Justification Labels Wertical Alignment ml Ei Label Fon Values Justification Values Vertical Alignment a sila a Pi DE x Cancel Help The following information can be entered and edited using this tab Table Headers Headers can be entered for each fixed column in table In this example there is one fixed column and one fixed row thus we can enter the headers for the 5 columns and 5 rows as shown to the Right The Left Justify button will left justify t
153. borehole on the location map After the position of the borehole has been specified the Select Template form on the next page will be displayed Select the template to use for the borehole and then press the Ok button to display the new borehole log WinLoG User s Guide Using the GIS Interface Select Template Templates albian_mike albian rew Completed Tutorial Environmental Three Graphs Environmental Two Graphs Environmental VOC and Well Environmental YOC Concentrations Environmental Well Geophysical Logs Geophysical 3 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs Legal Geotechnical Basic Geotechnical Core Log Geotechnical Core Log Legal Geotechnical PENN DOT Geotechnical Rock Core Geotechnical US Military Geotechnical Well Oil Sands 44 gt DP x Cancel 7 Help Editing a Borehole To edit a borehole in the project just double click on it on the location map The selected borehole log will then be displayed Editing a Cross section To edit a cross section in the project just double click on it on the location map If you have WinFence installed the selected cross sec tion will be displayed in WinFence WinLoG User s Guide Tip For the cross section to open it may be necessary to check that the location of the WinFence program has been specified properly in the Preferences for the program 69 70 Projects Location Map Toolbar The display and edit
154. brary Creating a New Library These tasks can be performed using menu commands on the Edit menu or buttons on the dave Library Toolbar Close Print Ik D gia H Lithology Symbols O Creating a New Symbol Library Since libraries are stored in the master project database they can be created and edited at any time no project has to be open To create a library either select the New Library menu item of the Sym bol Libraries submenu of the File menu or click the New button on the Library Toolbar The Create New Lithologic Library form below will be displayed Create New Lithologic Library Existing Library IDs SandandGravel Sedimentary Unique Library ID Name x Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide Tip To make it easier to enter the symbol library data the Sym bol Library toolbar should be turned on if it is not currently displayed If the Show Symbol Library Toolbar option in the View menu is not checked click on the option to display the toolbar If the Symbol Library toolbar is displayed in collapsed mode then click on the LIB button to expand the toolbar 397 398 Symbol Libraries The following information can be entered on this form Unique Library ID This is a unique id or name for the library up to 100 characters The Library ID cannot include any of the characters Name This is the name of the library up to 255 characters After
155. bscript attribute of the selected text on and off The Left Justify button will left justify the selected text WinLoG User s Guide 3 9 Legends The Center Justify button will center justify the selected text The Right Justify button will right justify the selected text a The Select All button will select all of the text in the memo field y The Cut button will remove the selected text and place it in the clipboard The Copy button will copy the selected text to the clipboard The Paste button will paste the text in the clipboard at the current position of the cursor in the text field SF The Replace button will replace the specified text in the text field The Symbol button will display a Symbol form This form is used to place a symbol at the current cursor position in the text field To select a symbol use the Font box to select the font containing the sym bol and then select the desired symbol After the desired symbol has been selected press the Ok button to insert it into the text field The WinLoG program comes with a font called GAEA Symbols that con tains a variety of well and other symbols w The Spell Check button will display a Spell Checker form and will check the spelling in the text field The dictionary used to check the spelling is set in the program Preferences see Chapter 3 When the Add button is pressed the word will be appended to the cus tom dictionary 3
156. bscure the copyright notices Term This License Agreement is effective from the date of purchase by the Licensee of the Licensed Product and shall remain in force until terminated The Licensee s rights to use the Licensed Product will terminate if the Licensee fails to comply with any of the terms or conditions of this License Agreement Upon such termination the Licensee shall return the Licensed Product to the Distributor immediately Limited Warranty If the Licensee finds a Licensed Product diskette to be defective in materials or workmanship which shall not include problems relating to the nature or operation of the Licensed Product under normal use the Distributor will replace it free of charge within one year following the date of purchase Any request for replacement of a defective diskette must be accompanied by the origi nal defective diskette The Licensed Product is provided as is without warranty of any kind either expressed or implied including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose The Distributor does not warrant that the func tions contained in the program will meet your requirements or that the operation of the program will be uninterrupted or error free Neither the Distributor nor anyone else who has been involved in the creation or production of this product shall be liable for any direct indirect incidental special or consequential damages whether arising
157. by specifying lithologic symbol libraries well symbols and sample type symbols to include e Position of libraries and titles can be easily and accurately specified e Number of symbols per row can be specified for each library e An unlimited number of company logos site plans or symbols can be imported as bitmaps and placed anywhere on the legend e An unlimited number of floating paragraph text boxes can be added anywhere to a legend e An unlimited number of lines rectangles and arrows can be added anywhere on the legend e Legends can be exported to the clipboard a bitmap file or an enhanced metafile Library Features e New libraries can be created by specifying the library name and ID e An unlimited number of libraries can be used e Up to 18 symbols per library WinLoG User s Guide Xi xii E ntroduction e Default text descriptions for each symbol can be entered e Symbols can be edited within the program and imported from bitmap files WinLoG User s Guide Getting Started WinLoG Demo WinloG Demo Version 4 00 Geophysics Enabled TM Kegistered Trademark Copyright ic z000 All Right Reserved AEA Technologies Purchase a4 Register Registered Trademark Copyright ic 2000 All Rights Reserv 3 of 20 uses Getting Started Before you begin working with the WinLoG program you should Check the contents of your distribution package Make sure you h
158. calculate the incre ment based on the data specified Gap at Edges This is used to select whether there should be a gap on the left and right sides of the column By putting a gap on the sides there will be room to display the minimum and maximum labels of the graph within the column Log Scale The horizontal axis can have either a linear or a logarithmic scale Show Grid To draw horizontal and vertical grid lines set Show Grid to yes WinLoG User s Guide Graph and Geophysical Columns Horizontal Spacing This is the horizontal spacing of the grid lines usually the same as the scale increment If set to zero the scale incre ment will be used If Show Grid 1s set to no this field will not appear Vertical Spacing This is the vertical spacing of the grid lines usually the same as the scale increment If set to zero the scale increment will be used If Show Grid is set to no this field will not appear Grid Line Style This is the line style to use to draw the grid When the Line Style button is pressed a Line Properties form will be dis played This form can be used to set the line style width and color Fill Area Under Curve The curve formed by the graph points can be filled with a solid color The fill will be between the left side of the col umn and the curve Fill Color This is the color to use for the fill When the Color button is pressed a Color form will be displayed This form can be used to select a bas
159. can be edited and saved with a different file name This function can be used to quickly copy and then edit bore hole logs that are very similar such as a set of boreholes drilled on the same site Enter Borehole Number Existing Boreholes Unique Borehole Number x Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide 283 284 Borehole Logs To copy a borehole log press the Copy button on the toolbar The Enter Borehole Number form shown on the previous page be will be dis played This form lists the current boreholes in the project Enter a unique Borehole Number for the new log and then press the Ok button Deleting a Borehole Log To delete a borehole log select the Delete Borehole Log menu item from the Borehole Logs submenu of the File Menu The Delete Bore hole Logs form below will be displayed A single borehole log can be selected by clicking on it and pressing the Open button A range of borehole logs can be selected by clicking on the beginning of the range and then holding down the Shift key while clicking on the end of the range Multiple logs can be selected by holding down the CTRL key while clicking on the logs Delete Borehole Logs Borehole Number 01 090 FraD MiV Ol al x Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide Changing the Log Template t Changing the Log Template A different template can be selected for the borehole log using the Change Template button on the toolbar
160. can be edited later by clicking on the Grid button on the Location Map toolbar For a detailed description of the parameters in this form see the section on using the GIS interface below After the parameters for the location map have been specified and the Ok button pressed the location map for the project will be displayed amp Opening an Existing Project To work with an existing project you can open it by selecting the Open Project menu item of the Projects submenu or clicking the Open button on the Project Toolbar In addition at the start of the program the Open an Existing Project button can be selected on the Startup Form A list of available projects will be displayed in the Open Project Form as shown on the next page The desired project can be selected by clicking on it in the list and then pressing the OK button Project Number Project Name _________ Diiectoy g CompletedT utorial Completed Tutorial C Program FilestGAEASD atabase Complet Samples Samples C Program Files GAE440 atabase S amples fj test test C Program FilesGAEA test Tutorial Tutorial Project C Program Files GAE44 7 utorial Bl ld 4 gt FP Edit Directary x Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide Tip The list of projects will include projects created in other GAEA applications such as WinFence and WinSieve These projects are listed to allow for the exchange of data between pro jects 65 Tip If a project cont
161. cave Delete The user may also Delete previous schemes which are no longer useful to them Step 4 In step 4 you choose the dates times and numbers formats x Step 4 of 8 fou can define any custom data formats Dates Times and Numbers Date Order MD hd Decimal Symbol Date Delimiter i Thousand Separator Time Delimiter Currency Symbol js W Four Digit Years W Leading Zeros in Dates Logical values True False Cancel 416 WinLoG User s Guide General Reports Step 5 In step 5 you choose which columns to export In addition you can define custom properties for each exported column Export General Report Form x Step 5 of 8 fou can define custom properties for the exported columns Title Caption Project umber BoreholeN umber levati E Elevation Background rl o h Font MS Sans Serif Eil StartDept DepthPerPage NoElevData LastT emplate Alignment let vl DepthScale ER Depth nits Background Width EE characters Font Ms Sans Serif 8 Bl Speciications B l N Cancel Data The properties that can be edited from this form are Column Width in characters Column Title Caption Column Title Alignment Column Title Background color Column Title Font Column Data Alignment Column Data Background color Column Data Font Step 6 In step 6 you choose whether to add a header and footer section
162. ches or millimeters from the top of the page Moving Titles The header and footer titles can be positioned using the Headers and Footers Entry form or by moving them with the mouse To move them with the mouse position the mouse over the text and hold down the left mouse button Then drag the text to the desired location When the mouse button is over the header title it will change to a rectangle with an arrow Sizing the Header and Footer The size of the header and footer can be changed using the Layout tab discussed above or the mouse To adjust the size using the mouse fol low the procedure below 1 Position the cursor at the boundary of the header or footer The cur sor should change to a set of arrows and the Status line should display Edit Size of Header Footer The orientation of the arrows will indi cate the direction that the boundary can be changed WinLoG User s Guide 301 302 Templates 2 Press and hold the left mouse button down and drag the boundary to its new position 3 While dragging the boundary a rectangle will be displayed showing its current location 4 When the boundary is in the desired location release the left mouse button Columns The columns of the borehole log are used to display all of the depth related data There is no limit to the number of columns that can be dis played in a borehole log A wide variety of columns can be displayed in WinLoG Templates can c
163. cluding any error messages e Copies of the borehole logs and template files These can be exported in Exchange format and then emailed to us e The type and model of your PC e The Windows version you are using WinLoG User s Guide Database Structure Database Structure Database Design The WinLoG program has been designed around the concept of projects A schematic of the database structure is shown on the next page followed by a detailed description of all the data fields This data storage method allows for the expansion archival and network administration of a large number of projects Using this method a separate Microsoft Access 97 database is used to store each project for each application Each project is stored in a separate directory which can be on the same computer or spread across a network The number of databases for each project will depend upon the applications being used for that project If for example the WinLoG and WinFence programs are being used with the project there will be two project databases The names of the project databases are the project number combined with the application suffix For example if the project number were A980205 then the project database name of the WinLoG data would be A980205winlog mdb Typically this project would be stored in the subdirectory A980205 A master project database also in Microsoft Access 97 format is used to keep track of the projects and their locat
164. contact angle of zero 1s used to specify a horizontal contact The contact angle must be between 80 and 80 Left or Right This is used to select whether the contact angle is speci fied from the left side of the symbol column or right side of the symbol column Top Line Style The Top Line Style button is used to change the line style for the top layer boundary in the symbol column If the bottom depth of the layer is specified this line style is also used for the bottom boundary When the button is pressed a Line Properties form is dis played If the Same as Description box 1s checked the line style will be set to the same as set in the Description tab for the layer WinLoG User s Guide 177 178 Borehole Logs Split Column This button is used to divide the symbol column for the layer vertically and display two symbols for the layer When the button is pressed the Symbol 2 tab below will be displayed This tab can be used to select a second lithology symbol for the layer The symbol selected in the Symbol tab will be displayed on the left side of the col umn and the symbol selected in the Symbol 2 tab will be displayed on the right side of the column Unsplit Column This button is used to remove the second symbol from the layer and display only one symbol When this button is pressed the Symbol 2 tab will disappear Symbol 2 Tab Lithology Description Symbol Symbol 2 Fil Size 1 Split zo Spl
165. cription At the top of the tab there 1s a Rich Text toolbar used to format the description add symbols and perform spell checking raa lome z UAA SBSB22R 488 The use of the Rich Text toolbar is described below Before selecting a speed button the text to be modified should be selected with the mouse or the cursor should be placed at the desired insertion point The Font Typeface box is used to T Arial z select the name of the font for the selected text Fo el The Font Size box is used to set the size of the font for the selected text Lo z The Font Color box is used to select the color of the font The Bold button is used to toggle the bold attribute of the selected text on and off The Italics button is used to toggle the italic attribute of the selected text on and off The Underline button is used to toggle the underline attribute of the selected text on and off The Left Justify button will left justify the selected text WinLoG User s Guide 371 372 Legends The Center Justify button will center justify the selected text The Right Justify button will right justify the selected text The Select All button will select all of the text in the company information The Cut button will remove the selected text and place it in the clipboard dh The Copy button will copy the selected text to the clipboard a The Paste button will paste the text in
166. ct 88 Managing a Project Database 89 Compressing a Database 89 WinLoG User s Guide Repairing a Database 90 Backing up a Database 91 Restoring a Database 92 Backing Up All WinLoG Data 95 setting Project Passwords 96 Opening a Project 96 Printing a Project 97 Importing and Exporting Data 98 Importing Version 1 and 2 Data 99 Importing Version 3 and 4 Data 104 Importing gINT Data 107 Importing AGS Data 112 Importing LogPlot Data 118 Importing GIGS Data 123 Exporting to Exchange Files 130 Exporting to the Clipboard 131 Exporting to a Bitmap File 132 Exporting to an AutoCAD File 133 Exporting to an AGS File 134 Importing Exporting Pocket WinLoG 135 Synchronizing Pocket WinLoG 136 Importing from Pocket WinLoG 137 Exporting Templates 138 Exporting Lithology Macros 139 Exporting Well Macros 139 Exporting Symbol Libraries 139 Creating Editing Lithology Macros 140 Creating Editing Well Macros 142 setting Program Preferences 143 Chapter 4 Borehole Logs Creating a New Borehole Log 157 WinLoG User s Guide Entering and Editing Borehole Data 158 General Borehole Data 159 Depths and Elevation 167 Lithology werende ade 169 Sample Data 180 Well D
167. ct List Database If this checkbox is checked then the WinLoG project list database will be backed up at a regular interval defined by the combobox to the right of it If this checkbox is not selected then the WinLoG project list database will not be backed up Back Up Main Database If this checkbox 1s checked then the Win LoG main database will be backed up at a regular interval Restoring a Database Restoration of a backed up WinLoG database is very simple Select the Individual Project menu item from the Restore Backup Database sub menu of the Projects submenu from the File menu A confirmation mes sage will be displayed select Yes to continue and the Restore Project Database Form will be displayed Restoring an Individual Project Database When the Individual Project menu item is selected from the Restore Backup Database submenu the Restore Individual Project Database form below will be displayed This form allows you to select the pro ject that your would like to restore Restore Backup Project Database 7 aw Iwunber ame Dect CompletedT utorial Completed WiinLoG Tutorial C Program Files GAEA Database CampletedT utorial Samples WinLoG Samples C Program Files GAEA Databaze 5 amples WinFence Tutorial WinFence Tutorial C Program Files GAE4 D atabasesinFence Tutorial WinFencel WinFence Example 1 C Program Files GAEA 0 atabase WwinFencel win Fences WinFence Example 2 C Program Files G4E 4 0 atabase sink ences WinF ence
168. cts the Geophysics Graph from the list box of cur rently available geophysics data Then user can select to report the fol lowing fields for the geophysics report 1 Borehole Number 2 X Coordinate 3 Y Coordinate 4 Elevation 5 Graph Name 6 Depth 7 End Depth 8 Value For a detailed explanation of the Print Preview and Export buttons refer to the General Reports section 424 WinLoG User s Guide Help E Win oG Yersion 3 io Hide Back Print Options Contents Index Search E g Introduction a ty WinLoG Features Project Features g Borehole Log Features E Templates E Legend Features E Library Features B Frequently Asked Questions Database Structures Ce Getting Started Ce Tutorial Projects Borehole Logs en Working with Templates Ce Working Legends gb Working with Libraries Co Guides Co Getting Technical Support Copyright Notice Biel x aje WinLoG Features The WinLols program has numerous features to make creating and editing of borehole logs easier and faster Most of the existing features have been enhanced in Version 3 of the program and many new features have been added Features of the graphical user interface of the WWinLoG program include standard pull down menus and status line Five floating and dockable toolbars containing the mast commonly used commands Multiple windows support On line context sensitive help Borehole logs can be zoomed in a
169. d Gravels Sedimentary Rocks Silts and Clays USCS Symbols Well MH atenals x Cancel A single library can be selected by clicking on it and pressing the Open button A range of libraries can be selected by clicking on the beginning of the range and then holding down the Shift key while clicking on the end of the range Multiple libraries can be selected by holding down the CTRL key while clicking on the libraries WinLoG User s Guide Printing a Library amp Printing a Symbol Library To print a library either click the right mouse button and select the Print menu item from the popup menu or press the Print button on the library toolbar WinLoG User s Guide 407 Symbol Libraries 408 WinLoG User s Guide Report Y Borehole Listings General Borehole Report Z Coord Ypord Be vation Reports In version 4 WinLoG can produce reports on borehole data for a project The reports can be on all of the bore holes or a subset of the boreholes A variety of informa tion can be reported and the format of the reports can be customized These reports can be used to summarize and provide sta tistics on the boreholes within a project The types of sta tistics and detailed information within the report can be customized and depends on the type of report Winlog can generate six different types of reports e General Reports e Lithology Reports e Sample Reports e Water Level Reports e Gra
170. d and use disk space inefficiently Com pacting the database makes a copy of the file and rearranges how the file is stored on your disk Com pacting optimizes the performance of the databases 89 90 Projects Compact Project Form CompletedT utorial Completed WinLoG Tutorial C Program Files GA4E4 D atabase CompletedT utorial Samples WinLoG Samples C Program Files GA4EA D atabase S amples WinFence Tutorial C Program Files GA4EA D atabase WinF ence Tutorial WinFence Tutorial WinFence Example 1 C Program Files GAEA D atabase WinFencel WinFence Example 2 C Program Files GAEA D atabase WinFence2 WinFence3 WinFence Example 3 C Program Files GAEA D atabase WinFence3 WinFencel 44d D gt Di XM Cancel Help Select the project database you wish to compact and then press the Ok button Repairing a Database It sometimes happens that a WinLoG project database might become un usable because the MS Access database has become corrupted in some way WinLoG has a feature which enables the user to repair the database To repair a WinLoG Project Database select the Repair Pro ject Database menu item from the Projects submenu of the File menu Repair Project Database CompletedT utorial Completed WinLoG Tutorial C Program Files GAEA D atabase CompletedT utorial Samples WinLoG Samples C Program Files G4EA D atabase S amples WinFence Tutorial WinFence Tutorial C Program Files GA4EA D
171. d bw X i Edt Name x Cancel Help The following information can be entered and edited for each tab Depth This is the depth of the data point in the same units as set in the template Value This is the value of the data point in the same units as set in the template WinLoG User s Guide 227 Borehole Logs Bar Graphs If the graph type is a bargraph histogram the Graph form below will be displayed Graph Bargraph stat Deph End Dept M4 bm X i Edt Name x Cancel Help The following information can be entered and edited for the bargraph Start Depth This is the start depth of the bar in the same units as set in the template End Depth This is the end depth of the bar in the same units as the template Value This is the value of the bar in the same units as set in the tem plate 228 WinLoG User s Guide Water Content Data Water Content Data Water Content graphs are used to display water contents and Atterberg limits Water Content data can be entered and edited by selecting the Water Content Data menu item of the Edit menu or by clicking the left mouse button inside the Water Content graph of the borehole log After performing one of the above tasks the Water Content form below will be displayed The buttons at the bottom of this form are used for the following The Start button moves to the first data point d The Previous button moves to the previous data point
172. dataset from a borehole log select the Delete Remark menu item of the Remarks submenu of the Edit menu The Delete Remark form below will be displayed Select the remark data to be deleted and press the Ok button Delete Remark Description Slough Hardness Measured Dips Geotech Flags Est Bitumen Text Interval Data Text Interval columns are similar to Remark columns in that they can be used to display text at any depth In Text Interval columns a top and bottom depth for the text 1s specified An optional line can be drawn across the column at these top and bottom depths Text Interval columns can also be linked together so that the top and bottom depths only need to be specified once for all of the linked columns This is useful for samples and laboratory results that are shown on several columns Facies Constituent and Member columns can also be linked The template for the borehole log specifies which columns are linked WinLoG User s Guide 215 216 Borehole Logs Text Interval columns can be entered and edited by selecting the Text Interval submenu of the Edit menu and then selecting the name of the column or by clicking the left mouse button inside the column on the borehole log After performing one of the above tasks either the Text Intervals form or the Linked Text Intervals form will be displayed Text Intervals Form 2 4 sample 1 B E sample 2 10 1 sample 3 44 a a HX
173. de of the rectangle When the Fill Color button is pressed a Color form will be displayed Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color can be specified WinLoG User s Guide 391 392 Legends Page Layout The page layout is used to set the paper size and orientation for the printed legend To change the page layout select the Page Layout menu item from the Edit menu The Page Layout form below will be dis played Page Layout Size Letter i Aches Cr Milimeters Width 2 5 Length i Orientation fe Portrait ik Landscape x Cancel Help The following information can be entered on the Page Layout form Size This is the page size of the template When the arrow at the right is pressed a list of available page sizes is displayed Inches or Millimeters The units for the width and length of the page These units will be used when specifying the layout of the legend If the Page Size is Custom the units can be set to either inches or mil limeters Width If the page size is specified as custom the page horizontal width in inches must be specified Length If the page size is specified as custom the page vertical length in inches must be specified Orientation This is the orientation of the page either portrait longer side 1s vertical or landscape longer side is horizontal WinLoG User s Guide Saving a Legend Saving a Legend To save a Legend afte
174. demark 1T E Copyright c 2000 All Right Reserved i GAEA Technologies 5 Purchase amp Register Registered Trademark f 7 Copyright fc 2000 All Rights Reserved IL 3 of 20 uses Single User Registration To register the program and obtain an unlock code run the WinLoG program Until the program is unlocked it will operate in Demo mode and the form below will be displayed To register the program press the Register button the Registration form shown on the next page will be displayed In the middle of this form a unique serial number will be displayed This serial number is unique for each computer To register the program an unlock code must be obtained using this ser ial number If your computer is connected to the Internet you can obtain this unlock code by clicking on the Obtain Unlock Code button After the button is pressed a registration form on GAEA s web site will be displayed on your internet browser Fill out the form and then click on the submit button After your registration information has been received an unlock code will be emailed to you WinLoG User s Guide Tip This form can also be displayed using the Purchase menu item in the Help menu Tip If you have problems emailing us the serial number or need an unlock code faster call us and we will give it to you over the phone 5 6 Getting Started Registration To register the software and obtain an unlock cod
175. diameter to use when adding well columns to a borehole log The actual well diameter is set in the log Default Well Pipe Diameter This is the default pipe diameter to be used when adding pipes and screens to well columns Dictionary This is the dictionary to use when performing spell check ing One of the following dictionaries can be selected American British Dutch English French German Italian and Spanish Auto Replace If checked common misspelled words will be automati cally replaced when conducting spell checking Automatic Updates When this box is checked the program will auto matically check and install updated to the WinLoG program from the Internet If you have an Internet connection to your computer it is rec ommended that this box be checked Interval This is the time interval between checks for automatic updates Location Map Tab The Location Map tab shown on the next page is used to specify the following parameters Show Location Map This radio button allows the user to turn the location map on or off Fence Line Style Clicking the line style button opens a Line proper ties form on which the user can user select the type of fence line repre sentation they would like on the location map Fence Label Font The font button allows the user to edit the fence line font Clicking on the button opens up the Font Style form This form allows the user to change the font font size font color and font
176. display Edit Size of Bitmap The orientation of the arrows will indicate the direction that the boundary can be changed 2 Press and hold the left mouse button down and drag the boundary to its new position 3 While dragging the boundary a rectangle will be displayed showing its current location 4 When the boundary is in the desired location release the left mouse button WinLoG User s Guide 385 386 Legends Lines and Arrows Horizontal vertical and diagonal lines and arrows can be added any where on a legend There is no limit to the number of lines and arrows that can be added Adding a Line or an Arrow There are two methods that can be used to add a line or arrow to a leg end 1 By clicking on the Line button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the starting point of the line or arrow Then while holding down the left mouse button drag the cursor to the end of the line or arrow and release the mouse button The Edit Lines form described in the next section will then be displayed 2 By selecting the Lines menu item from the Edit menu or Popup menu and then clicking on the Add button on the form The Edit Lines form described in the next section will then be displayed Using this method the location of the line must be specified on the form Editing a Line or Arrow Existing Lines can be edited by selecting the Lines menu item of the Edit menu or c
177. displayed Top This is the position of the top border of the bitmap in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Bitmap button on the tool bar 1s used to create the bitmap this field will not be displayed If Stretch Bitmap is set to No then this field will not be displayed WinLoG User s Guide Bitmaps Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the bitmap in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Stretch Bitmap is set to No or Maintain Aspect Ratio is set to yes then this field will not be displayed and the bottom will be calculated by the program Center X This is the bitmap s horizontal center in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If Stretch Bitmap is set to Yes this field will not be displayed If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to add the bitmap this field will be filled in by the program Center Y This is the bitmap s vertical center 1n inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If Stretch Bitmap is set to Yes this field will not be displayed If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to add the bitmap this field will be filled in by the program Sizing a Bitmap The size of the bitmap can be changed using the Bitmap Information form above or the mouse To adjust the size using the mouse follow the procedure below 1 Position the cursor at the boundary of the bitmap The cursor should change to a set of arrows and the Status line should
178. dit Size of Bitmap The orientation of the arrows will indicate the direction that the boundary can be changed 2 Press and hold the left mouse button down and drag the boundary to its new position 3 While dragging the boundary a rectangle will be displayed showing its current location 4 When the boundary is in the desired location release the left mouse button WinLoG User s Guide 253 254 Borehole Logs Lines and Arrows Horizontal vertical and diagonal lines and arrows can be added any where on a log There 1s no limit to the number of lines and arrows that can be added Adding a Line or an Arrow There are two methods that can be used to add a line or arrow to a log 1 By clicking on the Line button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the starting point of the line or arrow Then while holding down the left mouse button drag the cursor to the end of the line or arrow and release the mouse button The Edit Lines form described in the next section will then be displayed 2 By selecting the Lines menu item from the Edit menu or Popup menu and then clicking on the Add button on the form The Edit Lines form described in the next section will then be displayed Using this method the location of the line must be specified on the form Editing a Line or Arrow Existing Lines can be edited by selecting the Lines menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left m
179. dit the header or footer and display the Template Header and Footer Entry form shown below either select the Header or Footer menu items from the Edit menu right click the mouse button and select the Header or Footer menu items from the popup menu or click the left mouse button inside the header or footer of the template After one of the above tasks has been completed the Template Header and Footer Entry form shown on the next page will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide 293 Templates The Template Header and Footer Entry form has three tabs one for the header one for the footer and one for the layout of the header and footer If the template has two pages this form will have six tabs as shown below three for the first page and three for the second page Data entry and editing for the second page is identical to the first page which is described in detail below empat Header and Footer Entry Borehole Number EE 3 5 0 89 Project Mo O 0 75 Dr 0 0 Project 0O 0 75 1 1 0 0 Client LJ 0 75 1 39 0 0 Site Location O 0 75 1 69 0 0 Enclosure O 3 5 1 42 0 Engineer O 3 5 1 69 0 j 44 bp HH X x Cancel 7 Help ff Ok The buttons at the bottom of the tabs are used for the following lg The Start button moves to the first tile 4 The Previous button moves to the previous title P The Next button moves to the next title P The End button moves to the last title The In
180. dit this name or click on the but ton to the right of the name If the button to the right is pressed an Open bitmap file form will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide 337 338 Templates Stretch Bitmap Select yes to stretch the bitmap to fit within the speci fied borders If no 1s selected only the center of the bitmap and page can be entered for the position If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to add the bitmap Stretch Bitmap is set to No Maintain Aspect Ratio Select yes to keep the aspect ratio of the bitmap the same as stored in the file If yes is selected the bottom of the bitmap will be automatically adjusted to maintain the aspect ratio If Stretch Bitmap is set to No then this field will not be displayed and it is assumed that the aspect ratio is maintained Left This is the position of the left border of the bitmap in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to create the bitmap this field will not be displayed If Stretch Bitmap is set to No then this field will not be displayed The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Right This is the position of the right border of the bitmap in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to create the bitmap this field will not be displayed If Stretch Bitmap is set to No then this field will not be displayed Top This is the positio
181. downloaded to the Pocket PC during synchro nization Exporting Lithology Macros to Pocket WinLoG To export and download the lithologic macros in WinLoG to Pocket WinLoG select the Export Lithologic Macros menu item from the Pocket PC Data submenu of the File menu All of the lithologic macros will be exported These macros will be automatically downloaded to the Pocket PC during synchronization Exporting Well Macros to Pocket WinLoG To export and download the well macros in WinLoG to Pocket Win LoG select the Export Well Macros menu item from the Pocket PC Data submenu of the File menu All of the well macros will be exported These macros will be automatically downloaded to the Pocket PC during synchronization Exporting Symbol Libraries to Pocket WinLoG Symbol libraries in the desktop version of WinLoG can be exported and downloaded to Pocket WinLoG by selecting the Export Symbol Library menu item from the Pocket PC Data submenu of the File menu in the desktop version of WinLoG The Export Symbol Library to Pocket form on the next page will be displayed A symbol library can be selected by clicking on it with the mouse The exported symbol library will then be automatically downloaded to the Pocket PC during synchronization WinLoG User s Guide 139 140 Projects Export Library to Pocket Library Hames Common Symbols Igneous and Metamorphic Hack Sands and Gravels Sits and Clays USCS Symbols Wal
182. e click the obtain unlock code button A registration form on GAEA s internet site will be displayed in the information on the form and then submit the form Serial Number 1 4042671 If you are unable to access the internet please call us at 905 725 4487 o fax us at 905 725 9657 After vou have received an unlock code enter it below and click the button Unlock Code store Unlock Code W OK X Cancel 7 Help If your computer is not connected to the Internet you can call or fax us the serial number After GAEA has received your unique serial number an unlock code will be generated and emailed or faxed to you When you receive the unlock code enter it in the space at the bottom of the Registration form and then press the Store Unlock Code button The WinLoG program is now registered and the Demo form will no longer be displayed when the program is run Network Registration Registering the program for a network with multiple users is a little dif ferent than for a single user The Network Monitor program shown on the next page 1s used to unlock the network and monitor program usage To unlock the program start the Network Monitor program in the Win LoG application group Click on the Unlock Network button on the Network Monitor form Then contact GAEA by email or telephone and provide the network serial and user numbers shown on the form Enter the network and user unlock codes provided by GAEA and
183. e Add button on the form The Edit Lines form described in the next section will then be displayed Using this method the location of the line must be specified on the form Editing a Line or Arrow Existing Lines can be edited by selecting the Lines menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mouse button at the start or end point of the line After performing one of the above tasks the Edit Lines form on the next page will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide d Pas Lines and Arrows Lines Diagonal Arrowhea Horizontal f No fes i Vertical Position f End e Start Arrowhead Size 2 A Line ste DN X x Cancel 7 Help The buttons at the bottom of the this form are used for the following The Start button displays the first line The Previous button displays the previous line The Next button displays the next line The End button displays the last line The Insert button adds a new line The Delete button deletes this line The following information can be entered and edited using this form Orientation This is the orientation of the line either diagonal hori zontal or vertical If the orientation is set to horizontal the vertical position will be set to the y position of the start of the line If the orien tation is set to vertical the horizontal position will be set to the x posi tion of the start of the line WinLoG User s Guide 387 388 Legends Star
184. e Listing Preview form there are several speed buttons that perform the following functions The Zoom to Fit button zooms out to show the full page on the preview view The Zoom to 100 button zooms the print preview to its true scale The Zoom to Width button zooms in to the full page width I4 The First Page button opens the first page print preview 4 The Previous Page button opens the previous page print preview The Next Page button opens the next page print preview HL The Last Page button opens the last page print preview WinLoG User s Guide 413 414 Reports 5 The Print Setup button allows the user to print the project print preview and set the printer properties Clicking the button opens up a standard print dialog that allows the user to select the print range and the number of copies The Print button allows the user to send the preview to the printer The Save button allows the user to save the preview as a Winlog Report file QRP The Open button allows the user to open a Winlog Report file QRP as a preview report The Close button allows the user to close the currently opened Close Winlog Report preview Exporting a Report The Export button will export the report to one of 19 different file for mats Clicking the Export button opens up the export wizard which takes the user through an 8 step process in which they may select the file type and other formatting issu
185. e Number title by clicking on the Layout tab shown below Press the Title Font button to change the font for the Borehole Number In the Font form change the font style to Bold and the font size to 18 Press the Ok button on the Font form and the Template Header and Footer Entry form Template Header and Footer Entry Headers Footers Layout Border Right Top Position 575 0 56 Template Font Color E Log Font kN Line Style Footer Justification W Show Border Position Template Font Right gt En m Lag Font Top Bottom Bottom Line Style wf Ok X Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide Changing the Company Name Changing the Company Name The company name displayed at the top of the log can be changed to show your company name Click on the company name with the left mouse button The Company Information form shown below will be displayed Enter your company name and adjust the Top to 1 2 and the bottom to 1 8 Then press the OK button Company Information Company Info ane Background Color ACME Consulting Company 44 Canadian Oaks Drive Border Whitby Ontario Left Canada Right Top B attorn x Cancel Help hj Adding a Company Logo A popular way to customize a template is to add yours or your client s company logo To add a company logo click Bitmap button on the Template toolbar Click on the loc
186. e Properties form will be displayed This form can be used to select the line style width and color If the line style is set to none no line will connect the points Point Type The profile data can be shown as circles crosses squares squares triangles or inverted triangles To not show the data points select none Point Size This is the size of the data points If the Point Type is set to none this field will not appear Point Color This 1s the color of the data points To change the color press the Color button A Color form will be displayed This form can be used to select a basic color or a custom color If the Point Type is set to none this field will not appear Label Points The values of the data points can be drawn above each point If the data value is less than the minimum value the value will be shown with a lt symbol If the data value is greater than the maxi mum value the value will be shown with a gt symbol If the Point Type is set to none this field will not appear Decimal Digits When Label Points is turned on this is the number of digits to show after the decimal in the labels If Label Points is turned off this field is not displayed WinLoG User s Guide 327 328 Templates Percent Cuttings Column Percent cuttings data are collected normally during mud logging and are used to denote the relative percentage of different lithologies at a depth For example the rel
187. e Title Alignmen Show Title eve Co eve Co Title Ground Surface Title End of Log EE EEE mn Line Width Line Windt Description Only All Columns Description Only All Columns x Cancel 7 Help The Customize Description Column form can be used to set the follow ing parameters Show Ground Surface Title This determines whether to display a title for the ground surface The ground surface title is displayed in the lithologic description column at the top of the log If the show title option is turned off the borehole log will start immediately after the column title block Otherwise there will be a small gap between the column title block and the start of the log to display the ground surface title Ground Surface Title This is the title to display for the ground sur face up to 255 characters To leave a gap without displaying a title set the Show Ground Surface Title to yes and leave the title blank If Show Ground Surface Title is set to no this field will not be dis played WinLoG User s Guide Lithologic Description Column Show End of Borehole Title This determines whether to display a title at the end of the borehole The end of borehole log title 1s displayed in the layer description column at the bottom of the log End of Borehole Title This is the title to display at the end of the borehole up to 255 characters The depth of the borehole can be included in the title by specify
188. e button at the start or end point of the line After performing one of the above tasks the Edit Lines form below will be displayed Lines Diagonal Arowhea Horizontal fe No es i Vertical Position f End C Start Arrowhead Size 2 A Line Sle E 4 4d D X x Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide Lines and Arrows If the template has two pages the Edit Lines form will have two tabs as shown on the next page The first tab is for lines on the first page and the second tab 1s for lines on the second page The data entry for both tabs is identical The following information can be entered and edited using this form Orientation This is the orientation of the line either diagonal hori zontal or vertical If the orientation is set to horizontal the vertical position will be set to the y position of the start of the line If the orien tation is set to vertical the horizontal position will be set to the x posi tion of the start of the line Start X This is the horizontal position of the start of the line in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line the program will fill in this field The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Start Y This is the vertical position of the start of the line in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line the progra
189. e data to the specified file type and complete the exporting process WinLoG User s Guide 419 Reports Lithology Reports Lithology reports are used to summarize lithologic layer data for the boreholes in a project To generate a lithology report select the Lithol ogy Report menu item from the Reports menu The Lithology Report form below will be displayed This form allows the user to select from a list of fields they would like to include in the report Pa Lithology Report o x Fields to report Litholoqies ta Repo Borehole Numbe a All Lithologies Selected Lithology x Thickness Litholooy Type gt Preview E Print Exp Export x Cancel Help The user can select to report all the lithologies or only one particular lithology In addition they can select to report any or all of the fields listed below by selecting the check box to the left of the title 1 Borehole Number 2 X Coordinate 3 Y Coordinate 4 Elevation 5 Layer Top 6 Layer Bottom 7 Thickness 8 Lithology Type 9 Description For a detailed explanation of the Print Preview and Export buttons refer to the General Reports section 420 WinLoG User s Guide Samples Reports Samples Reports Samples reports are used to summarize sample data for the boreholes in a project To generate a samples report select the Samples Report menu item from the Reports menu The Samples Report Form
190. e is no limit to the number of tables that can be displayed These boxes can overlap boundaries between the header footer and columns Log tables are typ ically used to group of data with similar values such as a water level table Adding a Table There are two methods that can be used to add a Table to a Log 1 By clicking on the Table button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the upper left corner of the Table box Then while holding the left mouse button down drag the mouse to the location of the lower right corner After the button has been released the Table form on the next page will be displayed 2 By selecting the Tables menu item from the Edit menu or Popup menu and then clicking on the Add button on the Tables form This will create a new Table Using this method the location of the Table must be specified on the form as described below Editing a Table Existing table data can be edited by selecting the Table menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mouse button inside the table of the log After performing one of the above tasks the Log Table form on the next page will be displayed There are three tabs on the Add Tables form These are 1 Setup Tab 2 Headers Tab 3 Cell Widths Tab WinLoG User s Guide 261 262 Borehole Logs Setup Tab Fi add Table Form F O x Setup Headers Cell widths Table Number Number of How 5 Number of
191. e on a template These tables are displayed over top of any information on the template There is no limit to the number of tables that can be displayed These boxes can overlap boundaries between the header footer and columns Template tables are typically used to group of data with similar values such as a water level table Adding a Table There are two methods that can be used to add a Table to a template 1 By clicking on the Table button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the upper left corner of the Table box Then while holding the left mouse button down drag the mouse to the location of the lower right corner Then release the mouse button While the mouse button is held down a marquee box will be drawn to indicate the location of the Table After the button has been released the Table form shown in the section below will be displayed 2 By selecting the Tables menu item from the Edit menu or Popup menu and then clicking on the Add button on the Tables form This will create a new Table Using this method the location of the Table must be specified on the form as described below Editing a Table Existing tables in a template can be edited by selecting the Table menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mouse button inside the Table on the template After performing one of the above tasks the Template Table form on the next page will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide
192. e same for all of the well layers and need to be entered only once The type of surface and bottom cap will be graphically depicted at the top and bottom of the monitoring well Well Type 1 data can be entered and edited by selecting the Well Data submenu of the Edit menu and the selecting the name of the well col umn or clicking the left mouse button inside the well column of the borehole log After performing one of the above tasks the Well Type 1 Data form below will be displayed This form has two tabs one for the water and general well data and one for specifying the risers and screens Water and Well Data Tab Well welll Water amp Well Data Interval Data well Depth jo Water Depth 8 8234 782657595 Symbo Surface Cove Flush Mount C Aboveground C Stand Fipe C Inverted Triangle C Water Column i Both f None The Water and Well Data tab shown above is used to enter and edit water level and general well data The following information can be entered and edited using this tab Well Depth This is the total depth of the well in the same units as set in the template WinLoG User s Guide 187 188 Borehole Logs Water Depth This is the measured depth of the water table in the well in the same units as the well depth Symbol This is type of symbol to use to depict the water table speci fied above Surface Cover This is the type of symbol to use to depict the
193. e section below will be displayed 2 By selecting the Paragraph Text menu item from the Edit menu or Popup menu and then clicking on the Add button on the Paragraph Text form This will create a new paragraph Using this method the location of the paragraph must be specified on the form as described below Editing a Paragraph Existing Paragraph data can be edited by selecting the Paragraph Text menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mouse button inside the Paragraph Text of the legend After performing one of the above tasks the Paragraph Text form on the next page will be displayed The buttons at the bottom of the this form are used for the following WinLoG User s Guide p d Paragraphs T Arial Apo Am Bz ee ict BE Background cool Frame tf No ie Yeg Frame Width fi A Frame Color HA Pb MAX x Cancel 7 Help The Start button displays the first paragraph The Previous button displays the previous paragraph The Next button displays the next paragraph The End button displays the last paragraph The Insert button creates a new paragraph The Delete button deletes this paragraph The following information can be entered and edited using this form Text This is the text for the paragraph There is no limit to the length of the text The Rich Text toolbar at the top of the form is used to for mat the text This toolbar is described below WinLoG User s
194. e selected by hold ing down the Ctrl key while clicking on the logs After the Open button has been pressed the Import Version 2 Logs form will be displayed as shown on the next page WinLoG User s Guide 99 100 Projects Import Yersion 2 Logs Borehole Mumbe Coordinate t Coordinate f Select C Select C Select f Specify f Specify f Specify Borehole x Cancel Help The purpose of this form is to get the unique Borehole Number X Coordinate and Y Coordinate of the imported logs so that they can be properly stored in the database This information can be selected from the headers of the logs or be entered in the table for each log The X and Y Coordinates are used primarily by other applications and may be left blank If the information is to be selected from the borehole logs as shown above a Select button will appear below the data type This button should be pressed to select which field in the borehole logs has the desired data in this case the borehole number A Borehole Data List form shown on the next page will be displayed listing the fields con tained in the borehole logs This field list 1s derived from the header and footer fields in the template of the first borehole log and the head ers and footers of the first borehole log The desired field Borehole Number in this case should be selected and then the Select button pressed WinLoG User s Guide Importing Version 1 and 2
195. e third dimension te at depth below the two dimensions of the earth s surface Today it 1s relatively easy to determine position on the surface but not so at depth Unfortunately all too often the path of the hole 1s erroneously assumed to follow the original dip or inclination and azimuth or direction established at the collar at the top of the hole Numerous borehole sur veying devices have been developed none of which are perfect how ever quite accurate results are possible by using the right tool in the right hole How is a borehole deviation survey accomplished A borehole deviation survey is usually accomplished by moving a probe along the hole and sensing the movement of the probe relative to one or more frames of reference which may include the earth s gravita tional field magnetic field or other inertial reference and or by sensing the distortion or bending of the housing of the probe itself The differ ent methods each have their own advantages and limitations such as ability inability to operate inside steel casing speed and complexity of operation accuracy cost distance between measurements ruggedness and reliability Setting The Deviation Calculation Winlog provides five different calculations from which to calculate borehole X Y and Z coordinates based on a deviation survey which includes the measured depth inclination angle and the azimuth angle These include 1 Average Angle method 2 B
196. e well name can then be entered in the Edit Well Name form Changing the name of the well dataset will affect whether the well is displayed in the borehole log For the well to be displayed the template must contain a well column with the same name Components Tab The Components tab shown on the next page is used to enter the well components These components consist of covers caps casings screens seals packing bottom seals joints and miscellaneous fittings The buttons at the bottom of this tab are used for the following ld The Start button moves to the first component d The Previous button moves to the previous component Pk The Next button moves to the next component Fl The End button moves to the last component WinLoG User s Guide Well Data The Insert button creates a new component X The Delete button deletes this component well well Layout Components water Levels Annotations 65 d 0 oe Bottom Seal 13 0 Bottom Seal 55 ES 0 g 0 Ze Bottom Seal 11 5 13 5 0 g 0 LE Bottom Seal 1 5 5 q 0 Me Casing Screen 0 p d 10 0 f j Seal Packing 4 45 10 12 0 Be Seal Packing 0 a 10 14 0 ae Casing Screen 0 5 5 0 2 2 Casing Screen 85 10 5 0 2 2 zi 14 a a The following information can be entered and edited using this tab Component This is the type of well component When the cursor is placed within this column a combo box will be displayed By clicking on the arrow to the right
197. e width of the north arrow in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the North Arrow button on the toolbar is used to create the north arrow the program will fill in the position otherwise the user will have to enter in the position Height This is the height of the north arrow in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the North Arrow button on the toolbar is used to create the north arrow the program will fill in the position otherwise the user will have to enter in the position Borehole Text Font Button The Borehole Text Font button allows the user to edit the size of the borehole text Clicking on the button will open up the Font Style form This form allows the user to change the font font size font color and font style of the borehole name Font Font style Size MS Sans Serif Regular f4 fi 8 Cancel MS Serif Italic 10 hes Tp MT Extra Bold 12 Er MurrayHill Bd BT Bold Italic 14 g MV Boli 18 NevisonCasD 24 Er NewBskvll BT x ha Effects Sample l Strikeout P M rdine gi HM Black v Script Westem v d Borehole Symbol Font Button The Borehole Symbol font button allows the user to edit the size of the borehole symbols Clicking on the button opens up the Symbol Font Properties form This form allows the user to change the font size and color of the borehole symbols WinLoG User s Guide 71 72 Projects Symbol Font Properties i Symbol Font Size Sp Col
198. eadsheet form Select the cells you wish to use for the Mea sured depth data then click the right mouse button This operation can then be repeated for the Inclination and Azimuth After the cell ranges have been specified click the OK button to import the data Importing a LAS File Deviation Survey To import a deviation survey from an LAS file select the LAS File menu item from the Import Deviation Survey submenu This will open up the Import LAS Deviation Survey form below Import LAS Deviation Survey f E Hame gt XC Cancel Help Select the LAS file to import using the Open button to the right of the Name After the file has been specified the form will contain fields for specifying the depth inclination and azimuth columns as shown on the next page This form will allow you to specify the following Depth Column This is the measured depth column data in the LAS File The user defines this column by selecting the appropriate Depth column from the list of all columns in the LAS file using the the combo box to the right WinLoG User s Guide 219 280 Borehole Logs Inclination Column This is the Inclination column the LAS File The user defines this column by selecting the appropriate Inclination column from the list of all columns in the LAS file using the the combo box to the right Azimuth Column This is the Azimuth column the LAS File The user defines this column by selecting the appropria
199. ecified press the Ok button to continue WinLoG User s Guide 129 Tip To send a borehole log or tem plate to Technical Support it should first be exported to an exchange file This exchange file can then be emailed to Technical Support 130 Projects The last step to import a GTGS Version 5 log is to specify the template to use to format the log data The Open GTGS Version 5 Template File form allows users to select the name of the GTGS Template they would like to use Import GTGS Version 5 Template Files B 2 x Lookin Templates Files of type Template Files Cancel ZA Exporting to Exchange Files Exchange files are used to transfer borehole logs templates and leg ends between projects or to other companies The data in these files is stored as ASCII text The process for exporting to an exchange file is identical for both version 3 and 4 Export Yersion 3 Exchange Template File EES Save ire E My Files amp c l c Ea E Samples aa komen tma a8 template tmd a end column shrinking tras probehole tris best tra albian_roike tris SECOR temp tris tutorial tris albian_rev1 tig al SECOR temp2 tm3 US Steel Log tm3 an Bug Templete tma SECOR temp tn haal WardropT emplate a ealloge tris stdtemp tras washington boreho Save as type Exchange Template Files Cancel WinLoG User s Guide Exporting to Exchange Files To export the
200. ect the Bitmaps menu item from the Edit menu or Popup menu and then clicking on the Add button on the form The Open form on the next page will then be displayed Select the bitmap file and then press the Open button Using this method the location of the bitmap must be specified on the form as described below WinLoG User s Guide Bitmaps Open Ed Look ir a Bitmaps El md 188x46 jE Paanan ee EIT fe B ottom6 bmp t British 2 bmp he Bottom bmp he British 3 bmp he Bottom8 bmp he Britieh14 bmp be British bmp PS British 5 bmp hej British 0 bmp e British1 6 bmp File name Jacme brp _Open Files of type AN git bmp ico emf wm Cancel Editing a Bitmap Existing Bitmaps can be edited by selecting the Bitmaps menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mouse button inside the Bitmap After performing one of the above tasks the Bitmap Information form on the next page will be displayed Ione raar File Mame C Program Files GAEA WinLoG Bitmaps acme bmp C Program Files GAEA WinLoG Bitmaps acme bmp Files GAEA 4 inLoG Bitmaps acme bmp R Stretch Bitma rent Ho i es Center s Center 7 Width 138 Height 46 4q heh e x Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide 251 252 Borehole Logs The following information can be entered and edited using this form File Name This is the name of the bitmap file to display on the tem plate To change
201. ect the type of axis line they would like on the location map WinLoG User s Guide 85 86 Projects Font Button The Font button allows the user to edit the size of the axis font Clicking on the button opens up the Font Style form Fence Line Tab The Fence Line tab controls the appearance of the line style and label style of cross sections on the location map lol Grid Map Axis Fence Line Units Line Style Label Style 7 Location XOffset fo gt Line Style ele o Label Fond The following information can be entered and edited using this tab X Offset This is the offset in feet or metres of the labels from the beginning and end of the fence lines in the horizontal direction The units of measurement are specified on the Units tab Y Offset This is the offset in feet or metres of the labels from the beginning and end of the fence lines in the vertical direction The units of measurement are specified on the Units tab Line Style Button Clicking the line style button opens a Line proper ties form on which the user can user select the type of fence line repre sentation they would like on the location map Font Button The Font button allows the user to edit the fence line font Clicking on the button opens up the Font Style form This form allows the user to change the font font size font color and font style WinLoG User s Guide Location Map Toolbar Units Tab The Units tab contro
202. ectangle this position will be filled in by the program Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the rectangle in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Rectangle button on the toolbar is used to create the rectangle this position will be filled in by the program Line Style This is the style of the rectangle border The line style can be changed by pressing the Line Style button A Line Properties form will then be displayed Using this form the style color and width of the rectangle can be set Fill Color This is the color to use to fill the inside of the rectangle When the Fill Color button is pressed a Color form will be displayed Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color can be specified WinLoG User s Guide Tables Tables In version 4 there are two types of tables that can be shown on a log log based tables and template based tables For template based tables all of the layout and formatting of the table is specified in the template and only the data can be entered in the log This type of table is useful when the location and format of the table should be the same for all logs Log based tables are added to a specific log and the layout and format ting are specified for that log This type of table is useful if the data is only to be shown on the one log Template Based Tables Adding or editing data to a template based table from a log is quite sim
203. ects and their locations A more detailed description of the database system is provided at the end of this chapter and in Chapter 3 Features The WinLoG program has numerous features to make creating and editing of borehole logs easier and faster Most of the existing features have been enhanced in Version 4 of the program and many new fea tures have been added New Features e Graphical Information System GIS for displaying and picking bore holes and cross sections in Winlog with Winfence GIS can also display site features and import AutoCAD files e Project reports can be generated for all data in a project for example o layer tops and thickness o blow counts o water content e Deviated boreholes can be entered and displayed in true depth Devia tion readings can be entered manually or imported from a file Several methods for calculating true depth are supported WinLoG User s Guide e Tables ex Water Level Readings can be displayed on boring logs and templates e Templates and projects can have password locks that can be used to restrict changes to a template and access to a project e AGS format files can be imported and exported e INT LogPlot and GTGS files can be imported e Data in Excel can be imported into all the logs in a project at the same time This can be used to import the survey data for all the boreholes from a spreadsheet e Continuous logs are supported These logs span several page
204. ed or a custom color can be specified If no frame is selected above this field will not be dis played T Arial 10 IN E i U Aa B 5 TY WinLoG User s Guide Location Map Toolbar At the top of the Paragraph Text form is the Rich Text toolbar this tool bar can be used to modify the font characteristics of the text Before selecting a speed button the text to be modified should be selected with the mouse 1 Bitmap Tool Bitmaps contained in Windows bitmap BMP or JPEG files can be added anywhere on a log These bitmaps can be used to show company logos site plans and other graphical information Bitmaps are dis played over top of any information on the log There is no limit to the number of bitmaps that can be displayed To add a bitmap click on the Bitmap button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the center of the bitmap The Open form below will then be displayed Select the bitmap file and then press the Open button Bitmap Information eS File Name C Program Files GAEANWinLoG Bitmapsacme bmp fs Bitmap Information Bode Posion Center X 60 Width gt Rectangle Information Left 60 Right 60 Top 733 Bottom 733 4d Db DN HX X Cancel Help The Bitmap Information form above will then be displayed The fol lowing can be edited from this form File Name This is the name of the bitmap file to display on the loca t
205. ed to generate an unlock code for the new computer Start WinLoG on the old PC and select the Transfer menu item from the Help menu The Transfer Regis tration form on the previous page will be displayed Enter the serial number of the new computer and then press the Transfer Registration button An unlock code for the new computer will be displayed Enter this unlock code in the Registration form on the new computer and then press the Store Unlock Code button After the Transfer Registration button has been pressed WinLoG on the old PC will be set to run in demo mode Using WinLoG This section explains how to interact with the various parts of the Win LoG program It discusses how to use the various toolbars and menus Starting WinLoG To begin working with WinLoG after you have installed the program start it by double clicking on the WinLoG icon in the WinLoG applica tion group When you first start the program a form will be displayed as shown on the next page After selecting an option and completing any additional forms the main WinLoG screen will be displayed The main window of the WinLoG program consists of a title bar menu bar optional toolbars and desktop In addition popup menus can be displayed by clicking the right mouse button This section explains how to interact with the various parts of the WinLoG program WinLoG User s Guide Using WinLoG What Would You Like To Do Start a new project Open t
206. een button on the form so that we can proceed to selecting a tem plate to customize What Would You Like To Do Do not show this screen again WinLoG User s Guide 31 Tutorial To make it easier to customize the template the Template toolbar should be turned on if it is not currently displayed If the Show Tem plate Toolbar option in the View menu 1s not checked click on the option to display the toolbar If the Template toolbar 1s displayed in collapsed mode as shown below then click on the TEM to expand the toolbar la Click to expand to Eossuss eon t Selecting a Template To select a template to customize press the Open template button on the Template toolbar The Open Template form below will be displayed Select the Tutorial template and then press the Ok button Open Template Templates Environmental YOC Concentrations Environmental Well Geophysical 2 Logs Geophysical 3 Loge Geophysical 3 Logs Legal Geotechnical Basic ical Core Log Core Log Legal PENN DOT Rock Core US Military well well installation A 4 Pb Pl x Cancel 7 Help 32 WinLoG User s Guide Changing Header Titles The tutorial template shown below should then be displayed iy WinkoG Template Tutorial ORE Edt View window Help le xi Hog gla ei oe a Aaaa m la a oe AZ Wss EEEN SE er Ee 25 4 de OF Pe o 2490 Bo m Projest No GAEA Sof
207. eft mouse button at the upper left corner of the ellipse Move the mouse to the lower right corner of the ellipse and release the mouse button The Foreground button is used to set the foreground color of the symbol This will be the default color of the symbol when it is used in a log The color can also be changed for an individual layer in a log during the editing of the log Y Foreground gt Foreg The Background button is used to set the back ground color of the symbol This will be the default color of the symbol when it is used in a log The color can also be changed for an individual layer in a log during the editing of the log Background WinLoG User s Guide New In version 4 the foreground and background colors of the symbol can be set in the library These are the default colors for the symbols The colors used in the log can be either these colors or changed within the log 405 406 Symbol Libraries El Saving a Symbol Library To save a library after it has been edited either select the Save Library menu item of the Symbol Libraries submenu of the File menu or press the Save button on the library toolbar Deleting a Symbol Library To delete a library select the Delete Library menu item from the Libraries submenu of the File Menu The Delete Libraries form below will be displayed Delete Libranes Library Names Common Symbols Igneous and Metamorphic Rocks Sands an
208. egend If the Page Size is Custom the units can be set to either inches or mil limeters Custom Width If the page size is specified as custom the page horizontal width in inches must be specified Custom Length If the page size is specified as custom the page vertical length in inches must be specified Orientation This is the orientation of the page either portrait longer side 1s vertical or landscape longer side is horizontal When this template is saved the Enter Template Name form below will be displayed This form shows the current templates in the database To save the template enter a unique name for the new template and press the Ok button Enter Template Name E Existing Templates Army Corps of Engineers Drilling Log Legal Army Corps of Engineers Drilling Log Letter Army Corps of Engineers H TW Drilling Log British Standard BS 5390 Core Log British Standard BS 5930 Borehole Log British Standard BS 5930 Boring Log British Standard BS 5930 Core Boring Log CompletedT utorial Default INT Template Environmental CMT Environmental Monitoring Well Environmental OYA and well Environmental Three Graphs Unique Template Mame Default LogPlot Template x Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide 121 122 Projects Choose From List Option If previously the Choose From List option was selected the Open Tem plate form below will be displayed after the LogPlot f
209. el T Help The following information can be entered and edited using this form Text This is the text for the paragraph There 1s no limit to the length of the text The Rich Text toolbar at the top of the form is used to for mat the text This toolbar is described below Left This is the position of the left border of the paragraph in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Right This is the position of the right border of the paragraph in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page WinLoG User s Guide Paragraphs Top This is the position of the top border of the paragraph in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Paragraph button on the toolbar is used to create the paragraph this position will be filled in by the program Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the paragraph in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Paragraph button on the toolbar is used to create the paragraph this position will be filled in by the program Background Color This is the background color of the paragraph text box When the Background Color button is pressed a Color form is displayed Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color can be specified Frame Select yes to display a frame around the paragraph text Frame Width This is the line width of the frame around the paragraph text
210. elect Directory button to the right Templates The default directory to use when importing or exporting templates To change the directory specify the directory name in the input line or press the Select Directory button to the right Pocket Data The directory is used to exchange data with Pocket Win LoG WinFence This is the name and path of the WinFence program on your computer The WinFence program will be started when a cross section on the location map is double clicked Preferences Fage Directories Other Location Map Deviation Survey Auto Backup Skip Intro Screen Status Bar Iv Activate Undo Pixel Width for Picking Objects E Template Access Default Litholagic Library Common symbols Default Template Default Well Diameter Default Well Pipe Diameter 2 Dictionary English Auto Replace AutoUpdates Automatic Updates On Interval f eek X Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide Setting Program Preferences Other Tab The Other tab shown on the previous page is used to specify the follow ing parameters Skip Introduction Screen Check to not show the Introduction screen when the program is started This is the screen that lets you chose to open a new project and existing project or the last project Show Status Bar Check to show a status bar at the bottom of the desk top Pixel Width for Picking Objects This controls how close the cursor has to be to an object
211. en entering layers the top layer should be entered first Tutorial Adding the Lithology Next the descriptions for each lithologic layer can be entered The lithology consisted of 2 5 feet of sand and gravel underlain by 9 5 feet of silty clay underlain by sand To enter the lithologic layers click on the Description column with the left mouse button To add a new layer click on the Add button on the Lithologic Layer form below Description Symbol T Times New Roman fio jm B Z U A as Ze BREE hamme T itle Sand and Gravel Fill Top Depth jo Loose heterogeneous medium to fine sand with totad Bottom Depth inch sub angular gravel kN Top Line Style m Horizontal Alignmen Vertical Alignmern Je ela 4d Pb NH X x Cancel 7 Help 4 After the Add button has been pressed enter the following infor mation for the first layer Name Title Sand and Gravel Fill Description Loose heterogeneous medium to fine sand with to inch sub angular gravel To set the text to italics select the text and then press the Italics button Top Depth 0 Horizontal Alignment Left 50 WinLoG User s Guide Adding the Lithology Next click on the Symbol tab at the top of the form to select a litho logic symbol for the layer The tab shown below will be displayed Select the USCS Symbols library and the second symbol Lithology Description Symbol Library Juscs Symbols
212. ength of the interval in the same units as the top depth Diameter This is the diameter of the pipe or screen in the same units as the Well Diameter The pipe diameter will be used to scale the size of the pipe in the column depending upon the well diameter that was pre viously entered It is possible to have more than one size of pipe in the monitoring well and to use the reducing and enlarging fittings to switch between pipe diameters Symbol This is the symbol to use for the pipe or screen One of the 8 symbols shown can be selected by clicking on it with the mouse Fitting Data Tab Well well Water amp Well Data Interval amp Pipe Data Fitting Data Packing Data Top Depth 2 Interval Length fi 0 Top Fitting sem TiN ene Bottom Fitting tx UVH B U ba HAP WH XK x Cancel 7 Help The following information can be entered and edited using this tab Top Depth This is the top depth of the well interval layer in the same units as set in the template The bottom depth will be the top depth plus the interval length WinLoG User s Guide 193 Borehole Logs Interval Length This is the length of the interval in the same units as the top depth Diameter This is the diameter of the pipe or screen in the same units as the Well Diameter The pipe diameter will be used to scale the size of the pipe in the column depending upon the well diameter that was pre viously entered It is po
213. entage of each lithology type that shows up in the borehole cuttings E g 50 Sand 25 Silt 25 Shale The total percentage of all lithologies must be less than or equal to 100 WinLoG User s Guide Core Photo Data Core Photo Data Core photo columns are used to display photos taken of cores at differ ent depths or can be used to display photos taken inside the borehole itself The photos can be in either BMP or JPEG format and should be tied to a particular depth in the borehole To add or edit the core photo data select the Core Photos menu item from the Edit menu or click the left mouse button inside the Core Pho tos column The Edit Core Photo Column form below will be dis played iol x Start End Graphic File CNM uF ileswrnzieve bmp as x Cancel 7 Help Using this form you can specify the start and end depths and file names of the core photos When the Graphic File column is clicked on a but ton will be displayed Press this button to select the file containing the core photo WinLoG User s Guide 243 Borehole Logs 244 WinLoG User s Guide Paragraphs Paragraphs Floating paragraph text boxes can be added anywhere on a borehole log These text boxes are displayed over top of any information on the borehole log There is no limit to the number of paragraph text boxes that can be displayed These boxes can overlap boundaries between the header footer and columns Paragraph text boxe
214. eports Graph reports are used to summarize graph data for the boreholes in a project To generate a graph report select the Graph Report menu item from the Reports menu The Graph Report Form below will be dis played Pa Graph Report ioj x Report All Grap raph Typel Graph to Report Borehole lO Graph Name E102 LEL Fields to report Elevation Graph Mame LEL Depth Braden En Print Ep Export x Benel Help Using this form select the Graph from the list box of currently avail able Graphs The user can then select to report the following fields for the report 1 Borehole Number 2 X Coordinate 3 Y Coordinate 4 Elevation 5 Graph Name 6 Depth 7 End Depth 8 Value For a detailed explanation of the Print Preview and Export buttons refer to the General Reports section WinLoG User s Guide 423 Reports Geophysics Reports Geophysics reports are used to summarize geophysical data for the boreholes in a project To generate a geophysics report select the Geo physics Report menu item from the Reports menu The Geophysics Report Form below will be displayed mn Geophysics Report _ o x Report All Grap Graph Type Graph to Report Borehole IO 0101 Gamma Fields to report Log Mame Bulk Density Elevation Graph Name Gamma Depth f Recicthite be End Depth Value Syste E Print Em Export x Sane Help The user first sele
215. ers Custom Width If the page size is specified as custom the page hori zontal width in inches must be specified Custom Length If the page size is specified as custom the page ver tical length in inches must be specified Orientation This is the orientation of the page either portrait longer side 1s vertical or landscape longer side is horizontal After the Ok button is pressed on the New Legend form the Enter Leg end Name form below will be displayed Enter a unique name for the new legend and press Ok Enter Legend Name Existing Legends British USCS Unique Legend Name y k x Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide 363 364 Legends i Editing a Legend To enter or edit data in a legend the legend must first be created as described above or an existing legend opened Existing legends can be opened for editing by selecting the Open Legend menu item of the Leg ends sub menu of the File menu or clicking the Open button on the Legend Toolbar After the legend has been opened and displayed the legend can be entered and edited as described in the sections below Titles and Layout The titles in the legend and page layout can be changed by selecting the Titles menu item from the Edit menu or click the left mouse button on one of the titles in the legend Titles Tab Titles amp Layout Titles Layout Symbol Legend Sits and Clays Library Silts and Clays x C
216. es WinLoG User s Guide General Reports Step 1 Select the file type to export the report to x Step 7 of 3 This wizard allows vou to specify details of how to export your data Which export format would you like Table type Parados file db C QuattroPro file wal C DBase file dbf C SQL script file sql Test file txt CML file srl HTML file htm MS Access database mdb Excel spreadsheet xls MS Windows clipboard Excel file xls Rich Test format rtf word file doc C SPSS format sav C SYLKE Symbolic Link lk C Adobe Acrobat Document pdf DIF Data Interchange Format dif LDAP DatalnterchangeFormat Idif Lotus 1 2 3 file wk 1 Step 2 Chooses the File origin from either windows or ms dos It also allows you to choose to include the column titles and insert a blank row after the column titles x Step 2 of 8 File Origin ANSI Windows P Selected records only add a blank row after field names _ Blank if zera Specifications ii lt Back gt gt Cancel WinLoG User s Guide 415 Reports Step 3 Clicking the Specifications button allows the user to load a previous export specification scheme or it also allows the user to save the current export specification scheme Specifications 8 List of available specifications x Load La epechcaloni cecunonnennrneenneenerereronel
217. ess the Open button Open GTGS File Look in Locs T ei Er 2 x ENVTECH2 LOG ria TTE A OTE ENVTECH3 LOG ENVTECH4 LOG E ENVTECHS LOG E ENVTECH6 LOG E ENVTECH7 LOG GEOPHY2 LOG GEOPHY LOG E GEOTECH1 LOG 2 GEOTECH2 LOG 2 GEOTECH3 LOG 2 GEOTECH4 LOG 2 Mw1 log EJ Mw8 log 2 TUTORIAL LOG UTILITY1 LOG 2 WATER1 LOG File name Files of type tog Cancel ZA After the GTGS file has been selected the Select GIGS Template form on the next page will be displayed This form allows the user to select the template they would like to use to display the GTGS data There are two options 1 Create Generic Template The user can select to have WinLoG create a default template for them that is based on the imported GTGS file 2 Use Existing Template The user can select to use an existing template that they can choose from the list of WinLoG s available templates WinLoG User s Guide 123 124 Projects PY select GTGS Template _ ME Lag Template f Create Generic Template f Use Existing Template Import Descriptions i As Layers C As Test x Cancel Help In addition the user has the option to Import Descriptions as Layers or as Text Create Generic Template Option If the user selects Create Generic Template option then the Create Generic GTGS Template form below will be displayed Mi create Generic GTGS Templa
218. etween 0 and 360 degrees to draw the deviation survey profile Northing Azimuth Radio Button If the user selects the profile type as Northing Azimuth then this radio button is enabled and the user can select any of the eight Northings list to draw the deviation survey pro file Profile Title This is the title to use for the Deviation Survey Column up to 255 characters The title will be displayed in the same area as the Column Title It 1s recommended that either the Profile Title or Col umn Title be used and not both Units Title This 1s the units of the Deviation Survey up to 255 char acters The unit title will be displayed below the Profile title The following information can be specified on the Line Style Point Type tab shown on the next page Minimum This is the minimum value for the horizontal axis of the profile If the value is zero the program will calculate the minimum value based on the data specified WinLoG User s Guide 325 326 Templates Mi Deviation Survey Column Form E x Profile Direction Layout Line Style Point Type Grid Scales Points Show Grid Minimum E Type Triangle C Mao fe Yes bl asiman 100 Size o Horizontal Spacing E Increment ja Color a Vertical Spacing E a eo Label Points 7 C No fe Yes Line Style ees Connecting Emme Decimal Digits 0 Line Style SORS a Cancel Help Maximum This is the maximum value fo
219. f these tasks is performed the New Project form below will be displayed New Project Project ID Tutorial Project Mame Tutorial Directory C PROGRA I GAEABeta database Tutorial 0000000000 Client FO Location PO Reference Gri ProjectDAFle fe W OK X Cancel 7 Help The following information can be entered for the project Project ID A unique project number up to 100 characters The name cannot contain any of the following characters amp Project Name The name of the project up to 255 characters WinLoG User s Guide Tip If a project was previously cre ated in another application like WinFence or WinSieve there is no need to create it in WinLoG It can be opened as an existing project instead 63 Tip It is recommended that each pro ject reside in a separate directory usually the same as the project ID Typically this directory is named after the Project Id or Name This provides an efficient method to organizing your pro jects on a network or local com puter Tip In version 4 you can now enter a AutoCAD DXF file that contains a map of the surface features and boundaries If a DXF file is speci fied you will have the option to use the minimum and maximum grid values from the file The DXF will then be overlain on top of the location map of the project 64 Projects Client The optional name of the client for the project up to 255 char
220. feet or metres Output Units The user can select to have the output units as either feet or metres Scaling Factor The user can select either to scale the template Log as either Depth Page or by using a depth scale Depth Page If the Scaling Factor is Depth Page then the Depth Page field will be displayed This value scales the template log as a number of metres per page For example if this value is 20 then there will be 20 metres per page on the log right WinLoG User s Guide 109 110 Projects 1to _ If the Scaling Factor is Depth Scale then the 1 to field will be displayed This would allow the depth scale to lm on screen is equal to metres in real life GINT Default Template Format p X Size Letter fe ie Width 8 5 Length 11 Orientation te Portrait C Landscape XC Cancel Help Page Setup Tab The following information can be entered on the Page Setup tab Size This is the page size of the template When the arrow at the right is pressed a list of available page sizes is displayed Inches or Millimeters The units for the width and length of the page These units will be used when specifying the layout of the legend If the Page Size is Custom the units can be set to either inches or mil limeters Custom Width If the page size is specified as custom the page horizontal width in inches must be specified Custom Length If the page size is specified as cu
221. formation can be entered and edited using the Headers tab shown above Table Headers Headers can be entered for each fixed column and row in the table In this example there is one fixed column and one fixed row thus we can enter the headers for the 5 columns and 5 rows as shown to the Right Text Justification The text in the table can be justified left center or right WinLoG User s Guide Tables Vertical Alignment The vertical alignment of the table text can be top center or bottom Label Font The Label Font button lets the user set the font type of the column and row headers Pl add Table Form E O x Setup Headers Cell Widths Fg 2 Setup Fg 2 Headers Pg 2 Cell widths ROWS COLUMNS Column Aw idth Row Aw idth Column 1 Column 2 Column 4 Column 5 Total Row Width 100 00004 Total Col Width 100 0000 y DE x Cancel Help Cell Widths Tab or Pg 2 Cell Widths Tab The following information can be entered and edited using this tab shown above Column Widths Column width is the width of a individual column as a percentage of the total table width The value should add up to 100 Row Widths Row width is the width of a individual row as a percent age of the total table height The value should add up to 100 WinLoG User s Guide 349 350 Templates Sizing a Table The size of the table can be changed using the Edit Table form above or by using the m
222. from the Projects submenu of the File menu This will open the Change Password form Current Password pO New Password ee Contirm New Password Lin y OF x Cancel Help There are three editable fields on this form Current Password The current password of the project If the project doesn t currently have a password then leave this blank New Password The new password of the project If you want to remove the old password then set this to blank Confirm New Password The new password again of the project If you want to remove the old password then set this to blank Opening a Password Locked Project To open a project that has been password locked simply follow the same procedure as a user would normally follow to open a project This will open up the Password form if the project is password locked oth erwise the project will open normally If the project is password locked enter the password in the Password Text Box and click OK Ifthe user enters the correct password they will be permitted to open the project otherwise the project will not open for them WinLoG User s Guide Printing a Project Printing a Project One or more of the borehole logs in a project can be printed by either selecting the Print menu item from the File menu or pressing the Print button on the Project toolbar After the Print button or menu item has been pressed the Print Bore hole Logs form on the next page will be di
223. ft corner of the rectangle Then while holding down the left mouse button drag the cur sor to the lower right corner of the rectangle and release the mouse but ton The Edit Rectangle form described in the next section will then be displayed 2 By selecting the Rectangles menu item from the Edit menu or Popup menu and then clicking on the Add button on the form The Edit Rec tangles form described in the next section will then be displayed Using this method the location of the rectangle must be specified on the form WinLoG User s Guide Rectangles Editing a Rectangle Existing rectangles can be edited by selecting the Rectangles menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mouse button inside the rec tangle on the template After performing one of the above tasks the Edit Rectangle form on the next page will be displayed If the template has two pages the Edit Rectangles form will have two tabs as shown below The first tab 1s for rectangles on the first page and the second tab is for rectangles on the second page The data entry for both tabs is identical Edit Rectangles Bord ll Line Style Right 0 4 y Fill Color oOo de Top LEE PH HX Bottom x Cancel Help The following information can be entered and edited using this form Left This is the position of the left border of the rectangle in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Rectangle button on the toolba
224. g Tip To make it easier to enter the bore hole data the Borehole Log tool bar should be turned on if it is not currently displayed If the Show Borehole Log Toolbar option in the View menu is not checked click on the option to display the To create a new borehole log and store it 1n this project click on the New button on the Borehole Log toolbar or the Location Map toolbar Then click on the position on the location map for the borehole Next the Select Template form below will be displayed Select the Com pleted Tutorial template and press the Ok button Select Template toolbar If the Borehole Loge tool bar is displayed in collapsed mode as shown below then click on the LOG button to expand the tool bar 46 Templates albian_mike albian rew Completed Tutorial Environmental Three Graphs Environmental Two Graphs Environmental YOC and Well Environmental YOC Concentrations Environmental Well Geophysical Logs Geophysical 3 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs Legal Geotechnical Basic Geotechnical Core Log Geotechnical Core Log Legal Geotechnical PENN DOT Geotechnical Rock Core Geotechnical US Military Geotechnical Well Oil Sands 44 gt i x Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide Adding General Borehole Data If the Customizing Template section above has not been completed this template will not appear in the list This template is required to enter the data in the sectio
225. g this method the location of the bitmap must be specified on the form as described below Open Laak in E Bitmaps El Al ex 1 88x46 L Bottom bmp Britishl1 bmp hee Bottom bmp fet British 2 bop fee Bottom bmp el British 3 bmp hee Bottom bmp hee British 4 bop hee British bmp t British 5 bmp hee British 0 bop fe British 6 bap File name Jacme bmp Files of type All oif bmp ico emf wmf Cancel WinLoG User s Guide Bitmaps Editing a Bitmap Existing Bitmaps can be edited by selecting the Bitmaps menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mouse button inside the Bitmap of the template After performing one of the above tasks the Bitmap Informa tion form below will be displayed If the template has two pages the Bitmap form will have two tabs as shown below The first tab 1s for bitmaps on the first page and the sec ond tab is for bitmaps on the second page The data entry for both tabs is identical Sman i niormation File Hame C Program Files GAEANWinLoG Bitmaps acme bmp C Program Files GAEANWinLoG Bitmaps acme bmp Files GAE44 inLoG Bitmapssacme bmp fe Stretch Bitmap a No t Yez Width 188 Height 45 HA pW HX x Cancel 7 Help The following information can be entered and edited using this form File Name This is the name of the bitmap file to display on the tem plate To change the name of the file e
226. ge click on the first cell and then hold the left mouse button down while selecting the cells When the cell range has been selected click the right mouse button to return to the Import Excel Project Data form The selected cell range will be filled in on the form After all of the cell ranges have been specified the Save Script button will save a script file that maybe used at a later point to import Excel project data that is in the exact same format Click on the OK Button to add the data to the project database If no cell range is specified then data for that Data Type will not be imported WinLoG User s Guide Importing Deviation Survey Data Importing Deviation Survey Data Winlog gives the user three choices when it comes to importing devia tion surveys 1 Import from an Excel spread sheet 2 Import from an LAS file 3 Import from an ASCII file To import a deviation survey select the Import Deviation Survey sub menu from the Edit menu Then select the file type to import either a Excel b LAS or c ASCII Importing a Excel Deviation Survey To import an Excel Deviation survey select the Excel File menu item from the Import Deviation Survey submenu This will open up the Import Excel Deviation Survey form below Import Excel Deviation Survey File Name gt x Cancel Help Then select the name of the Excel File you wish to import the deviation survey from After the Ok button has been pres
227. geophysical log can contain A column can contain either one or two geophysical logs which is set in the template for the log To display a geophysical log in a borehole log it the file containing the geophysical log must be imported After the file has been imported the geophysical data can be displayed and edited Any editing of the geo physical data will only affect the imported data and will not affect the original data in the geophysical file Importing Geophysical Data If no geophysical data has previously been imported for the column click on the geophysical column on the log to import data or select the Add Geophysical Log menu item from the Geophysical Data submenu If the Add Geophysical Log menu item is selected the form below will be displayed Enter the name of the geophysical log and press the Ok button Add Geophysical Log Mame x Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide 233 Borehole Logs The Import Geophysical Log form below will be displayed Select the file containing the geophysical log and then press the Open button Import Geophysical Log Ei Ed LokinfSlios A E Files of type Geophysical Log Cancel Once the file name has been specified the format of the geophysical log needs to be selected from the Geophysical File Type form shown below Several types of file formats are shown if the format of your log is not shown try to use the Generic ASCII format otherwise contact
228. gic Libraries Show Well Symbol amp None Common Symbols Igneous and Metamorphic Rocks Well Type 1 Sands and Gravelz sedimentary Rocks C Well Type 2 Silts and Clays USCS Symbols Well Materials British Symbols USGS Sedimentary 1 C Well Type 3 Show Sample Type Symbols Symbols Aow E Horz Size pixels 30 Vert Size Pixels 20 The following information can be entered on the Layout tab Lithologic Libraries The current lithologic libraries are displayed in a list To include a lithologic library in the legend select it from the list Show Well Symbols Select whether to show well symbols in the leg end Choose none Well Type 1 Well Type 2 or Well Type 3 WinLoG User s Guide 361 362 Legends Show Sample Symbols Check to show sample symbols in the legend Symbols Row This is the default number of symbols to draw per row The number can be changed later in the layout Horizontal Pixel Size This is the width to use when drawing the sym bols Vertical Pixel Size This is the height to use when drawing the sym bols Layout Page Setup Size Letter s nehes Er Milinetes Width EE Length i Orientation Portrait Landscape Page Setup Tab The following information can be entered on the Page Setup tab shown above Size This is the page size of the template When the arrow at the right is pressed a list of available page si
229. h of the page These units will be used when specifying the layout of the legend If the Page Size is Custom the units can be set to either inches or mil limeters Custom Width If the page size is specified as custom the page horizontal width in inches must be specified Custom Length If the page size is specified as custom the page vertical length in inches must be specified Orientation This is the orientation of the page either portrait longer side 1s vertical or landscape longer side is horizontal After the Ok button is pressed the new template will be displayed When this template is saved the Enter Template Name form below will be displayed This form shows the current templates in the database To save the template enter a unique name for the new template and press the Ok button Enter Template Name f Existing Templates Army Corps of Engineers Drilling Log Legal Army Corps of Engineers Drilling Log Letter Army Corps of Engineers H TW Drilling Log British Standard BS 5390 Core Log British Standard BS 5930 Borehole Log British Standard BS 5930 Boring Log British Standard BS 5930 Core Boring Log CompletedT utorial Environmental CMT Environmental Monitoring Well Environmental OWA and Well Environmental Three Graphs Environmental Two Graphs Unique Template Hame Default AGS Template x Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide Importing AGS Data Choose from
230. hanged by clicking on the Edit Name button at the bottom of the tab A new unique well name can then be entered in the Edit Well Name form Changing the name of the well dataset will affect whether the well is displayed in the borehole log For the well to be displayed the template must contain a well column with the same name Interval and Pipe Data Tab The Interval and Pipe Data tab shown on the next page is used to enter the intervals of riser and screen pipes WinLoG User s Guide 191 192 Borehole Logs well well Water amp well Data Interval amp Pipe Data Fitting Data Packing Data l Top Depth E Interval Length fi 0 Pipe amp Screen Selection Diermen E MOME j HAP MH as x Cancel 7 Help The buttons at the bottom of this tab and the Fitting Data and Packing Data tabs are used for the following ld The Start button displays the first interval d The Previous button displays the previous interval Pk The Next button displays the next interval P The End button displays the last interval The Insert button creates a new interval The Delete button deletes the interval The following information can be entered and edited using this tab Top Depth This is the top depth of the well interval layer in the same units as set in the template The bottom depth will be the top depth plus the interval length WinLoG User s Guide Well Data Interval Length This is the l
231. haracters Start Depth This is the start depth of the sample The depth should be specified in the same units as set in the template The start depth 1s the only field that must be specified for the sample all of the other informa tion is optional Length This is the length of the sample The length should be speci fied in the same units as set in the template Initially when a sample is created the default length set in the template is displayed Type This is the optional type of sample up to 255 characters WinLoG User s Guide 181 182 Borehole Logs Symbol This is an optional symbol used to represent the sample When this column is selected a button will be displayed for the sample sym bol After this button is pressed the Sample Symbol form below is dis played This form can be used to select the sample symbol foreground color and background color KL Sample Symbol OF x 5 Foreground Background Line Type This is the style of line that 1s used to draw the top and bot tom boundaries of the sample When this column 1s selected a button will be displayed for the line type After this button 1s pressed the Line Properties form below is displayed This form 1s used to set the line style thickness and color The line style can be set to none to display no line at the boundaries Line Properties Line Style Thickness Color Solid r Min Max A WinLoG User s Guide Sample D
232. he Delete Graph form below will be displayed Select the graph to be deleted and press the Ok button Delete Graph x Cancel Single Graphs If the graph type is single or the Edit or popup menus are used to edit a double graph the Graph form on the next page will be displayed The following information can be entered and edited using this form Depth This is the depth of the data point in the same units as set in the template Value This is the value of the data point in the same units as set in the template WinLoG User s Guide 225 226 Borehole Logs Graph Single Graph Single Graph Md bw X i Edt Name x Cancel 7 Help The buttons at the bottom of this form and the other graph data forms are used for the following F The Start button moves to the first data point q The Previous button moves to the previous data point p The Next button moves to the next data point p The End button moves to the last data point The Insert button creates a new data point x The Delete button deletes this data point WinLoG User s Guide Graph Data Double Graphs If the graph type is double and the graph is selected by clicking on the column the Graph form below will be displayed This form has two tabs one for each graph The data entry for the tabs is identical the data on the first tab 1s displayed for the first graph and likewise for the second tab Graph LEL and PPM M
233. he Edit menu or Popup menu and then clicking on the Add button on the form The Open form below will then be displayed Select the bitmap file and then press the Open button Using this method the location of the bitmap must be specified on the form as described below Open i Ed Look in a Bitmaps Zl el 185x46 l Bottom5 bmp British11 bmp Pe Bottom bmp ft British 2 bmp hee Bottom bmp hee British 3 bmp hee Bottom bmp fet British 4 bop fee British bmp fe British 5 bmp hee British bmp fe British 6 bop File name Jacme bmp Files of type All gif bmp ica emf wmf Cancel Editing a Bitmap Existing Bitmaps can be edited by selecting the Bitmaps menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mouse button inside the Bitmap After performing one of the above tasks the Bitmap Information form on the next page will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide Bitmaps ele koro File Mame C Program Files GAEANWinLoG Bitmaps acme bmp C Program Files GAEANWinLoG Bitmaps acme bmp Files G AE44 inLoG Bitmaps acme bmp fe Stretch Bitmap el No C Yez EE Width 188 Height 45 HA PW HX x Cancel 7 Help The buttons at the bottom of the this form are used for the following ld The Start button displays the first bitmap 4 The Previous button displays the previous bitmap bk The Next button displays the next bitmap P The End button displays the last bitma
234. he Pocket PC If you do not have this program or require the latest version it can be downloaded free from the Microsoft web site at http www microsoft com mobile pocketpc downloads activesync35 asp To have ActiveSync synchronize the files for Pocket WinLoG select the synchronize Files option in ActiveSync When you select the Files option a folder called Pocket PC My Documents is created on the desktop Where Pocket PC is the name of the ActiveSync partner ship that was specified when the Pocket PC was first connected to the desktop For more information on partnerships review the ActiveSync help When Pocket WinLoG is installed the data files are automatically stored in the Winlog subfolder of the My Documents folder on the Pocket PC When the synchronize Files option is turned on in ActiveSync this folder on the Pocket PC will be synchronized with the same folder on the desktop Any data entered in Pocket WinLoG will then be automatically copied to the desktop and any data exported from the desktop version of WinLoG templates symbol libraries and macros will be automatically copied to the Pocket PC In order to exchange data between the desktop version of WinLoG and Pocket WinLoG the Pocket WinLoG Directory in the desktop Win LoG program Preferences must be set to the Winlog subfolder of the Pocket PC My Documents folder used by ActiveSync WinLoG User s Guide Importing Data from
235. he Subscript button is used to toggle the subscript attribute of Z the selected text on and off The Left Justify button will left justify the selected text The Center Justify button will center justify the selected text The Right Justify button will right justify the selected text The Select All button will select all of the text in the memo field Mis 248 WinLoG User s Guide Paragraphs y The Cut button will remove the selected text and place it in the clipboard The Copy button will copy the selected text to the clipboard m A The Paste button will paste the text in the clipboard at the cur rent position of the cursor in the text field The Replace button will replace the specified text in the text B field The Symbol button will display a Symbol form This form is used to place a symbol at the current cursor position in the text field To select a symbol use the Font box to select the font containing the symbol and then select the desired symbol After the desired symbol has been selected press the Ok button to insert it into the text field The WinLoG program comes with a font called GAEA Symbols that contains a variety of well and other symbols T The Spell Check button will display a Spell Checker form and will check the spelling in the text field The dictionary used to check the spelling is set in the program Preferences see Chapter 3 When the Add button is pressed the w
236. he footer lines either left or right justified Color This is the background color for the footer block When the Color button is pressed the Color form will be displayed Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color specified Line Style This is the line style used to draw the border of the footer When the Line Style button is pressed the Line Properties form will be displayed This form can be used to set the line style color and width Template Font This is the font to use when drawing the titles of the footer When the Template Font button is pressed the Font form above will be displayed This form can be used to set the font name font size font style and color Log Font This is the font to use when drawing the borehole data of the footer When the Log Font button is pressed the Font form will be dis played This form can be used to set the font name font size font style and color WinLoG User s Guide Headers and Footers Left This 1s the position of the left border of the footer in inches or mil limeters from the left side of the page The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Right This is the position of the right border of the footer in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page Top This is the position of the top border of the footer in inches or mil limeters from the top of the page Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the footer in in
237. he last project Open an existing project F Skip this screen Do not show this screen again rs Menu Bar The menu bar contains the main level of commands It uses standard Windows pull down menus You can choose any menu item on any submenu that is not dimmed WinLoG will know when certain menu commands are not available and prevents you from choosing them The majority of these commands can also be selected using the speed buttons on the toolbars see below When the program is first started and no borehole or template are opened the File Report View Window and Help items will appear on the menu bar After a borehole or template 1s opened there will also be an Edit item on the menu bar File Menu This menu contains commands similar to those in other Windows appli cations and contains the following submenu Projects displays a submenu used to create open save delete close and import projects Borehole Logs displays a submenu used to create open save close and delete borehole logs WinLoG User s Guide Tip If you do not want the Startup form displayed every time you start the program click on the Do not show this screen again box at the bottom of the form This form can be turned back on using program preferences 9 Tip If a menu item contains an under lined letter it can be selected by holding down the Alt key and pressing that letter 10 Getting Started
238. he position of the bottom side of the section heading in inches or millimeters from the top of the page The buttons at the bottom of the Section Headings are used for the fol lowing lg The Start button moves to the first section heading d The Previous button moves to the previous section heading Pk The Next button moves to the next section heading 8 P The End button moves to the last section heading The Insert button creates a new section heading 5 The Delete button deletes this section heading WinLoG User s Guide 309 Templates Depth Column The depth column of the template can be customized to set the plot depth per page input units and depth axis format To customize the depth axis select the Depth column and click on the Customize button on the Columns tab Customize Depth Column Specify Default Depth Page Depth Scale DepthPage Em Input Unit Display Unita it Feet Metres i Feet C Metres Both Asis Locatio Left Side fe Right Side Major Tic Interval i Minor Tic Interval 0 2 Label PE Number of Digits after Decimal 0 X Cancel 7 Help The Customize Depth Column form displayed above can be used to set the following parameters Default Plot Depth Page or Depth Scale The plot depth or scale determines the number of feet or meters that is displayed on each bore hole log sheet This scale can be specified either as the depth to plot per page or the
239. he text The Center Justify button will center justify the text The Right Justify button will right justify the text jaj The Top align button will align the text with the top of the table cells WinLoG User s Guide Tables The Center align button will align the text in the center of the table cells The Bottom align button will the text with the bottom of the table cells The Label Font button lets the user set the font type of the column and row headers The Value Font button lets the user set the font type of the column and row values Mi add Table Form i Of x Setup Headers Cell Widths Pg 2 Setup Pg 2 Headers Pg 2 Cell widths ROWS COLUMNS Column Aw idth Row AW idth 20 000 How 2 20 0000 Total Row Width 100 00004 Total Col Width 100 00004 y ok XC Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide 265 266 Borehole Logs Cell Widths Tab The following information can be entered and edited using this tab Column Widths Column width is the width of a individual column as a percentage of the total table width The value should add up to 100 Row Widths Row width is the width of a individual row as a percent age of the total table height The value should add up to 100 The final table looks like the figure below Hole Sizing a Table The size of the table can be changed using the Edit Table form above or by using the mouse To ad
240. hen the Constituents form will be displayed for this column This form is identical to the Text Interval form A specially designed font is provided with the WinLoG program for use with this column The font is called GAEA Constituents and is shown below K Constituent Font D lt Calcite Calcite o G K M x LO Authentic Quartz S Ca itumen B iderite Carbonaceous debris C Y h A 6 _ 8 9 o a dd e nr a a a oo n E e E WinLoG User s Guide 221 Borehole Logs Members Data Members data is treated the same way as facies and text interval data The entry and editing of the data is the same as described above Mem bers columns can also be linked to text interval columns If the Mem bers column is not linked then the Members form will be displayed for this column This form is identical to the Text Interval form Key Structures Font Definition 3 Climbing ripples _ 4 Waveripples 7 wN Vague horizontal even parallel laminations c f Convolute laminae or bedding Convoluted and microfaulted Bifurcated churned contorted swirls Fault vertical O O O OOOO O Fault vertical Joint Rootlets or root casts Burrow Dyke like intrusion Trail Even parallel continuous Even parallel discontinuous Even non parallel continuous Even non parallel discontinuous Fault inclined Wavy parallel discontinuous Wavy parallel continu
241. his can be overridden in the log by specifying a depth scale here This feature allows you to change depth scales without changing the template To accept the default template depth scale specify the depth scale as zero when editing the log Elevation Tab Borehole log elevations are usually depending upon the template dis played in a column in the main block of the log If the elevation of the ground surface is entered the program will automatically calculate and draw the elevations of all the lithologic layer boundaries in this column or draw elevation tic marks depending upon the template The units used to enter the elevations must be the same as the input depth units of the template WinLoG User s Guide Lithology Depths amp Elevations Elevation 101 No Elevation Data x Cancel 7 Help The Elevation tab shown above is used to enter and edit the following information Elevation The elevation of the borehole at ground surface in the same units as specified in the template No Elevation Data If checked only the depths at each layer boundary will be shown Otherwise both the depth and elevation will be shown at each layer boundary Lithology Lithologic layers are used to indicate the subsurface strata encountered during drilling Boreholes can contain an unlimited number of litho logic layers A lithologic layer primarily consists of an optional title up to 255 characters description no li
242. hologic lay ers Core Log used to edit the core log data Sample Data used to edit the sample data Well Data displays a submenu that can be used to add delete or edit a well Remarks displays a submenu that can be used to add delete or edit a remark column Graph Data displays a submenu that can be used to add delete or edit a graph data Geophysical Data displays a submenu that can be used to add delete or edit the geophysical data Symbol Logs displays a submenu that can be used to add edit or delete symbol log data Save Close Print Borehole Data Depths amp Elevations Lithology Core Log Sample Data Well Data Remarks Graph Data Geophysical Data Symbol Logs Text Intervals Water Content Data Facies Constitutents Members Paragraph Text Bitmaps Lines Rectangles Tables Text Intervals displays a submenu that can be used to add edit or delete text interval data Water Content Data used to edit the water content data Facies used to edit facies data Constituents used to edit constituents data WinLoG User s Guide 17 18 Getting Started Members used to edit members data Paragraph Text used to edit paragraph text Bitmaps used to edit bitmaps Lines used to edit lines Rectangles used to edit rectangles Tables used to edit table data Template Popup Menu If a template is currently displayed on the desktop the Template P
243. hting it and clicking the OK button f Ok X Cancel Help The Print Location Map Button allows the user to print the project loca tion map Clicking the button opens up a standard print dialog that allows the user to select the print range and the number of copies More advanced print properties can be set by clicking print properties on the Properties button Most printers allow you to change things such as the Print Quality Paper Type Paper Size Paper Orientation Paper Color etc WinLoG User s Guide 73 74 Projects Line Tool The Line tool allows the user to place a line anywhere on the location map To use the Line tool select it by clicking on the Line tool button Then click and hold down the left mouse button at the first point of the line and drag the cursor across the screen to the end point of the line When the user is satisfied that they have the cursor over the appropriate end point they should release the mouse button Once this 1s done the program will open the Edit Line form for the user The user can then decide the orientation of the line the line style and they can tweak the start and end positions if they desire l Lines Orientation Arrow f Diagonal Arrowhead C Horizontal No ves Vertical Position f End f Start Arrowhead Size E Line Style Md Pb PH X MX Cancel Help The user can also add an arrow to the line at either the Start or End po
244. ic or custom color If Fill Area Under Curve is set to no this field will not appear Connecting Line Style The data points for the graph can be connected by a line To change the line style press the Line Style button A Line Properties form will be displayed This form can be used to select the line style width and color If the line style is set to none no line will connect the points Point Type The graph data can be shown as circles crosses squares squares triangles or inverted triangles To not show the data points select none If this is a Bargraph column the point type is set to none and this field will not appear Point Size This is the size of the data points If the Point Type is set to none this field will not appear WinLoG User s Guide 323 324 Templates Point Color This is the color of the data points To change the color press the Color button A Color form will be displayed This form can be used to select a basic color or a custom color If the Point Type is set to none this field will not appear Label Points The values of the data points can be drawn above each point If the data value is less than the minimum value the value will be shown with a lt symbol If the data value is greater than the maxi mum value the value will be shown with a gt symbol If the Point Type is set to none this field will not appear Decimal Digits When Label Points is turned on th
245. il and complexity Monitoring extraction injection and almost any other type of well can be displayed on the borehole log Well completion details and data can be displayed graphically in one or more columns of the borehole log The borehole log can contain an unlimited number of well columns In addition depending upon the type of well column the well may contain an unlimited number of casings and piezometers The style and input for monitoring wells has been changed significantly in this version of the WinLoG program These changes were made to allow for greater flexibility and accuracy in drawing and annotating wells In order to maintain compatibility with previous versions of the program three different types of monitoring well columns can be speci fied in a template Well Type 1 columns were first introduced in version 1 of the program and can be used for very simple well displays All of the well informa tion is represented by bitmaps which can be customized by the user This type of well column cannot be used for wells with multiple piezometers or varying casing diameters and cannot contain annota tion Well Type 2 columns were first introduced in version 2 of the program and can be used for more complicated well displays All of the cas ings screens and fittings are drawn to scale by the program This type of well column can be used for wells with varying casing and screen diameters but cannot contain multiple piezometers
246. ile has been selected The Open Template form allows the user to select a Template to use for importing the LogPlot file Select the template to use from the list and then press the Ok button Open Template k Templates Army Corps of Engineers Drilling Log Legal Army Corps of Engineers Drilling Log Letter Army Corps of Engineers HTW Drilling Log British Standard BS 5390 Core Log British Standard BS 5930 Borehole Log British Standard BS 5930 Boring Log British Standard BS 5930 Core Boring Log Environmental CMT Environmental Monitoring Well Environmental OWA and Well Environmental Three Graphs Environmental Two Graphs Environmental YOC and Well Environmental YOC Concentrations Environmental Well Flood Control Geophysical 2 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs 7 PN 4 4 Pb DP x Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide Importing GTGS Data Importing GTGS Data In version 4 of WinLoG you can now import GTGS data and tem plates Both version 3 and version 5 GTGS data can be imported Importing GTGS Version 3 Data Only log data can be imported from GTGS version 3 data the template will be created by WinLoG or can be selected from a list of existing templates To import GTGS version 3 data select the Version 3 menu item from the Import GTGS Data submenu of the Import submenu The Open GTGS File form below will then be displayed Select the file you wish to import and then pr
247. ill be used to scale and position the well components water levels and annotation within the column of Column Width This is the percentage of the width of the col umn to use for the hole The horizontal scale of the well column will then be set such that the hole diameter specified above is equal to this percentage of column width When setting the of Column Width space should be made on the sides of the hole for annotation WinLoG User s Guide 197 198 Borehole Logs Offset This is the percentage of the column width to offset the hole from the left side of the column This parameter is used to position the hole inside the column The sum of the Offset and of Column Width should always be less than or equal to 100 For example if the of Column Width is 70 and the Offset is 10 Then the left most 10 of the column would be used for annotation the next 70 of the col umn would contain the well components and the last 20 of the col umn would be used for annotation Seal Line Style This is the line style to use when drawing the edges around seal packing and bottom seal components When the Seal Line Style button is pressed a Line Properties form is displayed This form is used to set the line style thickness and color If the line style is set to None no lines will be drawn around the seals The name of the well dataset can be changed by clicking on the Edit Name button at the bottom of the tab A new uniqu
248. ill contain the cell ranges to import from the Excel spreadsheet This feature is useful when you have several Excel spreadsheets with the same format that are for different projects For example double click on the Borehole Number s select column This will display the spreadsheet in the Excel Spreadsheet form shown on the next page WinLoG User s Guide 275 276 Borehole Logs Pi Excel Spreadsheet ri ae ALE Poll Sl Hi vOs A B c D E F 12 13 ProjectNumber ExcellTest ExcellTest ExcellTest ExcellTest excl 14 BoreholeNumber 15 WellSymbol 85 85 85 85 85 16 X Coord 200 300 256 456 432 17 Coord 200 224 405 675 34E 18 Elevation 50 34 23 12 23 19 Depth 60 45 44 34 45 20 StartDepth 0 0 0 0 0 21 DepthPerPage 20 30 30 25 25 22 DepthUnits 0 0 0 0 0 23 ElevationUnits 0 0 0 0 0 24 Borehole ID BH1 BH2 BH3 BH4 BHE 25 Site ID RGD 1 RGD 2 RGD 3 RGD 4 RGI 26 Page 0 0 0 0 0 27 Project Red River Red River Red River Red River Rec 28 Location Winnipeg Winnipeg Winnipeg Winnipeg Wir 29 Address 400 Smith Street 400 Smith Street 400 Smith Street 400 Smith Street 40C 30 LUST Incident No 123 124 125 126 127 31 Project No 234 234 234 234 234 32 LTC Code RTY RTY RTY RTY RT 33 LPR Code YUO YUO YUO YUO YUC 34 Geologist Paul Sp Paul Sp Paul Sp Paul Sp Pat 35 Checked by Date Sept 1 2001 Sept 2 2001 Sept 2 2001 Sept 2 2001 Ser 2 To select the cell ran
249. ill then be imported into the master database and opened for editing on the screen If you do not wish to edit the legend use the Close button on the Legend toolbar Importing Version 3 and 4 Exchange Files Exchange files are used to transfer borehole logs templates libraries and legends between projects or to other companies Version 3 and 4 exchange files are very similar and the method to import them is identi cal The data in these files is stored as ASCII text in a similar format to version and 2 files After the data has been exported from another project it can then be imported into the current project Borehole Logs Before importing a borehole log exchange file the project where the exchange file is going to be stored must be opened To import a bore hole log that is stored in exchange file format select the Log menu item from either the Import Version 3 Data or Import Version 4 Data sub menus from the Import submenu of the Import Export Data submenu The Import Exchange Log File form below will be displayed Select the log file that you would like to import and then press the Open button All borehole log exchange files have the extension lg3 for version 3 files and lg4 for version 4 files Import Yersion 3 Exchange Log File EES kan fannie Helge Samples j BH208 lo a test lgd 008 193 la CP BM Ig 01 090 193 end of page bug lg3 an 01 127 lg3 Example Error Log lga 1239 M W 3D 1g3 verl 3 19
250. ine of the footer To edit the general borehole data and display the Borehole Data form on the next page either select the Borehole Data menu item from the Edit menu right click the mouse button and select the Borehole Data menu item from the popup menu or click the left mouse button inside the header or footer of the borehole log The Borehole Data form has three tabs that can be used to enter and edit general borehole data WinLoG User s Guide 159 160 Number and Location Tab Borehole Data Number and Location Data Memos Borehole Humber E dit a Coordinate 00 B CO well Symbol Coordinate jo y OF x Cancel Help The Number and Location tab can be used to edit the following infor mation underlined items are key fields used in the database and must be entered Borehole Number This is the unique borehole number up to 100 characters used to store the borehole data in the database Care should be taken in changing this number since it will affect how the data is stored To edit the borehole number click on the Edit button to the right of the input line A Enter Borehole Number form will be displayed showing the current boreholes in the project Enter a unique borehole number not currently in the list and then press the Ok button X Coordinate The X coordinate for the borehole location The units for the coordinates should be the same as the Y coordinate
251. ing of the project location map is controlled using the LOC toolbar on the right side of the map This toolbar has several buttons which are described in the following sections AA 4D 8 gt OF oO Ces amp amp B A North Arrow Tool The North Tool Button allows the user to place a North Arrow any where on the location map To use the North Arrow button click on the button and then click on the location where you would like the north arrow to appear Once you have clicked on the location map and released the mouse button the North Arrow form will be displayed Porth Arrow Form e O x North Arrow Information Lett 0 Right 245 Top 624 Bottom 696 N Rectangle Information i N HX 3 Cancel Help The following can be edited from this form Center X This is the horizontal position of the center of the north arrow in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the North Arrow button on the toolbar is used to create the north arrow the program will fill in the position otherwise the user will have to enter in the position WinLoG User s Guide Location Map Toolbar Center Y This is the vertical position of the center of the north arrow in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the North Arrow button on the toolbar is used to create the north arrow the program will fill in the position otherwise the user will have to enter in the position Width This is th
252. ing the keyword depth in the title For example the title Borehole Terminated at depth feet would be shown on the borehole log as Borehole Terminated at 30 feet for a 30 foot deep borehole If Show End of Borehole Title is set to no this field will not be displayed Title Alignment The alignment of the titles can be left justified cen tered or right justified Line Style This is the style of the line used to draw the ground surface and bottom of the borehole To change the line style press the Line Style button A Properties form will be displayed shown in the Columns section This form can be used to set the line style width and color WinLoG User s Guide 315 316 Templates Sample Columns The recovery column style and sample default parameters for the sam ple columns can be changed by selecting the column and using the Customize button on the Columns tab These columns include the Sam ple Number Type Symbol N Value Recovery Sample Lithologic Symbol and Other When the Customize button 1s pressed the Cus tomize Sample Columns form below will be displayed Customize Sample Columns Defaults Recovery Column Sample Length 2 Show As sample Type E C Numbers Shaded Box Alignment SMSS C Tap Center tf af Color Vertical Alignmen Bl le mj o Aese Ke Line Style x Cancel 7 Help z The Customize Sample Columns form can be used to set the following defaults
253. ion map To change the name of the file edit this name or click on the button to the right of the name If the button to the right 1s pressed an Open bitmap file form will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide Tip WinLoG requires bitmaps pic tures to be in Windows bitmap format BMP or JPEG Many common graphics programs can convert to this format 81 82 Projects Center X This is the horizontal position of the center of the bitmap in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the Bitmap button on the toolbar 1s used to create the bitmap the program will fill in the position otherwise the user will have to enter in the position Center Y This is the vertical position of the center of the Bitmap in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to create the Bitmap the program will fill in the posi tion otherwise the user will have to enter in the position Width This is the width of the bitmap in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to create the bitmap the program will fill in the position otherwise the user will have to enter in the position Height This is the height of the bitmap in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to create the Bitmap the program will fill in the position otherwise the user will have to enter in the position EN Zoom In
254. ions on the network This master project database is also used to store data such as symbol libraries and text macros that 1s common to all projects and applications The name of the project master database is gaeaprojects mdb The data base is stored in a directory specified by the user when the program 1s installed In addition to the master project database separate application master databases are used to store data that is common to all projects but specific to the application A WinLoG master database is used to store templates which can be accessed by all projects The name of this database is winlog mdb All of the application master databases are stored in the same directory as the master project database If the master databases are moved the Master Database Directory in the program pref erences must be changed to reflect the new directory Database Structure Master Database Directory Master Project Database WinLoG Master Database WinSieve Master Database WinFence Master Database WinLoG Project Database WinLoG Project Database WinFence Project Database WinSieve Project Database WinFence Project Database Project 1 Directory Project 2 Directory Database Structure The Master Project database consists of the following four tables Data Type FieldSize Key en ProjectName Integer Text Data Type LithologicLibraries ze Text Ee see 00 Name Text 255 Data Type Field
255. is form are used for the following The Start button displays the first rectangle h The Previous button displays the previous rectangle 4 The Next button displays the next rectangle p The End button displays the last rectangle d The Insert button adds a new rectangle The Delete button deletes this rectangle paf The following information can be entered and edited using this form Left This is the position of the left border of the rectangle in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Rectangle button on the toolbar is used to create the rectangle the program will fill in this posi tion The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Right This is the position of the right border of the rectangle in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Rectangle button on the toolbar is used to create the rectangle this position will be filled in by the program WinLoG User s Guide Rectangles Top This is the position of the top border of the rectangle in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Rectangle button on the toolbar is used to create the rectangle this position will be filled in by the program Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the rectangle in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Rectangle button on the toolbar is used to create the rectangle this position will be filled in by the program Line Sty
256. is is the number of digits to show after the decimal in the labels If Label Points is turned off this field is not displayed Deviation Survey Column The style of the Deviation Survey column can be changed by selecting the column and using the Customize button on the Columns tab When the Customize button is pressed the Deviation Survey Columns form below will be displayed PY Deviation Survey Column Form 0 x Profile Direction Layout Line Style Point Type Profile to Use for Plot f Maxinun Deviation Azimuth C Selected Azimuth Graph Deviation Survey Morth Azimuth e Nothing Azmu ois Northing Azimuth Morth Morth East F ix gt i East m m Titles 5 outhE ast South Southwest West C Marth West wf Ok MX Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide Deviation Survey Column The Deviation Survey Form can be used to set the following parameters on the Profile Direction Layout tab shown on the previous page Profile To Use for the Plot This is the profile type that is used to draw the Deviation Survey There are three choices 1 Maximum Deviation Azimuth 2 Selected Azimuth 3 Northing Azimuth Maximum Deviation Azimuth This is the azimuth of maximum bore hole deviation as calculated by WinLoG using the borehole Deviation survey data Selected Azimuth Field If the user selects the profile type as Selected Azimuth then this field 1s enabled and the user can select any Azimuth b
257. isplayed on the desktop the edit menu will con tain the following commands Titles amp Layout used to edit the titles and Titles amp Layout layout of the legend Lithology Symbols Lithologic Symbols used to edit the litho Well Symbols logic symbols of the legend Sample Symbols Well Symbols used to edit the well sym Paragraphs bols of the legend Bitmaps Sample Symbols used to edit the sample Lines symbols of the legend Rectangles Paragraph Text used to edit paragraph text in the borehole log Page Layout Bitmaps used to edit bitmaps in the bore hole log Lines used to edit lines in the borehole log Rectangles used to edit rectangles in the borehole log Page Layout used to edit the layout of the page Symbol Libraries If a lithologic symbol library is currently displayed on the desktop the edit menu will contain the following commands Lithologic Symbols used to edit the descriptions and symbols in the library Lithologic Symbols WinLoG User s Guide Tip Standard popup menus contain ing the cut copy and paste commands are available when entering data Urda Cut Copy Faste 13 14 Getting Started Report Menu This menu contains commands for displays various reports for the project The menu will not appear if there is no project open General Report displays a general report for the project General Report Lithology Report Lithology Report displ
258. it Angle 30 as Se Split Line Style kk k kk k E ei Hp ied RANN Ti n ikr ek Foreground cor a Background cool HA PW HX x Cancel 7 Help Most of the information in the Symbol 2 tab is entered the same way as described in the Symbol tab above except for the parameters below WinLoG User s Guide Lithology Split This is used to specify the percentage of the layer that is split between the two symbols A 50 split would give create a layer using the left half of the symbol from the first symbol tab and the right half using the symbol from this tab A 25 split would create a layer using a quarter of this symbol and three quarters of the symbol from the other tab Split Angle This is used to specify the angle of the split between the first and second symbols An angle of 90 degrees will show the sym bols splitting vertically Split Line Style This is used to specify the line style of the line between the two symbols When the Split Line Style button is pressed a Line Properties form is displayed Adjusting the Layer Depth After a lithologic layer has been entered and the borehole log 1s dis played the top depth of the layer can be adjusted using the mouse Moving the cursor over the line at the top of lithologic layer then while holding down the left mouse button drag the top line of the layer to the desired depth WinLoG User s Guide 179 180 Borehole Logs
259. ither select the Company menu item from the Edit menu or click the left mouse button inside the company information of the template Company Information Company Info T Arial fio m BZ ae Background Color ACME Consulting Limited 44 Canadian Oaks Drive Border Whitby Ontario 1 57 Right Top Bottom This form can be used to show the following information Company Info This is the text to use for the company name and address To not show any company information keep this area blank There 1s no limit to the size of the company information and the infor mation can contain rich text WinLoG User s Guide 331 332 Templates Left This is the position of the left border of the company information in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Right This is the position of the right border of the company infor mation in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page Top This is the position of the top border of the company information in inches or millimeters from the top of the page Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the company information in inches or millimeters from the bottom of the page Paragraphs Floating paragraph text boxes can be added anywhere on a template These text boxes are displayed over top of any information on the tem plate There is no limit to the number of paragraph
260. ity e Wells can be drawn by selecting from a variety of seals packing material casings screens covers caps reducers tubing sampling ports etc WinLoG User s Guide Template Features e Well completion details are drawn in vector mode to scale e Wells can contain multiple casings and screens e The diameters of the pipes and screens can be varied with depth e Horizontal and vertical text annotation can be added to the sides of the well to show completion details and other information e Annotation can be connected to well components using three different arrow styles e Multiple water levels can be annotated within wells Graphs e An unlimited number of graphs can be added to the borehole log e Each graph can contain an unlimited number of data points e Graphs can be crosseplotted with lithology e Graphs can be combined to form double graphs e Graph data can be shown as bar charts lines data points or filled curves e Horizontal axis can be plotted in log or linear scale e Graph can contain a grid and point labels Text Columns e An unlimited number of text columns can be added to a borehole log e Each text column can contain an unlimited number of text comments e Text comments can contain rich text symbols and lines Geophysical Data e An unlimited number of geophysical logs can be imported into a bore hole log e A wide variety of standard formats are supported e Geophysical logs can
261. ize a tem plate create a project and enter a borehole log It can be used to gain a quick idea of how to use the WinLoG pro gram for your own projects The tutorial first describes how to create a customized template that will be used later to create the borehole log The following topics are discussed 1 Selecting a template to be customized 2 Changing header titles 3 Changing the company name 4 Adding a company logo 5 Customizing the depth column 6 Customizing the graph column 7 Deleting a column 8 Customizing the well column After the template has been customized the tutorial describes how to 1 Create a new project 2 Create a new borehole log 3 Add borehole information 4 Save the borehole log 5 Print the borehole log 6 Copy the borehole log Customizing a Template It is recommended that while you read this tutorial you perform the actual procedures discussed using the WinLoG program The program is supplied with the template Tutorial referred to in this chapter The purpose of this tutorial is to provide you with a quick understand ing of how to use the program For detailed information on projects borehole logs and templates see Chapters 3 4 and 5 Customizing a Template When the program 1s first started the Startup form shown below will be displayed Since templates do not belong to any one project we do not need to open a project to customize a template Select the Skip this Scr
262. just the size using the mouse follow the pro cedure below 1 Position the cursor at the boundary of the Table The cursor should change to a set of arrows and the Status line should display Edit Size of Table The orientation of the arrows will indicate the direction that the boundary can be changed WinLoG User s Guide Tables 2 Press and hold the left mouse button down and drag the boundary to its new position 3 While dragging the boundary a rectangle will be displayed showing its current location 4 When the boundary is in the desired location release the left mouse button Moving a Table The position of the table can be changed using the Edit Table form above or by using the mouse To adjust the size using the mouse follow the procedure below 1 Position the cursor at the center of the Table The cursor should change to an arrow with a box and the Status line should display Move Table 2 Press and hold the left mouse button down and drag the boundary to its new position 3 While dragging the boundary a rectangle will be displayed showing its current location 4 When the boundary is in the desired location release the left mouse button WinLoG User s Guide 267 268 Borehole Logs Deviation Survey Data A new feature added to Winlog Version 4 1s the ability to represent deviated boreholes What is a deviated borehole Boreholes are designed to obtain information in th
263. l M Cancel Help Deviation Survey Tab A new feature added to Winlog Version 4 1s the ability to represent deviated boreholes The Deviation Survey tab shown above is used to specify the following parameters Well Deviation Calculation to Use This is used to select the calcula tion for the deviation survey Winlog provides five different calcula tions from which to calculate borehole X Y and Z coordinates based on a deviation survey which includes the measured depth inclination angle and the azimuth angle WinLoG User s Guide Setting Program Preferences Preferences Page Directories Other Location Map Deviation Survey Auto Backup lv Back Up Project Databases fio minutes le Back Up Project List Database fio minutes lv Back Up Main Database I 0 minutes Auto Backup Tab The Auto Backup tab shown above is used to specify the following parameters Back Up Project Database If this checkbox is checked then the cur rently open project will be backed up at a regular interval defined by the combobox to the right of it If this checkbox is not selected then the currently open project will not be backed up Back Up Project List Database _If this checkbox is checked then the WinLoG project list database will be backed up at a regular interval defined by the combobox to the right of it If this checkbox is not selected then the WinLoG project list database will not be backed up Back Up Main Database
264. l Three Graph Environmental Two Graphs Environmental YOC and well Environmental YOC Concentrations Environmental Well Geophysical 2 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs Legal Geotechnical Basic Geotechnical Core Log Geotechnical Core Log Legal Geotechnical PENN DOT Geotechnical Rock Core Geotechnical US Military Geotechnical Well Oil Sands P 1 Std ct teste 4 4 gt gt x Cancel 7 Help After selecting the desired template press the Ok button and the Bore hole Data form on the next page will be displayed The primary pur pose of this form is to enter the unique Borehole Number and other general borehole data After a unique Borehole Number and any other information has been entered press the Ok button and the new log will be displayed For a complete description on how to use the Borehole Data form see the section on entering and editing General Borehole Data below WinLoG User s Guide 157 158 Borehole Logs Borehole Data Number and Location Data Memos Edit Borehole Number ee Coordinate 0 B CO well Symbol Coordinate jo t Entering and Editing Borehole Data To enter or edit data in a borehole log the log must first be created as described above or an existing log opened Borehole logs in the current project can be opened for editing by selecting the Open Borehole Log menu item of the Borehole Log
265. l Materials Sedimentary Hocks USGS Glacial USGS Igneous USGS Metamorphic USGS Miscellaneous USGS Miscellaneous 1 USGS Miscellaneous 2 USGS Sedimentary USGS Sedimentary 1 USGS Sedimentary 2 USGS Sedimentary 3 USGS Sedimentary 4 USGS Sedimentary 5 USGS Surficial Creating and Editing Lithologic Macros Lithology macros are used to insert previously defined text and sym bols into lithologic layers By using lithology macros borehole logs can be created faster and more consistently For a description on how to insert a lithology macro in a layer see Chapter 4 An unlimited number of lithology macros can be stored in the WinLoG program To create and edit lithology macros select the Lithology Macros menu item from the File menu The Lithology Macros form on the next page will be displayed The following information can be entered on this form Name This is the name of the lithology macro up to 100 characters The name is used only for selection purposes and will not be inserted into the layer WinLoG User s Guide Creating and Editing Lithology Macros Lithologie Macros Symbal fa h Well graded gravels gravel zand mixtures little or no fines Siltclay laminated to massive Fine laminated sand silt mud Silk Clay laminated to massive Gravel matris supported ze Gravel massive zel Gravel s bedded Ek hai Gravel trough bedded EE ite Gravel planer x bedded ae
266. largest field provides periodic information about the data being edited or additional information on the current command or menu item e The next field displays the status of the current file whether it has been saved or modified e The next field displays the sheet number of the borehole log being cur rently displayed 28 WinLoG User s Guide Tutorial l WinLoG Project Tutorial Project Borehole 101 Uk File Edit View Window Help Bess Seon ocm uals 2 B Am 4 4 Ee kn gt i TIE bossa s sleoo et ty Bevo Pose a Project No 2000 Borehole Number 101 Taf 4 a OO Project Tutorial Client Site Location SUBSURFACE PROFILE SAMPLE Symbol S A Description a D A i Ground Surface bq Sand and Gravel Fill 1 Loose heterogeneous J medium to fine sand with 4 72to inch sub angular Silty Clay Mottled brown and grey silty clay with embedded b WwW ha D LU EL PD A Edit Well Data Enclosure 1 Geologist Your Name Modified Sheet 1 of 1 ACME Consulting Company 44 Canadian Oaks Drive Whitby Ontario Well Completion Details Aboveground Cover Tutorial Before using the WinLoG program it is recommended that the tutorial in this chapter be completed This tutorial will give you a basic understanding of how to use the WinLoG program It describes how to custom
267. le This is the style of the rectangle border The line style can be changed by pressing the Line Style button A Line Properties form will then be displayed Using this form the style color and width of the rectangle can be set Fill Color This is the color to use to fill the inside of the rectangle When the Fill Color button is pressed a Color form will be displayed Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color can be specified WinLoG User s Guide 391 392 Legends Page Layout The page layout is used to set the paper size and orientation for the printed legend To change the page layout select the Page Layout menu item from the Edit menu The Page Layout form below will be dis played Page Layout Size Letter i Aches Cr Milimeters Width 2 5 Length i Orientation fe Portrait ik Landscape x Cancel Help The following information can be entered on the Page Layout form Size This is the page size of the template When the arrow at the right is pressed a list of available page sizes is displayed Inches or Millimeters The units for the width and length of the page These units will be used when specifying the layout of the legend If the Page Size is Custom the units can be set to either inches or mil limeters Width If the page size is specified as custom the page horizontal width in inches must be specified Length If the page size is specified as
268. lease the mouse button The Line button is used to draw a straight line on the symbol When pressed the cursor will change to a pencil To draw a line press and hold down the left mouse button at the start of the line Move the mouse to the end of the line and release the mouse button 404 WinLoG User s Guide Lithology Symbols The Rectangle button is used to draw a hollow rectangle on the m symbol When pressed the cursor will change to a cross To draw a rectangle press and hold down the left mouse button at the upper left corner of the rectangle Move the mouse to the lower right corner of the rectangle and release the mouse button The Filled Rectangle button is used to draw a filled rectangle on the symbol When pressed the cursor will change to a cross To draw a rectangle press and hold down the left mouse button at the upper left corner of the rectangle Move the mouse to the lower right corner of the rectangle and release the mouse button The Ellipse button is used to draw a hollow ellipse on the symbol When pressed the cursor will change to a cross To draw an ellipse press and hold down the left mouse button at the upper left cor ner of the ellipse Move the mouse to the lower right corner of the ellipse and release the mouse button The Filled Ellipse button is used to draw a filled ellipse on the symbol When pressed the cursor will change to a cross To draw an ellipse press and hold down the l
269. lete a geophysical log select the Delete Geophysical Log menu item of the Geophysical Data submenu of the Edit menu The Delete Geophysical Log form below will be displayed Select the geophysical log to be deleted and press the Ok button Delete Geophysical Log Editing a Geophysical Log After the geophysical log has been imported the data can be edited by either clicking on the geophysical column with the left mouse button or by selecting the geophysical log from the Geophysical Data submenu of the Edit menu After one of the above tasks is completed the Geo physical Data form on the next page will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide Geophysical Data 0 3048 218 625 0 4572 116 75 0 6096 70 9 0 762 60 375 0 9144 60 03125 1 0668 60 875 1 2192 60 28125 1 3716 H2 25 1 524 45 875 1 6764 39 09375 1 8288 32 90625 44 bp NHA E Edit Name x Cancel 7 Help The following information can be entered and edited using this form Depth This is the depth of the data point in the same units as set in the template Value This is the value of the data point in the same units as set in the template The buttons at the bottom of this form are used for the following lq The Start button moves to the first data point d The Previous button moves to the previous data point Pk The Next button moves to the next data point P The End button moves to the last data point WinLoG User s Guide 239
270. licking the left mouse button at the start or end point of the line After performing one of the above tasks the Edit Lines form on the next page will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide d Pas Lines and Arrows Lines Diagonal Arrowhea Horizontal f No fes i Vertical Position f End e Start Arrowhead Size 2 A Line ste DN X x Cancel 7 Help The buttons at the bottom of the this form are used for the following The Start button displays the first line The Previous button displays the previous line The Next button displays the next line The End button displays the last line The Insert button adds a new line The Delete button deletes this line The following information can be entered and edited using this form Orientation This is the orientation of the line either diagonal hori zontal or vertical If the orientation is set to horizontal the vertical position will be set to the y position of the start of the line If the orien tation is set to vertical the horizontal position will be set to the x posi tion of the start of the line WinLoG User s Guide 387 388 Legends Start X This is the horizontal position of the start of the line in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line the program will fill in this field The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Start Y
271. lithologic symbol library The library is selected when the legend is created Lithologic symbols are used to rep resent soils rocks ice and well packing material Lithologic symbol libraries are created and edited using the Symbol Libraries submenu and are discussed in detail in Chapter 7 The lithologic symbols and descriptions in the legend can be changed by selecting the lithologic library from the Lithologic Symbols sub menu of the Edit menu or click the left mouse button on one of the lithologic symbols in the legend After one of the above tasks has been performed the Symbol Descrip tions form will be displayed This form has two tabs one for the description and one for the symbol This form 1s identical for lithologic symbols well symbols and sample symbols The use of this form is described in the Symbol Descriptions section below Well Symbols Each legend can contain well symbols for a Type 1 2 or 3 well The type of well symbols is selected when the legend is created The num ber of symbols will depend upon the type of well 1 For a Type 1 well there will be 12 symbols used to represent the vari ous casings screens seals and packing All of the descriptions and symbols can be edited for this type of well WinLoG User s Guide Sample Symbols 2 Fora Type 2 well there will be 8 symbols for Pipes amp Screens 8 symbols for Top Fittings 8 symbols for Bottom Fittings and 8 symbols for Packing All of the desc
272. ll these couplings except for the 4th and 6th will use the inner diameter as the bottom diameter of the connector The bottom 6 symbols can be used for packers sampling ports cables tubes probes and bailers Of these 6 symbols only the packer uses both the inner and outer diameters of the component WinLoG User s Guide Well Data Joints Misc Line Width i A Foreground 1 Background x Cancel 7 Help Water Level Tab The Water Levels tab shown below is used to enter the water levels measured in the well well well Layout Components Water Levels Annotations 5 2 ey February 2 2000 13 2 February 18 2000 aas WinLoG User s Guide 203 204 Borehole Logs The buttons at the bottom of this tab are used for the following The Start button moves to the first water level d The Previous button moves to the previous water level P_The Next button moves to the next water level Fl The End button moves to the last water level F The Insert button creates a new water level The Delete button deletes this water level The following information can be entered and edited using this tab Depth This is the measured depth of the water level in the same units as set in the template Offset This is the offset to place the water level symbol from the cen ter of the hole Offsets to the left are negative and offsets to the right are positive Symbol This is
273. llipse in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the Ellipse button on the toolbar is used to create the ellipse the position will be filled in by the program otherwise the user will have to enter in the position Right This is the position of the right border of the ellipse in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the Ellipse button on the toolbar is used to create the ellipse the position will be filled in by the program otherwise the user will have to enter in the position Top This is the position of the top border of the ellipse in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the Ellipse button on the toolbar is used to create the ellipse the position will be filled in by the program otherwise the user will have to enter in the position Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the ellipse in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the Ellipse button on the tool bar is used to create the ellipse the position will be filled in by the pro gram otherwise the user will have to enter in the position Line Style Clicking the Line Style button opens a Line properties form on which the user can user select the Line Style Solid Dashed Dash Dot etc thickness and color of the line WinLoG User s Guide T 78 Projects Fill Color Clicking the Fill Color button open up the color form from which the user can select the color they wish to have on the interior of the ellip
274. ls the scale type scale input units and display units of the location map Fi Location Map Preferences Form Oj x Peeseseesaseeeecnees Scale Setting Location Map Scale C 1 unit _ units 1em fi 00 metres Tom __ metres Input Units Display Units Feet C Feet Metres Metres Jf Ok XM Cancel Help What is a map scale To make a map useful mapmakers establish and indicate a consistent relationship between size on the map and size in real life This relation ship is the map scale For instance a map may use one inch to represent what is actually 24 000 inches on earth Mapmakers express scale as a mathematical ratio or fraction The unit on the map is expressed as the number one numerator A scale of 1 24 000 would be read as one to twenty four thousand We cannot easily visualize a value such as 24 000 inches so maps usually not only show the scale ratio but con vert the ratio to units of measurement For example a 1 24 000 map can also be expressed as inch 2000 feet or about four tenths of a mile When choosing a map consider whether a small scale or large scale suits your purposes better e A large scale map shows a small land area in great detail e A small scale map shows less detail but a larger land area For instance a USA national map is a much smaller scale map than a map showing the details of a specific county or zip code WinLoG User s Guide 87 Tip When im
275. lum fi ts x Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide 235 236 Borehole Logs The following information can be entered on this form Column Format The file can have either the depths in readings in columns or only the readings in a column If the column format is Depths and Readings the depths of the data points will be extracted from the depth column If the column format is Readings Only the depths of the data points will be calculated using the specified start depth and increment Number of Header Lines This is the number of header lines in the file to skip before reading the data from the columns Number of Columns This is the number of data columns in the file Reading Column This is the number of the column starting with col umn at the left side of the file that has the readings Depth Column This is the number of the column that has the depths If the Column Format is Readings Only this field will not be dis played Start Depth This is the start depth to use for the readings If the Col umn Format is Depths amp Readings this field will not be displayed Depth Interval This 1s the depth interval to use between readings If the Column Format is Depths amp Readings this field will not be dis played In order to save time and memory when displaying geophysical data the data can be resampled at the time it is imported into the borehole log After the log type is selected the Resam
276. m will fill in this field End X This is the horizontal position of the end of the line in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line this field will be filled in by the pro gram End Y This is the vertical position of the end of the line in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line this field will be filled in by the program Line Style This is the style of the line The line style can be changed by pressing the Line Style button A Line Properties form will then be displayed Using this form the style color and width of the line can be set WinLoG User s Guide 341 342 Templates Arrowhead To display an arrowhead at the start or end of the line select yes Arrow Position This is position to place the arrowhead either at the start or end of the line If no arrowhead is selected above this field will not appear Arrowhead Size This is the size of the arrowhead If no arrowhead is selected above this field will not appear Rectangles Rectangles can be added anywhere on a template There is no limit to the number of rectangles that can be added _ Adding a Rectangle There are two methods that can be used to add a rectangle to a tem plate 1 By clicking on the Rectangle button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the upper le
277. mation can be entered on this form Name Your name Company Your companies name WinLoG User s Guide 429 430 Help Email Your email address Phone Your phone number Fax Your fax number WinLoG Version The version of WinLoG you are using This should be automatically filled in by the program Include Database Files The include Database Files check box allows you to include the database files you are currently working on How ever it should only be used if absolutely necessary since the database files are very large and many email servers are unable to send them Operating System Your computer s operating system i e Windows 98 2000 NT XP etc Error Description A short description of your error For example the user might get a floating point error and put that name in the descrip tion text box Detailed Description of Error Enter a detailed description of the error including what you were doing when you got the error what menu items you used what data you were entering and whether the problem occurs all of the time or only occasionally The Send button will email the information to GAEA support when you are finished filling out the form Other Methods to Contact Technical Support To expedite support services we prefer electronic communications through email or the Internet These communications minimize the pos sibility for any mistakes and allow us to better track your request
278. mit on the number of characters a top depth an optional bottom depth and the symbol to use for the layer WinLoG User s Guide 169 170 Borehole Logs The bottom depth of the lithologic layer can either be specified or the top depth of the next lithologic layer is used The lithologic descrip tions are usually displayed in a Description column and the lithologic symbols are usually displayed in Symbol column The lithology of the borehole log can be entered and edited by selecting the Lithology menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mouse button inside the lithology description or lithology symbol columns of the borehole log After performing one of the above tasks the Lithology form below will be displayed This form has two or three tabs one for lithology descrip tions and one or two for lithology symbols paid 0 I BZ UA SS SHB amp Br B di ti SY Marne T ithe Fi Top Depth o 5 sand and gravel fill some organic debris Bottom Depth Sn Top Line Style c Horizontal Algnmen Vertical Algnmen maa LEE S a HX x Cancel 7 Help The buttons at the bottom of the form are used for the following The Start button displays the first layer 4 The Previous button displays the previous layer WinLoG User s Guide Lithology p The Next button displays the next layer Fl The End button displays the last layer The Insert button creates a new layer
279. mple symbols The use of this form is described in the Symbol Descriptions section below WinLoG User s Guide 369 370 Legends Symbol Descriptions The method used to edit the descriptions and symbols 1s the same for lithologic symbols well symbols and sample symbols Some types of symbols can not be edited such as certain well symbols In this case the symbol will be displayed but no editing allowed When one of the symbols is selected for editing the Symbol Descrip tions form shown below will be displayed This form has two tabs one for the description and one for the symbol Symbol Descriptions T Arial E E B 7 U a a ES d EB 4 4 gt Pl x Cancel 7 Help The buttons at the bottom of the form are used for the following lq The Start button displays the first symbol d The Previous button displays the previous symbol p The Next button displays the next symbol Fl The End button displays the last symbol WinLoG User s Guide Symbol Descriptions Description Tab The Description tab shown on the previous page is used to enter and edit the description for the symbol There is no limit to the length of the description At the top of the tab there 1s a Rich Text toolbar used to format the description add symbols and perform spell checking raa lome z UAA SBSB22R 488 The use of the Rich Text toolbar is described below Before selecting a speed button the text to be modified should be
280. n unlock code for the program Free technical support to registered users includes assistance in the use of the software and in getting any bugs you may find in the software fixed There several ways you may contact technical support as discussed below In version 4 an automated technical support option has been added This is our preferred method since it provides us with the maxi mum amount of information to assist you 428 WinLoG User s Guide Getting Technical Support Automated Technical Support In version 4 of WinLoG you can now send logs templates and data bases to GAEA for technical support automatically within the program without having to first save them as exchange files To send the information to technical support select the Email Current Log Template menu item from the Help menu The Email Support form below will then be displayed Mi Email Support Form l O x Sender s Information Name John Di Doe Phone 905 725 4487 Company GAEA Testing Group Fax 905 f20 965 Email idoe gaea ca Error Description inlog Version 4 Include Database Files Operating System windows AP Error Description Floating Paint Error Detaled Description of the Error fie Steps to reproduce tt Description get a floating paint error when Itry to import my version 3 log Step 1 Click File Step 2 Click Import Version 3 Exchange files Step 3 Click OK Cancel Help The following infor
281. n and the Import GTGS Version 5 Log form below will be displayed This form allows the user to either select or enter the imported borehole s Borehole Num ber X Coordinate and Y Coordinate Import GTGS ersion 5 Log i Coordinate amp Select C Specify Borehole Mumbe Select f Specify Coordinate amp Select Specify fri Select Gi Select FileName Borehole x Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide Importing GTGS Data If the user wishes to specify the field then they click on the Specify but ton radio button for the field If they wish to select the field value then click the field s Select radio button and then click the Select button and the Borehole Data List form below will be shown PZ 13d PZ 13d D6985 005 018 D6985 005 0138 Greenville County Landfill Greenville County Houte 25 Greenville Houte 25 Greenville 013 37 013 37 Mike Fraser Mike Fraser James and Fisher James and Fisher 4 25 inch OD Air Rotary October 29 1999 October 29 1999 mch Diameter mch Diameter 22 0 o2e 0 Cancel Help The Borehole Data List form lists all the header data that is in the GTGS Version 5 header section When the user highlights a borehole header and clicks the Select button that header is then stored in the borehole number X Coordinate or Y Coordinate field depending on the field selected After the Borehole Number X and Y Coordinates have been sp
282. n be set on the Page tab shown above Show Page Shadow Check to show a shadow underneath the page on the screen This shadow does not appear on the printout Color This is the background color of the desktop Click on the Color button to select the background color Page Label This is the label used in the header or footer of the tem plate to indicate the page number of the borehole log The program will check for this text when displaying the log and place the page number after the text label By changing the label a variety oflanguages can be supported Page Separator This is the separator to display between the page number and total number of pages By changing the separator a variety of languages can be supported To not display the total number of pages leave this field blank Auto Scale Line Width for Printing Check this box to have the pro gram automatically set the scale factor for lines during printing If this box is not checked an input box will be displayed where you can enter the scale factor to use Normally this box should be checked so that the program automatically calculates the scale factor Occasionally when printing on large pages such as 11x17 you will need to set this scale factor manually WinLoG User s Guide Setting Program Preferences Preferences Page Directories Other Location Map Deviation Survey Auto Backup Kain Database C PROGRA 1 GAEABeta database E Bitmaps C PROGRA
283. n is used to erase the current symbol and provide a blank page Ha The Import Picture button is used to import a bitmap picture from a file into the current symbol When this button is pressed the Open bitmap form on the next page will be displayed Select the bitmap file to import and then press the Open button WinLoG User s Guide 403 Symbol Libraries Open Look in E Bitmaps El el 40x40 l YP Blank bmp 4P Bottom bmp Gl British 2 bmp Bottom brp Botton bmp kl British 3 bmp Ed Bottom bmp Ed Bottom Emp British 4 bmp 4P Bottom3 bmp Gl British bmp British 5 bmp Gl Bottom bmp Gl British 0 bmp 4P Eritish 6 brop Hr File name British 4 bmp Files of type AI gif bmp ico emf vmf Cancel The Erase button is used to delete parts of the symbol When this button is pressed the cursor will change to an eraser To erase a part of the symbol hold the left mouse button down and move the cur sor over the area to be erased The Fill button is used to fill regions of symbols When this but ton is pressed the cursor will change to a paint can To fill an area click inside the region K The Undo button is used to undo the previous edit operation The Curve button is used to draw a curved line on the symbol When pressed the cursor will change to a pencil To draw a curve hold down the left mouse button and move the mouse When finished drawing the line re
284. n of the top border of the bitmap in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Bitmap button on the tool bar 1s used to create the bitmap this field will not be displayed If Stretch Bitmap is set to No then this field will not be displayed Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the bitmap in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Stretch Bitmap is set to No or Maintain Aspect Ratio is set to yes then this field will not be displayed and the bottom will be calculated by the program Center X This is the bitmap s horizontal center in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If Stretch Bitmap 1s set to Yes this field will not be displayed If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to add the bitmap this field will be filled in by the program WinLoG User s Guide Lines and Arrows Center Y This is the bitmap s vertical center in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If Stretch Bitmap is set to Yes this field will not be displayed If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to add the bitmap this field will be filled in by the program Sizing a Bitmap The size of the bitmap can be changed using the Bitmap Information form above or the mouse To adjust the size using the mouse follow the procedure below 1 Position the cursor at the boundary of the bitmap The cursor should change to a set of arrows and the Status line should display Edit Size of Bitm
285. n the form as described below Editing a Paragraph Existing Paragraph data can be edited by selecting the Paragraph Text menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mouse button inside the Paragraph Text of the legend After performing one of the above tasks the Paragraph Text form on the next page will be displayed The buttons at the bottom of the this form are used for the following WinLoG User s Guide p d Paragraphs T Arial Apo Am Bz ee ict BE Background cool Frame tf No ie Yeg Frame Width fi A Frame Color HA Pb MAX x Cancel 7 Help The Start button displays the first paragraph The Previous button displays the previous paragraph The Next button displays the next paragraph The End button displays the last paragraph The Insert button creates a new paragraph The Delete button deletes this paragraph The following information can be entered and edited using this form Text This is the text for the paragraph There is no limit to the length of the text The Rich Text toolbar at the top of the form is used to for mat the text This toolbar is described below WinLoG User s Guide 377 3 8 Legends Left This is the position of the left border of the paragraph in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Paragraph button on the toolbar is used to create the paragraph this position will be filled in by the program The unit
286. n the legend and page layout can be changed by selecting the Titles menu item from the Edit menu or click the left mouse button on one of the titles in the legend Titles Tab Titles amp Layout Titles Layout Symbol Legend Sits and Clays Library Silts and Clays x Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide Titles and Layout The Titles tab shown above is used to enter and edit the following information for each type of title Title This is the title to display for this type of symbol up to 255 char acters The types of titles will depend upon what symbols are dis played in the legend X This is the horizontal position to place the title and symbols in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page The symbols asso ciated with this title will be drawn beginning at this position By adjust ing the horizontal position more than one set of symbols can be drawn across the page The units of measurement are specified in the page lay out Y This is the vertical position to place the title and symbols in inches or millimeters from the top of the page The symbols associated with this title will be drawn below the title If Y is set to zero the program will calculate the position Columns This is the number of symbols per row to draw for this type of symbol The number of columns can be different for each type This field is not used for Main Title and Well Symbols types since there are no symbols as
287. n to return to the Import Excel Data form The selected cell range will be filled in on the form This operation can be repeated until all of the cell ranges for the data types on the form have been specified When all of the cell ranges that are to be imported are entered click on the Ok button to import the data into the log WinLoG User s Guide Importing Excel Log Data EN Excel Spreadsheet 1 Sample Denth Samnle Number Samnle Size 2 al k e MW W al ed ed al ed O ed dl md aS Ea fa B Ga To make it easier to import data from spreadsheets script files can be used These files contain the cell ranges for a spreadsheet Once the cell ranges have been specified they can be saved in a script file This script file can then be opened and used for the next borehole Even if the Excel file is different it can still be used with the script file as long as the data in the spreadsheet is arranged the same way WinLoG User s Guide 213 274 Borehole Logs Importing Excel Project Data New in WinLoG Version 4 1s the ability to import project data for mul tiple boreholes from an Excel spreadsheet This feature can be used to import bulk data for one or more boreholes in a project If the boreholes do not exist in the project they will be created One use for this feature would be to import all of the survey data for the boreholes in a project at the same time from a single Excel spreadsheet To import
288. ncl T 44 Canadian Qaks Drive nh Whiley Ontani Site Location Geologist SUBSURFACE PROFILE SAMPLE zier temarks Ting A Liesonplon Leptir en RPM 200 600 1000 4 m a T S Ground Surfis Ee width of Coburn En Modied Sheet lofi WinLoG User s Guide 39 40 Tutorial x Deleting a Column Columns can be easily added and deleted in a template As part of this tutorial we are going to delete the Remarks column to make room for a wider Well Data column To delete the Remarks column click on the column with the left mouse button The Columns form below will be displayed Click on the Delete button at the bottom of the form to delete the column After the Ok button 1s pressed the modified tem plate without the Remarks column will be displayed Title Remarks i Horizontal Vertical Hame Remarks Right Line Type Fositiorn E IY Use Default A alom Font AL Customize Column HA PW HX x Cancel 7 Help Type of Column Lithologic Description Lithologic Symbol Sample Number Sample Type Sample Symbol Sample Yale Sample Recovery Sample Lithologic Symbol WinLoG User s Guide Customizing the Well Column Customizing the Well Column Now that there is more room for the Well Column we can make the column wider and change the title To modify the Well Column click on the column with the left mou
289. nd of Log len M Slot 10 Screen IH eeen jme Type mn En De I ee a MI ha Cc Concrete caj co ej qo Drilled By ABC Drilling Company Hole Size 12 Drill Method H S Auger Datum Local Drill Date 02 06 2000 Sheet 1 of 1 Features Introduction WinLoG can be used to quickly create edit and print geotechnical environmental mining water well oil amp gas and transportation bore hole logs The graphical windows interface displays the log as it is changed and shows exactly how the log will look when it is printed Borehole and well logs can be printed in black and white or color The geographical information system feature added in version 4 dis plays a location map for the project showing the boreholes cross sec tions and any surface features This feature makes it easy to visualize your project and can be used to print a location map of the project To edit a borehole all you need to do is click on it in the location map There are no limits to the number and types of borehole logs that can be created with WinLoG Logs can contain general borehole data ex loca tion client project number lithologic descriptions and symbols sam ple data well completion details water level measurements geophysical logs and numerous graphs and text comments Once a log is created it can be easily copied using a toolbar button and then edited and saved to represent other boreholes on the same site Tem
290. nd out Borehole logs can be scrolled between pages support for all Windows fonts printers and displays support for Imperial and Metric page sizes Windows network compatible Project Features Introduction Borehole Log Features Frequently Asked Questions Help WinLoG uses the latest type of help system for Microsoft Windows called HTML Help This help system uses a similar style of display as Internet Explorer The Help System can be used to find information on line rather than by using this manual Both sources will pro vide the same information but are organized somewhat differently Help will appear in a separate window with its own menu bar and controls as shown below This chapter describes how to 1 Display help 2 Use help 3 Get technical support 4 Upgrade WinLoG Contents Search for Help On How to Use Help Transfer Registration Email Technical Support Email Current Log Template Upgrade WinLoG GAEAs Web Site About Displaying Help These tasks can be performed using menu commands on the Help menu shown on the previous page The Transfer Registration menu item is explained in Chapter Getting Started Displaying Help There are several ways to access the Help System these are e Press the Help button To display the help contents at any time press the help button on the Toolbar e Click a Help button in a form For more information on using a particular form click the Help butt
291. nds are stored in the WinLoG master database The format of the master database is Microsoft Access 97 This database is stored in the Main Database Directory For a detailed discussion of the database structure see Database Structure in the Introduction Chapter or Appen dix B This chapter describes how to 1 Create a new legend 2 Enter and edit the following information Titles and Layout Lithology Symbols Well Symbols Sample Symbols Paragraph text Bitmaps Lines and arrows Rectangles Page Layout 3 Save a legend 4 Delete a legend 5 Print a legend WinLoG User s Guide 359 Legends These tasks can be performed using menu commands on the File menu and Edit menus or speed buttons on the Legend toolbar shown below File Menu Edit Menu TEE LEGT mpraet E r TNT at at a el AE ratiti Legend Toolbar 360 WinLoG User s Guide Creating a New Legend Creating a New Legend Since legends are stored in the WinLoG master database they can be created and edited at any time no project has to be open To create a legend either select the New Legend menu item of the Legends sub menu of the File menu or click the New button on the Legend Toolbar After one of the above tasks is performed the New Legend form above will be displayed This form has two tabs one for the layout of the leg end and one for the page setup Layout Tab Layout Page Setup Litholo
292. ng AGS Data In version 4 Winlog allows a user to import AGS files The AGS file format is the standard file format of the the Association of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Specialists AGS which is a non profit associ ation established to improve the profile and quality of geotechnical and geoenvironmental engineering Their web site 1s located at http www ags org uk data transfer Intro cfm The membership comprises UK organizations and individuals having a common interest in the business of site investigation geotechnics geoenvironmental engineering engineering geology geochemistry hydrogeology and other related disciplines The purpose of the AGS Format is to provide a means of transferring geotechnical and geoenvironmental data between parties In order to ensure the widest possible level of acceptance it was also agreed that the Format should use the American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII To import as AGS file into Winlog select the Import AGS Data menu item from the Import submenu of the Import Export Data submenu of the File menu The Select AGS File form below will be displayed allowing the user to select and open the AGS file they wish to Import ax Look in Logs y Ci Er Files of type AGS Files Cancel ZA WinLoG User s Guide Importing AGS Data After the file name has been selected the file is automatically processed If the file is a valid AGS file it should be successfull
293. ng information Project ID A unique project number up to 100 characters The name cannot contain any of the following characters amp WinLoG User s Guide Managing a Project Database Project Name The name of the project up to 255 characters Directory The directory to be used to store the project database tables up to 255 characters This directory can be on a local computer or a network server The Select Directory button to the right of the directory name can be used to select an existing directory This option should be used to import projects that have been previously created but are not included in the Master Project database Managing a Project Database WinLoG uses Microsoft Access databases to store all its Templates Borehole Logs Legends Libraries Projects etc In version 4 several new features have been added to make managing these databases easier and quicker These are e Compressing a Database e Repairing a Database e Backing up a Database e Restoring a Database e Backing up all WinLoG Data Compressing a Database Compressing a WinLoG project database can be accomplished by selecting the Compact Project Database menu item from the Projects submenu of the File menu The Compact Project Form on the next page will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide Tip When you delete data or objects in a WinLoG database the Access database associated with the pro ject can become fragmente
294. nge the color A Color form will be dis played shown in the previous section and a basic or custom color can be selected Border Line This is the line style to use for the border of the column block When the button is pressed a Line Properties form will be dis played shown in the previous section Using this form the line style width and color can be selected WinLoG User s Guide 307 308 Templates Interior Line This 1s the line style to use for the interior lines of the column block These lines include the section title borders and bottom border of the titles When the button is pressed a Line Properties form will be displayed shown in the previous section Using this form the line style width and color can be selected Section Font This is the font to use for the section headings shown at the top of the column block and defined below When the button 1s pressed a Font form shown in the previous section will be displayed Using this form the font name style size and color can be selected Title Font This is the font to use for the titles shown at the top of the column block and defined in the Columns tab When the button is pressed a Font form shown in the previous section will be displayed Using this form the font name style size and color can be selected Log Font This is the default font to use for the log data in the columns Individual fonts can be defined for each column in the
295. ns below It 1s recommended that the Customizing Template section be completed before proceeding Adding General Borehole Data After the template has been selected the Borehole Data form below will be displayed The first thing that must be entered is the Borehole Number The Borehole Number is used to store the borehole data and must be unique for each borehole in a project The X Coordinate Y Coordinate and Well Symbol are used to show the borehole on the location map Borehole Data Number and Location Data KMemas Borehole Number fio Edit x Coordinatef200 eoo O Well Symbol iin ra Coordinate 430 y OK X Cancel 7 Help Enter 101 for the Borehole Number and then click on the Data tab at the top of the form The Data tab displayed on the next page is used to enter most of the general borehole data that will appear in the header and footer of the borehole log In addition memo data can be entered using the Memo tab WinLoG User s Guide 47 48 Tutorial The default types of general borehole data that can be entered are set by the template Additional data types can be entered as well using the Add button at the bottom of this tab Borehole Data Number and Location Data Memos Borehole Number Project Mo Project Client Site Location Enclosure Geologist Drilled By Drill Method Orill Date Hole Size iE Edit Data Type HA a R x Cancel 7 Help
296. nt containing the symbol and then select the desired symbol After the desired symbol has been selected press the Ok button to insert it into the memo field The WinLoG program comes with a font called GAEA Symbols that contains a variety of well and other symbols Symbol Font GABA Symbols Y Foa tf g Bb doen t ka Tk EE OEE NE E E F AK SEREN SE SE SCHEDEL a Bn nl E5 a3 He Fle Eo lo a lo fo A Sym cela fo Ae a a eaa F ehna a Oecd AIN NEA PE nk oe ts ad LT amer dS Enk def PP po F a la D FRE Mee b g A EE ee e ee ed e Cancel e The Spell Check button will display the Spell Checker form shown on the next page and will check the spelling in the memo field The dictionary used to check the spelling is set in the program Preferences see Chapter 3 When the Add button is pressed the word will be appended to the custom dictionary WinLoG User s Guide Symbol Descriptions Spell Checker Not found Sita Replace With Silty LR Replace mn Add or Skip Once or Skip Always 7 Suggest x Close Suggestions Symbol Tab Symbol Descriptions Description Symbol OON 5E q gt gt x Cancel 7 Help The Symbol tab shown above is used to edit the symbol At the left side of the tab there is a toolbar used to edit the symbol Some symbols which are drawn to scale can not be edited If the symbol can not be edited the toolbar will be empty
297. nt Double PlasticLimit Double LiquidLimit Double Database Structure Table Name Field Name DataType FieldSize Key 1 Remarks ProjectNumber Text 100 BoreholeNumber Text 100 RemarkType Text 100 Table Name __ FieldName DataType _ Field Size Key _ Remarks Text ProjectNumber Text 1 BoreholeNumb Text er RemarkT ype Text Number Integer Depth Double Remark Text Data Type Field Size Key _ nl Memo eer ree Text BoreholeNumber Text RemarkT ype Text Number Integer Depth Double Remark Memo 7 Remarks_Lines IT Text BoreholeNumber Text Text Integer Double Integer Long Integer Integer Integer Integer Database Structure Data Type FieldSize Key _ 100 100 ET nT 1 BoreholeNumb ee Samplelnterval DepthColumn SampleColumn BoreholeNumber 1 LogName Number Text Text Text Integer Double Double Double Integer Text Text Text Text Text Text Integer Integer Double Integer Integer Integer Double Double Double Double Double Text Text Text Integer Double Double Database Structure Data Type FieldSize Key _ ere Text BoreholeNumber Text WellNumber Text Integer Double Double Double Double Integer Integer Integer Integer Long Integer Long Integer TE WaterLevels ese ner Text BoreholeNumber Text WellNumber Text Double Integer InputT ype Integer WellT ype Integer Text BoreholeNumber Text WellNumber Text Double Intege
298. ntaining Aspect Ratio Using this setting the image will be stretched such that it extends from the specified top depth to the specified bottom depth The aspect ratio of the image will be main tained during this stretching such that the vertical and horizontal stretches are the same This may result in the image being clipped when it extends outside of the column horizontally Changing the Column Widths The width of each column can be changed using the Column tab or using the mouse To change the column width with the mouse place the cursor over the vertical column boundary the Columns form should not be displayed when doing this The cursor will change to a double arrow While holding down the left mouse button drag the column boundary to the desired position When positioning column boundaries do not cross over the boundaries of the next column since this can cause difficulties entering data WinLoG User s Guide Company Name Changing the Section Heading Size The size of the section headings can be changed using the Layout tab of the Columns form or the mouse To change the size with the mouse place the cursor over the section heading boundary The cursor will change to a double arrow While holding down the left mouse button drag the boundary to the desired position Company Name The company name and address can be shown anywhere on a template To edit the company name and display the Company Information form shown below e
299. nteger Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Text Long Integer Long Integer Installation Files Installation Files During the installation of the WinLoG program the files listed below will be installed This listing is pro vided to enable network administrators to determine what files are present and where It is not recom mended that these files be moved or deleted To uninstall the WinLoG program use the Add Remove Programs function in the Control Panel see Chapter 1 WinLoG exe lt WinLoG gt WinLoG executable program Transfer exe lt WinLoG gt Registration transfer program WinlogAutoUpgrade exe lt WinLoG gt Auto upgrade program dct lt WinLoG gt Dictionaries for spell checker bmp lt WinLoG gt Bitmaps Bitmap symbols winlog chm lt WinLoG gt HTML Help file gaeaproject mdb lt WinLoG Database Master project database winlog mdb lt WinLoG Database WinLoG master database winlogBlank mdb lt WinLoG Database Blank WinLoG project database LogPlotKey mdb lt WinLoG Database Database which contains conversion codes used to import gINT and LogPlot CompletedTutorialwinlog mdb lt WinLoG Completed tutorial database Sampleswinlog mdb gaea ttf Dao350 dll Dao2535 tlb Msjet35 dll Msjter35 dll Msyint35 dll Vbar332 dll VbSdb dll Vbajet32 dll Msrd2x35 dll Msrep135 dll Expsrv dll Oleaut32 dll Olepro32 dll Stdole2 tlb Asycfilt dll Hhctrl ocx Riched32 dll RichEd20 dll Database gt CompletedTutorial
300. nu of the Edit menu A second template page will then be created that is identical to the first page the first page is used as a default format to save time creating the second page This page can be modified as required and then saved To revert to a one page template select the 1 Page menu item from the of Pages submenu of the Edit menu Care should be taken when reverting back to one page since any editing of the second page will be lost Setting a Password for the Template It maybe advantageous for some companies to create templates that have a password associated with them In this way accidental editing of templates could be avoided since only employees knowing the pass word to the template would be able to edit it This type of template password locking is accomplished by selecting the Change Template Password menu item from the Templates sub menu of the File menu The Change Password form on the next page will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide 393 354 Templates Change Password Current Password New Password fa Contirm New Password a y OF x Cancel Help There are three editable fields on this form These include Current Password The current password of the template If the tem plate doesn t currently have a password then leave this blank New Password The new password of the template If you want to remove the old password then set this to blank Confirm New Password The new p
301. of this box the type of component can be selected The types of components that can be selected are Cover Cap Joint Misc Casing Screen Seal Packing and Bottom Seal Start Depth This is the start depth of the component in the same units as set in the template End Depth This is the end depth of the component Inner Diameter This is the inner diameter of the component It is only used for Seal and some Casing Misc components These components will be drawn such that the shading and symbol patterns will fill the gap between the inner and outer diameters of the component The com ponents that use the inner diameter are discussed under the appropriate symbol at the end of this section WinLoG User s Guide 199 200 Borehole Logs Outer Diameter This is the outer diameter of the component and 1s used by all of the types of components The outer diameter must be less than the hole diameter The width of the component inside the well col umn is determined by the ratio of the outer diameter and hole diameter For example if the outer diameter is 2 inches and the hole diameter is 8 inches then the components width would be 4 of the hole width Offset This is the offset of the component from the center of the hole Offsets to the left are negative and offsets to the right are positive By specifying an offset to the component multiple casings and piezome ters can be placed within a single well column For example to
302. omized template should be saved This modified template will be used for creating a borehole log in the sections below We are going to save the modified template under a new name so that the tutorial template can be used again if required To save the template under a new name click on the SaveAs button on the Template toolbar In the Enter Template Name form shown on the next page enter the new template name as Completed Tutorial When the Ok button 1s pressed the template will be saved and ready for use in the next sec tion WinLoG User s Guide Saving a Template Enter Template Name Existing Template Environmental Three Graphs Environmental Twa Graphs Environmental YOC and Well Environmental YOC Concentrations Environmental Well Geophysical 2 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs Legal Geotechnical Basic Geotechnical Core Log Geotechnical Core Log Legal Geotechnical PENN DOT Geotechnical Rock Core Unique Template Hame Completed Tutorial x Cancel 7 Help gq Closing the Template This part of the tutorial is now completed and the template can be closed To close the template click on the Close button on the Template toolbar WinLoG User s Guide 43 New Projects are now displayed using a graphical information system The GIS displays a project location map that can be used to display and edit boreholes and cross sec tions if WinFence has been pur chased
303. on WinLoG User s Guide Columns Type of Column Select the type of column from the list of available column types For a detailed description of the data that can be entered in each column type see Chapter 4 Title This is the title to display for the column up to 255 characters The title does not have to be the same as the column name and does not have to be unique To display the title on more than one line use the Enter key For graph columns the title can also be entered on the Graph Properties form using the Customize button Horizontal Check to display the title horizontally Vertical Check to display the title vertically Name This is the unique name to use for the column up to 100 char acters The name can be the same as the title Text graph and well data entered for boreholes will be stored using this name Name2 This is the unique name to use for the second graph geophysi cal log or linked text interval If the column type is Double Graph or Double Geophysical Log this field 1s used to specify the name of the second graph If the column type is Text Interval Facies Con stituents or Members this field 1s used to specify the name of the linked text interval If left blank then the column will not be part of a linked text interval Otherwise all columns that have the same Name2 will be part of the same linked text interval Right Line Type This is the line style to use for
304. on e Choose a command from the Help menu The Help menu offers several options Contents displays the same Help Contents that appear when you press Fl with no commands highlighted Search displays the Search dialog box and a list of keywords you can use to find topics About WinFence gives information about the program including the 3 digit version number required by technical support Using Help You can move back and forth between topics or search through the entire help system for the topic you want Topics that are underlined can be displayed by clicking on them and topics that have dotted underlines can have their definition displayed by clicking on them WinLoG User s Guide 427 Help The tabs on the Help form are used for the following e Contents displays the complete Table of Contents of the Help System e Index is used to look for help topics listed by keyword Search can be used to search for a specific help topic by one or more keywords The buttons at the top of the Help form are used for the following e Hide is used to hide the tabs on the left side of the form e Back displays the previous help topic if any e Print is used to print the current help topic e Options is used to change the preferences for the Help system Getting Technical Support GAEA offers a variety of services to help you with your questions and problems You will be automatically registered when you obtain a
305. on on the legend toolbar 394 WinLoG Users Guide Symbol Libraries Symbol Descriptions oarse Sand 4 4 gt Pl x Cancel 7 Help Symbol Libraries Libraries are used to store lithologic bitmaps that can be used for the strata symbols Each library contains 18 bitmap symbols WinLoG log comes with several previ ously defined libraries In addition any number of new libraries can be created making the number of lithologic symbols available unlimited Each symbol also has a default symbol description stored in the library which is used when creating legends When a legend is created the default description can be used for the symbol description of the legend If this description is then edited in the legend the new descrip tion will only appear in that legend The new description in the legend will not replace the default description in the library To change the default description the descrip tion must be changed in the library as discussed below However the actual symbols are the same in the legend as in the library and if edited in the library the symbols in the legend will change as well Libraries are stored in the master project database so that they are accessible by all programs The format of the master database is Microsoft Access 97 This database is stored in the Main Database Directory This chapter describes how to 1 Create a new library 2 Edit a library 3 Save a library 4 Print a li
306. ontain multiple depth text graph and well columns Below is a list of the different type of columns depth elevation lithologic symbol lithologic description text text interval linked text interval constituent member facies symbol sample number sample type sample symbol sample N value blows ft sample recovery WinLoG User s Guide Columns sample lithologic symbol other sample data type well diagrams type 2 well diagrams type 3 well diagrams Standard Penetration Test graph data Water Content graph data double graphs single graphs bar graphs histograms single geophysical graphs double geophysical graphs deviation survey percent cuttings core photo The template is used to control what borehole data is displayed in the columns Unlike previous versions of WinLoG the borehole data is now tied to the type of data in the template This way if the template is edited or a different template is used the borehole data displayed in the column will move depending upon the location within the template For example the lab analysis data is displayed in the third column of the template as text data If later the template is edited and the lab analysis is moved to the fifth column when the borehole log is displayed the lab analysis will show up in the fifth column To edit the a column and display the Columns fo
307. op And when selecting the symbol for the lower bentonite seal specify the Horizontal Border as None Well well Data Layout Components water Levels Annotations 2 4 0 mT Cover Casing Screen 2 Casing Screen 2 Cap 2 Bottom Seal 6 5 Seal Packing Seal Packing Seal Packing Po oF ol alal aa Casing creen WinLoG User s Guide Adding Well Completion Details The water level measured can be entered by clicking on the Water Lev els tab Enter the water level information shown on the tab below well well Data Layout Components Water Levels Annotations a5 0 January 31 200 LEE re a Next the annotations for the well can be added by clicking on the Annotations tab For this tutorial enter the information shown below KE A DELE Layout Components Water Levels Annotations 0 5 5 2 Aboveground Cower Right Vertical Ie O Casing z 5 5 4 5 Left Vertical Je 2 PVC Fisor 4 5 5 1 5 Left Vertical gt 2 PVC Screen 10 14 5 5 0 Lett Vertical liel Silica Sand 11 0 5 5 2 Right Vertical Bentonite G 0 55 2 Right Vertical 5 5 0 Lett Vertical HA Pb HH X WinLoG User s Guide 57 Tutorial After the well completion details have been entered the borehole log will appear as shown below a WinLoG Project Tutorial Progect Dorehole 101 gh Bie Edi View Window Hep ll xl hesssenitoemarjelesar td Il Osea eo aad mt
308. opup Menu will be displayed This popup menu contains the following com mands Save saves the template in the database Close closes the template Print prints the template Header used to edit the headers Footer used to edit the footers Location Map used to add edit or delete a location map on the template Columns used to edit the columns Company used to edit the company name Paragraph Text used to add edit and delete paragraph text Bitmaps used to add edit and delete bitmaps Lines used to add edit and delete lines and arrows Save Close Print Header Footer Location Map Columns Company Paragraph Text Bitmaps Lines Rectangles Tables Rectangles used to add edit and delete rectangles Tables used to add edit and delete tables WinLoG User s Guide Popup Menus Legend Popup Menu If a legend is currently displayed on the desktop the Legend Popup Menu will be displayed This popup menu contains the following com mands Save saves the symbol library Save Close closes the symbol library Close Print prints the symbol library Print Titles used to edit the titles of the legend Lithologic Symbols used to edit the litho _ ithologic Symbols used to edit the litho HSE logic symbols A Well Symbols used to edit the well sym ani bols Sample Symbols Sample Symbols used to edit the sample EEL symbols STEE Paragraph Text used to edit
309. opup menu and then clicking on the Add button on the form The Edit Rec tangles form described in the next section will then be displayed Using this method the location of the rectangle must be specified on the form Editing a Rectangle Existing rectangles can be edited by selecting the Rectangles menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mouse button inside the rec tangle on the template After performing one of the above tasks the Edit Rectangle form below will be displayed Edit Rectangles Line Style H a 0 34 y Fill Color Bottom a2 44 rH x x Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide 257 258 Borehole Logs The following information can be entered and edited using this form Left This is the position of the left border of the rectangle in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Rectangle button on the toolbar is used to create the rectangle the program will fill in this posi tion The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Right This is the position of the right border of the rectangle in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Rectangle button on the toolbar is used to create the rectangle this position will be filled in by the program Top This is the position of the top border of the rectangle in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Rectangle button on the toolbar is used to create the r
310. or ns Selected Symbol Font Size Sp Color ns E x Cancel Help Borehole Data Button The Borehole Data button allows the user to edit the borehole ID x coordinate y coordinate elevation depth and symbol of the boreholes in the project x Borehole k v Joen Elevation Symbol bold 5 0 0 se GT 9 345 333 18 0 ens GT 12 BBY 222 100 0 m GT 11 A 321 3 5 0 m GT 3 0 0 36 5 0 E aaaaaaaaaaaaas 0 fall 0 E ATEST 0 0 202 0 m SESESSSE o 0 201 200 5 AAATE zt 0 0 200 0 aaaaaaaaaa oO 0 100 0 E101 1000 BG 50 101 4 101 100 324 0 0 lt HAD NH X x Cancel Help The following can be edited from this form X This is the horizontal position of the center of the borehole in real grid coordinates either feet or meters i e Easting Y This is the vertical position of the center of the borehole in real grid coordinates either feet or meters 1 e Northing WinLoG User s Guide Location Map Toolbar Depth This is the vertical depth of the borehole in real grid coordi nates either feet or meters Elevation This is the elevation at the top of the borehole real grid coordinates either feet or meters Symbol This is the borehole Symbol that is used to represent the bore hole The user can change the borehole symbol by double clicking on the borehole symbol column This act opens up the Well Symbols form The user can then select the symbol they would like to use by high lig
311. or annotation Well Type 3 columns are a new feature in this version of WinLoG and can be used to represent complicated well details Almost all of the well information is drawn to scale including casings screens covers caps and miscellaneous fittings This type of well column can contain multi ple piezometers casings and screens with variable diameters annota tion and multiple water depths Besides being able to represent very complicated wells this type of well column 1s also very easy to use and is recommended for most well displays WinLoG User s Guide Well Data The data for each well column is grouped into datasets and stored according to the name of the well column This allows for the display of more than one set of well data on a borehole log If the name of the well column in the template is changed after the data is entered the dataset will no longer be displayed in that column You can change the name of the well dataset for the log to that in the template as described below When a new borehole log is created well datasets will be automatically created for whatever well columns are specified in the template The names of these well datasets will appear in the Well Data submenu of the Edit menu It 1s also possible to create additional well datasets or delete well datasets as described below Adding A Well To add a new well dataset to a borehole log select the Add Well menu item of the Well Data submenu of the
312. or button When this button is pressed a Color form will be displayed Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color can be specified Background Color This is the color to use for the unshaded parts of the symbol The background color can be changed by pressing the Background Color button When this button is pressed the Color form is displayed Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color can be specified Fill Size The fill size is used to expand or condense the symbol before it is drawn on the log The size of the symbol is multiplied by the fill size and then the symbol is drawn For example a fill size of 2 will result in the symbol being doubled in size The fill size must be greater than 0 Top Line Style The Top Line Style button is used to change the line style for the top sample boundary in the symbol column If the bottom depth of the sample is specified this line style is also used for the bot tom boundary When the button 1s pressed the Line Properties form described in the Description tab is displayed If the Same as Descrip tion box 1s checked the line style will be set to the same as set in the Description tab for the sample WinLoG User s Guide Geophysical Data Geophysical Data A wide variety of geophysical logs can be displayed as graphs An unlimited number of geophysical logs can be displayed in a borehole log and there is no limit on the number of points each
313. or menu command The form below will then be displayed This form lists the current templates available Select the desired template and then press the Ok button Changing the template for the log will only change the format and will not affect any of the log data Select Template Templates Completed utortal Environmental Three Graphs Environmental Two Graphs Environmental YOC and Well Environmental YOC Concentrations Environmental Well Geophysical 4 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs Legal Geotechnical Basic ical Core Log Core Log Legal PENN DOT Rock Core US Military Geotechnical Well Oil Sands P 1 Std ch00 44 gt Dl x Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide 285 Borehole Logs 286 WinLoG User s Guide Templates olumns Type of Column ee i Horizontal C Vertical Mame Description Right Line Type ____ Lithologic Description Lithologic Symbol Text Sample Humber Sample Type Sample Symbol Sample N alue Sample Recovery Sample Lithologic Symbol u sample Other Position 3 1 Well Type 1 Well Type 2 Water Content Graph Bar G raph Templates Templates are used to control the layout and formatting of borehole logs In general all of the boreholes in a pro ject would use one or two templates to format the logs In this way a consistent format can be established within a project and
314. ord will be appended to the cus tom dictionary Sizing a Paragraph The size of the paragraph can be changed using the Paragraph Text form above or the mouse To adjust the size using the mouse follow the procedure below 1 Position the cursor at the boundary of the paragraph The cursor should change to a set of arrows and the Status line should display WinLoG User s Guide 249 250 Borehole Logs Edit Size of Paragraph The orientation of the arrows will indicate the direction that the boundary can be changed 2 Press and hold the left mouse button down and drag the boundary to its new position 3 While dragging the boundary a rectangle will be displayed showing its current location 4 When the boundary is in the desired location release the left mouse button Bitmaps Bitmaps contained in Windows bitmap BMP files can be added any where on a log These bitmaps can be used to show company logos site plans and other graphical information Bitmaps are displayed over top of any information on the log There is no limit to the number of bitmaps that can be displayed ia Adding a Bitmap There are two methods that can be used to add a bitmap to a log 1 Click on the Bitmap button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the center of the bitmap The Open form on the next page will then be displayed Select the bitmap file and then press the Open button 2 Sel
315. orizontal or vertical WinLoG User s Guide Remarks Symbol This is the symbol to use to draw the text leaders When the cursor 1s clicked inside this column the Annotation Symbol form below will be displayed This form can be used to select the symbol type symbol size and line style If the symbol type is Double Arrow and the text orientation is horizontal the double arrows will not be drawn Remarks Remark columns can be used to display any information that varies with depth such as soil classification RQD chemical testing litho logic consistency laboratory results drilling rates etc Borehole logs can contain an unlimited number of remark columns Each remark col umn can contain an unlimited number of text lines Remarks can be entered and edited by selecting the Remarks submenu of the Edit menu and then selecting the name of the remarks column or clicking the left mouse button inside the remarks column of the bore hole log After performing one of the above tasks the Remark form on below will be displayed This form has three tabs one for the text data one for memo data and one for line data Text Memos Lines HA PN HX Edit Type x Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide 207 208 Borehole Logs The name of the remark dataset can be changed by clicking on the Edit Name button at the bottom of the tab A new unique name can then be entered in the Edit Remark Type form shown below Changing
316. ous Wavy non parallel discontinuous Wavy non parallel continuos NIS IxXISI lt ICI ws la FO 10 3 nal 4D LIEN Ol O MIN DW WIN CIE N 222 WinLoG User s Guide Graph Data A specially designed font is provided with the WinLoG program for use with this column The font is called GAEA Structures and is shown below Graph Data Graph data can be used to display any information that varies with depth such as shear strength water content hydraulic conductivity contaminant concentrations volatile hydrocarbon readings etc There is no limit to the number of graphs that can be displayed in a borehole Each graph can contain an unlimited number of points There are three types of graphs that can be used to display data These are single graphs double graphs and bar graphs histograms The type of graph and its display format are set in the template In addition to the graphs above borehole logs can contain SPT and Water Content graphs SPT graphs are used to display the N Values entered in the Sample Data These graphs are generated automatically by the program Water Content graphs are used to display water con tents and Atterberg limits The data entry for Water Content graphs 1s described in the Water Content section below Graph data can be entered and edited by selecting the Graph Data sub menu of the Edit menu and the selecting the name of the graph or by clicking the left mouse button inside the graph
317. ouse To adjust the size using the mouse follow the pro cedure below 1 Position the cursor at the boundary of the Table The cursor should change to a set of arrows and the Status line should display Edit Size of Table The orientation of the arrows will indicate the direction that the boundary can be changed 2 Press and hold the left mouse button down and drag the boundary to its new position 3 While dragging the boundary a rectangle will be displayed showing its current location 4 When the boundary is in the desired location release the left mouse button Moving a Table The position of the table can be changed using the Edit Table form above or by using the mouse To adjust the size using the mouse follow the procedure below 1 Position the cursor at the center of the Table The cursor should change to an arrow with a box and the Status line should display Move Table 2 Press and hold the left mouse button down and drag the boundary to its new position 3 While dragging the boundary a rectangle will be displayed showing its current location 4 When the boundary is in the desired location release the left mouse button WinLoG User s Guide Page Layout Page Layout The page layout is used to set the paper size and orientation for the printed borehole log To change the page layout select the Page Layout menu item from the Edit menu The Page Layout form below will be displayed Page Lay
318. ouse button at the start or end point of the line After performing one of the above tasks the Edit Lines form on the next page will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide Lines and Arrows Orientation Line Style Diagonal Horizontal Vertical The following information can be entered and edited using this form Orientation This is the orientation of the line either diagonal hori zontal or vertical If the orientation is set to horizontal the vertical position will be set to the y position of the start of the line If the orien tation is set to vertical the horizontal position will be set to the x posi tion of the start of the line Start X This is the horizontal position of the start of the line in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line the program will fill in this field The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Start Y This is the vertical position of the start of the line in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line the program will fill in this field End X This is the horizontal position of the end of the line in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line this field will be filled in by the pro gram WinLoG User s Guide 255 256 End Y This
319. ouse button down drag the mouse to the location of the lower right corner After the button has been released the Paragraph Text form will be displayed Paragraph Text F Arial 11 E B Position FU A sz FB en 1103 188 a 1103 158 1326 646 his is mty test Bottom 1326 646 Background Color Frame C Mo fe Yez Frame Width 5 Frame Color 44 pb H MX Cancel Help The following information can be entered and edited using this form Text This is the text for the paragraph There is no limit to the length of the text The Rich Text toolbar at the top of the form is used to for mat the text This toolbar is described at the bottom of this section Left This is the position of the left border of the paragraph in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the Paragraph button on the toolbar is used to create the paragraph the program will fill 1n this position The units of measurement are specified in the location map grid set tings WinLoG User s Guide Tip Floating paragraph text boxes can be added anywhere on the location map These text boxes are dis played over top of any information on the location map There is no limit to the number of paragraph text boxes that can be displayed Paragraph text boxes are typically used to add comments or a legend 79 80 Projects Right This is the position of the right border of the paragraph in real grid
320. out Size Letter T fe Inches E Millimeter Width 2 5 Length I Onentatia fe Portrait C Landscape x Cancel 7 Help The following information can be entered on the Page Layout form Size This is the page size of the template When the arrow at the right is pressed a list of available page sizes is displayed Inches or Millimeters The units for the width and length of the page These units will be used when specifying the layout of the legend If the Page Size is Custom the units can be set to either inches or mil limeters Width If the page size is specified as custom the page horizontal width in inches must be specified Length If the page size 1s specified as custom the page vertical length in inches must be specified Orientation This is the orientation of the page either portrait longer side 1s vertical or landscape longer side is horizontal WinLoG User s Guide 351 352 Templates Saving a Template m To save a template after it has been edited either select the Save Template menu item of the Templates submenu of the File menu or press the Save button on the template toolbar g To save the template under a different template name press the SaveAs button on the template toolbar The Enter Template Name form shown below will be displayed Enter a unique template name and then press the Ok button Enter Template ELE Existing Templates Completed T
321. out of the use or inability to use the prod uct or any breach of a warranty and the Distributor shall have no responsibility except to replace the Licensed Product pursuant to this limited warranty General 1 The laws of the Province of Ontario Canada shall govern the validity interpretation and performance of this License Agree ment 2 If any provision of this License Agreement is determined to be invalid under any applicable statute of rule of law it shall be deemed omitted and the remaining provisions shall continue in full force and effect 3 The entire agreement between the Distributor and the Licensee is embodied in this Agreement 4 Any modifications of this License Agreement shall be void unless appearing in writing signed by duly authorized representatives of the License and the Distributor 5 This License Agreement shall be binding upon and shall inure to the benefit of each party hereto and its successors and assigns except that any assignment of this License Agreement by the Licensee without the written consent of the Distributor shall be void Contents Introduction Features 0 00 eee eee eae Chapter 1 Getting Started The Distribution Package Required Equipment Installation 000 ee eee Requested Information Network Installation README File Uninstalling WinLoG Registering and Unlocking WinLoG Single User Registration Ne
322. own in the top right of the form It can be changed the same way as in the Data tab by clicking on the Edit Data Type button WinLoG User s Guide 163 164 Borehole Logs Borehole Data Number and Location Data Memos T Arial fio jm B Z U AS As E A Se 3 Get Mr Data Type Location 44 PH HX x Cancel Help ff OK At the top of the Memo tab is the Rich Text toolbar this toolbar can be used to modify the font characteristics of the memo text Before select ing a speed button the text to be modified should be selected with the mouse T Arial 10 E B 7 UAA E B Sp Aj Geet Er Data Type Locatior Z The speed buttons of the toolbar perform the following functions The Font Typeface box is used to E Arial select the name of the font to use for the selected text The Font Size box is used to set the size of the font for the Le selected text The Font Color box is used to select the color of the font for E the selected text WinLoG User s Guide HN m Ic Mi m y General Borehole Data The Bold button is used to toggle the bold attribute of the selected text on and off The Italics button is used to toggle the italic attribute of the selected text on and off The Underline button is used to toggle the underline attribute of the selected text on and off The Superscript button is used to toggle the superscript
323. p The Insert button adds a new bitmap The Delete button deletes this bitmap WinLoG User s Guide 383 384 Legends The following information can be entered and edited using this form File Name This is the name of the bitmap file to display on the tem plate To change the name of the file edit this name or click on the but ton to the right of the name If the button to the right is pressed an Open bitmap file form will be displayed Select the desired file and then press the Open button Stretch Bitmap Select yes to stretch the bitmap to fit within the speci fied borders If no 1s selected only the center of the bitmap and page can be entered for the position If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to add the bitmap Stretch Bitmap is set to No Maintain Aspect Ratio Select yes to keep the aspect ratio of the bitmap the same as stored in the file If yes is selected the bottom of the bitmap will be automatically adjusted to maintain the aspect ratio If Stretch Bitmap is set to No then this field will not be displayed and it is assumed that the aspect ratio 1s maintained Left This is the position of the left border of the bitmap in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to create the bitmap this field will not be displayed If Stretch Bitmap is set to No then this field will not be displayed The units of measurement are specified in the page l
324. p The Next button moves to the next data point d The End button moves to the last data point The Insert button creates a new data point The Delete button deletes the current data point 1 35 26 JH 3 32 ae a4 44 bp HHA X Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide 229 230 Borehole Logs The following information can be entered and edited for the water con tents Depth This is the depth of the water content measurement in the same units as set in the template Water Content This is the water content of the sample Plastic Limit This is the plastic limit of the sample Liquid Limit This is the liquid limit of the sample Symbol and Core Log Data Symbol and core logs are used to represent lithologic samples collected in a borehole that do not necessarily correspond with any lithologic layers There can be any number of symbol logs and only one core log for a borehole The lithologic symbols shown are independent of those specified in the lithology The data can be entered and edited by selecting the Symbol or Core Log menu items of the Edit menu or by clicking the left mouse button inside the Symbol or Core Log of the borehole log After performing one of the above tasks the Symbol or Core Log form shown on the next page will be displayed The buttons at the bottom of the form are used for the following ld The Start button displays the first sample 4 The Previous button displays the previo
325. paragraph Lines text Rectangles Bitmaps used to edit bitmaps Lines used to edit lines Rectangles used to edit rectangles Symbol Library Popup Menu If a symbol library is currently displayed on the desktop the Symbol Library Popup Menu will be displayed This popup menu contains the following commands Save saves the symbol library Save Close closes the symbol library En Print prints the symbol library Lithologie Symbols used to edit the litho Print logic symbols Lithology Symboks WinLoG User s Guide 19 Getting Started Toolbars There are five toolbars that can be displayed on the desktop they are the Project Toolbar Borehole Log Toolbar Template Toolbar Legend Toolbar and Symbol Library Toolbar The display of the toolbars is controlled in the View menu These toolbars can either float over top of the desktop or be docked to the top side or left side of the desktop 5 0 amp ot HE Bl 4920 End To make the toolbar float click and hole down the left mouse button on the edge 3 O E a m of the toolbar Then drag the mouse to i Ne where you want the toolbar and release the button The number of rows in the floating toolbar can be adjusted by rz changing the size of the toolbar with the La SE mouse its The toolbars can also be collapsed and expanded by clicking on the 3 letter toolbar name at the beginning of each toolbar Each toolbar contains
326. ph Reports e Geophysics Reports After a report has been generated you have the option to view print or export in 19 different output formats the reports Reports are generated using paket HE the Reports menu shown to Lithology Report the right For this menu to sample Report be active a project must be Water Level Report currently open Graph Report Geophysics Report General Reports General Reports General reports are used to summarize information contained within the General Borehole Data of each borehole in a project To generate a gen eral report select the General Report menu item from the Reports menu The General Report form below will be displayed This form allows the user to select from a list of general borehole data fields they would like to include in the report FA General Report o x Select the fields you would like to report Coordinate Coordinate Elevation Total Depth Preview E Print E Export x Cancel Help The user can select to report the following fields for the currently open project Borehole Number The Borehole Number 1s the name given to a spe cific borehole by the user at the time the borehole is entered into win log X Coordinate This is the East West location of the borehole in real grid coordinates of either feet or metres Y Coordinate This is the North South location of the borehole in real grid coordinates of either feet or metres
327. plates are used to control the layout and formatting of borehole logs In general all of the boreholes in a project would use one or two templates to format the logs In this way a consistent format can be established within a project and across projects Once a template is cre ated it is available to all projects The program comes with several easily customized templates which can be edited and saved as new templates Each template consists of a header footer and several columns Templates can be customized to display different header and footer titles number and type of columns and fonts In addition the size and location of the above can be easily changed using the mouse A company logo or site map stored as a bitmap can also be included in a template WinLoG User s Guide Introduction Legends can be created and customized to shown lithologic symbol well symbol and sample symbol definitions These legends can then be printed for inclusion with the borehole logs Borehole log template and legend data 1s stored in Microsoft Access databases By storing the data in Microsoft Access databases the data can be easily extracted for use in other programs The program is designed around the project concept where the user has numerous projects and within each project there are numerous borehole logs Projects can be stored on one computer or numerous computers within a network A master database 1s used to keep track of proj
328. play a variety of data In this tutorial we are going to change the graph column so that it will display con centrations of zinc obtained from lab analysis of samples To change the graph column click on the column with the left mouse button The Columns form will be displayed Change the Name of the column to zinc Next press the Customize Column button to modify the graph display The Customize Graph Columns form below will be displayed Change the following parameters Graph Title Zinc Units ppm Maximum 1200 Vertical Spacing 200 Connecting Line Style none press the Line Style button and select none for the line style WinLoG User s Guide Customizing the Graph Column Customize Graph Columns zinc Scales Gap at Edge Graph Zine Minimum jo fe No C Yes Maximum 1200 fzo 200 Cl Log Scale nits Pp Increment 200 fe No C Yes Show Gri Fill Area Under Curv Tone lice C No fe Yes LON Ao Ces SIZE i A Horizontal Spacing E Vertical Spacing 200 Color gt on Label Points gt Line Style f No Yes Press the Ok buttons on the Customize Graph Column and Columns form The template will now appear as shown below Wind ob Template Tutorial ik Fe ER View inden Hob l xi bla ZIE EE Di a APEK AEG ets OND a BE Haa BE A el A A Ee 24 E KOS s aan 4 H a oO Praject No Borehole Number Project ACME Consulting Company Client E
329. ple Data form on the next page will be displayed WinLoG User s Guide Geophysical Data Rezample Data Hezample Data No Benen Start Depth End Depth _ Depth Increment 0 a Add Offset x Cancel 7 Help The following parameters can be entered on this form Start Depth The depth to start importing data all samples from depths before the Start Depth will be ignored If Resample Data is set to No this field will not be displayed End Depth The depth to stop importing data all samples from depths after the End Depth will be ignored If Resample Data is set to No this field will not be displayed Depth Increment The increment to use between depths when import ing any samples at depths between increments will be ignored For example if the Depth Increment is 1 and the file contains samples at depths 1 1 1 6 and 2 1 The sample at depth 1 6 will be ignored If Resample Data is set to No this field will not be displayed Add Offset This is an offset depth to be added to the depths in the file This is used to adjust for instrument height if necessary If Resample Data is set to No this field will not be displayed WinLoG User s Guide 237 238 Borehole Logs After the above information has been entered the geophysical file will be imported When the file has been successfully imported the number of samples read will be displayed Deleting a Geophysical Log To de
330. porting a project it 1s very important that the correct Project ID be specified The Pro ject ID is used to determine the name of the database file to be imported For example if the Project ID is 98020 then the name of the database file to import would be 98020winlog mdb 88 Projects The following information can be entered and edited using this tab Scale Setting This radio button allows the user to change the scale set ting to either a dimensionless ratio or to a given distance in metres Location Map Scale This text box allows the user to enter the scale they wish to have the location map drawn at If the scale setting is at 1 unit 50 units then for example 1 metre on the print out is equal to 50 metres in the real world If the scale is linch 25 feet then 1 screen inch is equal to 12 25 300 inches in the real world Input Units Input units are the units that are stored in the database and that locations one the screen are stored in Display Units Display units are the units that are displayed on the screen For example the input units from the database can be in metres but the display units maybe feet Importing a Project Existing projects can be imported by selecting the Import Project menu item of the Projects submenu When selected the Import Project form below will be displayed Froject ID Project Mame x Cancel 7 Help Directory This form can be used to specify the followi
331. pt button is used to toggle the subscript attribute of the selected text on and off The Left Justify button will left justify the selected text The Center Justify button will center justify the selected text The Right Justify button will right justify the selected text The Select All button will select all of the text in the description The Cut button will remove the selected text and place it in the clipboard The Copy button will copy the selected text to the clipboard WinLoG User s Guide 401 402 Symbol Libraries A The Paste button will paste the text in the clipboard at the cur rent position of the cursor in the description see The Spell Check button will display the Spell Checker form 4 shown below and will check the spelling in the description The dictionary used to check the spelling is set in the program Preferences see Chapter 3 When the Add button is pressed the word will be appended to the custom dictionary Spell Checker Hot found trest Replace with M A Replace on Add Ei Skip Once Suggestions or Gkip Always 7 Suggest X Close ate WinLoG User s Guide Lithology Symbols Symbol Tab The Symbol tab is used to create and edit the symbols At the left side of the tab there is a toolbar used to edit the symbol Symbol Descriptions 4 p 4 b H ome io The buttons on the toolbar perform the following actions The Clear butto
332. q gt gt x Cancel 7 Help The Symbol tab shown above is used to edit the symbol At the left side of the tab there is a toolbar used to edit the symbol Some symbols which are drawn to scale can not be edited If the symbol can not be edited the toolbar will be empty WinLoG User s Guide 373 3 4 Legends The buttons on the toolbar perform the following actions The Clear button is used to erase the current symbol and provide a blank page The Import Picture button is used to import a bitmap picture re from a file into the current symbol When this button is pressed the Open bitmap form below will be displayed Select the bitmap file to import and then press the Open button Open KEI Look irr a _ Bitmaps amp al Al ci mal 40x40 jE acme bmp Bottom5 bmp Britizhl1 bmp Z Blank bmp z Bottom bmp he British 2 bmp he Botton bmp he Bottom bmp he British 3 bmp hee Battom2 bmp hee British 4 bmp hee Bottom bmp be British 5 bmp fee Bottom4 bmp hee British 0 bop hee British 6 bmp gt File name Bottom8 bmp Files of type AI gif brop ico ennf vmf Cancel ZF The Erase button is used to delete parts of the symbol When this button 1s pressed the cursor will change to an eraser To erase a part of the symbol hold the left mouse button down and move the cur sor over the area to be erased rr The Fill button is used to fill regions of symbols When this but
333. r Black Script western Template Font This is the font to use when drawing the titles of the header other then the main title When the Template Font button is pressed the Font form on the previous page will be displayed This form can be used to set the font name font size font style and color Log Font This is the font to use when drawing the borehole data of the header other then the main title When the Log Font button is pressed the Font form will be displayed This form can be used to set the font name font size font style and color Left This is the position of the left border of the header in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Right This is the position of the right border of the header in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page WinLoG User s Guide 299 300 Templates Top This is the position of the top border of the header in inches or millimeters from the top of the page Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the header in inches or millimeters from the top of the page The Layout tab and Page 2 Layout tab can also be used to edit the fol lowing footer information Show Footer If checked the footer will be displayed on the template If this is not checked the Footer tab and fields below will not be dis played Justification This sets the justification of t
334. r Integer SealBorderColor Long Integer sealBorderWidth Integer SealBorderStyle Integer Database Structure Data Type FieldSize Key TT Components Text BoreholeNumber Text WellNumber Text 1 ComponentNu Integer mber Component Text StartDepth Double Double Double Double Double Integer Text Long Integer Long Integer Integer Integer Integer EITENS ND Text BoreholeNumber Text WellNumber Text WaterLevelNumber Integer Double Double Text Integer Long Integer Integer Integer Database Structure DataType _ Field Size Key weloe Annotations 7 ProjectNumber Text BoreholeNumber Text Text AnnotationNumber Integer Text Double Double Double Double Integer Text Integer Integer Long Integer Integer Integer Table Name Field Name Data Type Field Size Key 1 ProjectNumber Text 100 BoreholeNumber Text 100 Integer 5 Double Double Integer StratumLibrary Text 255 FillSize Double StratumFGColor Long Integer StratumBGColor Long Integer StratumLineStyle Integer StratumLineWidth Integer StratumLineColor Integer Database Structure Data Type Field Size Key seer cone ree Text 100 BoreholeNumber Text 100 ParagraphNumber Integer Text Memo Sheet Integer Left Integer Right Integer Top Integer Bottom Integer Frame Yes No FrameW idth Integer TextColor Long Integer BGColor Long Integer FrameColor Long Integer Table Name
335. r Text Double Double Double Double Double Double Long Integer Long Integer Data Type Text Long Integer Double Double Double Double Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Field Size Field Size Database Structure Data Type Field Size Key PolyNumber plndex Long Integer Double Double Double Double Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Double Text Long Integer Long Integer Double Double Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Database Structure Data Type Feld Size Key ee ne LineNumber ArrowPosition ArrowSize ArrowNumber FileName ProjectNumber ParaNumber Text Long Integer Double Double Double Double Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Text Long Integer Text Double Double Double Double Double Double Long Integer Long Integer Text Long Integer Long Integer Memo Double Double Double Double Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer 100 ij 200 Database Structure Table Name Field Name Data Type Field Size Key TE ProjectNumber BoreholeNumber nn BoreholeNumber Text Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Long Integer Text Long I
336. r 1s used to create the rectangle the program will fill in this posi tion The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Right This is the position of the right border of the rectangle in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Rectangle button on the toolbar is used to create the rectangle this position will be filled in by the program WinLoG User s Guide 343 344 Templates Top This is the position of the top border of the rectangle in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Rectangle button on the toolbar is used to create the rectangle this position will be filled in by the program Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the rectangle in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Rectangle button on the toolbar is used to create the rectangle this position will be filled in by the program Line Style This is the style of the rectangle border The line style can be changed by pressing the Line Style button A Line Properties form will then be displayed Using this form the style color and width of the rectangle can be set Fill Color This is the color to use to fill the inside of the rectangle When the Fill Color button is pressed a Color form will be displayed Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color can be specified WinLoG User s Guide Tables Tables Floating tables can be added anywher
337. r Name Well Completion Zine Details PPM a 200 BOO 1000 1 ototod oa JPA Sand and Gravel Fill io Loose helerogeneous sity Clay Mottled brown and grey silty clay with embedded sand and gravel Edit Elevation Modified Sheet lef i ae WinLoG User s Guide Adding Sample Data Adding Sample Data Each sample can have a sample number top depth length sample type blows ft recovery and other data At a minimum the sample number top depth and length must be entered for each sample To enter the sample data for the borehole log click on any of the sam ple columns with the left mouse button The information shown on the Sample Data form below should be entered for the sample data To enter the next sample press the tab key when at the end of a line or press the Add button at the bottom of the form 0 55 1 cia 40 1 2 25 2 55 2 55 3 5 2 55 18 65 4 75 2 55 O2 50 5 10 2 55 2 T E 12 5 2 55 2 ey 2 55 HA Pb NH X x Cancel 7 Help After the sample data has been added the borehole log will appear as shown on the next page WinLoG User s Guide 53 Tutorial Winlab Project Tutorial Progect Borehaole 101 elk File Fet vine window Hein la xi HES E ECA Ee a ee e E 0 S El En amp Ez gs A o Gp t th T a tel os oO i E S C k 5 fa EL Ic el YY El B s Eil Praject No 2000 Borehole Number
338. r is specified these symbols will fill the gap between the inner and outer diameter with the background color Except for the third symbol which will fill the gap with the foreground color Line Width i FA Es Background i i DO0DOODI TITTEN BEELEN ONN CEE MIM IIOL o a IMIN WW D Q WinLoG User s Guide 201 202 Borehole Logs Seal Packing or Bottom Seal If the type of component is Seal Packing or Bottom Seal then the Well Seal Packing form below will be displayed This form 1s used to select the litho logic library foreground and background colors line width vertical and horizontal borders and symbol for the seal or packing The line style used for the vertical and horizontal borders is set in the Layout tab If the component 1s not a Bot tom Seal and the inner diameter is specified these symbols will fill the gap between the inner and outer diameter with the selected symbol A Bottom Seal will fill everything between the outer diameter and any interior components with the selected symbol Well Seal Packing Library Igneous and Metam Fill Size fi A Foreground 1 Vertical Border a Joint Misc If the type of component 1s Joint Misc then the Joints Miscellaneous form on the next page will be displayed This form is used to select the foreground and background col ors line width and symbol The first 6 symbols are used to represent couplings between pipes A
339. r it has been edited either select the Save Fi Legend menu item of the Legends submenu of the File menu or press the Save button on the legend toolbar wy To save the legend under a different name press the SaveAs but ton on the legend toolbar The Enter Legend Name form shown below will be displayed Enter a unique legend name and then press the Ok button Enter Legend Name Existing Legends British USCS Unique Legend Mame wf Ok x Cancel 7 Help Deleting a Legend To delete a legend select the Delete Legend menu item from the Leg ends submenu of the File Menu The Delete Legends form will be dis played A single legend can be selected by clicking on it and pressing the Open button A range of legends can be selected by clicking on the beginning of the range and then holding down the Shift key while clieking on the end of the range Multiple legends can be selected by holding down the CTRL key while clicking on the legends WinLoG User s Guide 393 Legends amp Printing a Legend To print a legend either click the right mouse button and select the Print menu item from the popup menu or press the Print button on the legend toolbar 394 WinLoG Users Guide Legends Symbol Descriptions Description Symbol L Ta a Kk 5 x L _ OQ amp 4 4 gt Pl Legends Legends are used to provide descriptions for the litho logic symbols well components and sample s
340. r the horizontal axis of the profile If the value is zero the program will calculate the maximum value based on the data specified Increment This is the increment to use for labeling the horizontal axis of the profile If the value is zero the program will calculate the incre ment based on the data specified Gap at Edges This is used to select whether there should be a gap on the left and right sides of the column By putting a gap on the sides there will be room to display the minimum and maximum labels of the profile within the column Show Grid To draw horizontal and vertical grid lines set Show Grid to yes Horizontal Spacing This is the horizontal spacing of the grid lines usually the same as the scale increment If set to zero the scale incre ment will be used If Show Grid 1s set to no this field will not appear WinLoG User s Guide Deviation Survey Column Vertical Spacing This is the vertical spacing of the grid lines usually the same as the scale increment If set to zero the scale increment will be used If Show Grid is set to no this field will not appear Grid Line Style This is the line style to use to draw the grid When the Line Style button is pressed a Line Properties form will be dis played This form can be used to set the line style width and color Connecting Line Style The data points for the profile can be con nected by a line To change the line style press the Line Style button A Lin
341. re directories on your hard disk and copies the contents of the WinLoG disk into them 2 Creates a Windows application group and installs the WinLoG pro gram and help icons A complete list of files that are copied and the directories they are copied to is provided in Appendix C Requested Information The installation dialog boxes will request the directories to store the WinLoG program and databases and the name of the application group for the WinLoG program icons WinLoG User s Guide Tip If you are re installing or upgrad ing the program select Custom Setup Using Custom Setup you can select not to install the empty databases this will avoid over writing your existing databases Tip When installing a second user on a network do not install the data bases from the CD This will over write the existing master and main databases on the server Tip When installing WinLoG on a client PC specify the directory on the server where the master data base is stored as the main database directory 4 Getting Started Network Installation The following items should be checked before installing WinLoG on a network 1 Ensure that you have sufficient network rights to the drive on which you will install WinLoG on Windows NT XP and 2000 systems you will need to have system administrator privileges 2 Check to see if you have sufficient disk space available for the pro gram files at least 32 MB
342. real grid coordinates of either feet or meters Line Style Button Clicking the line style button opens a Line proper ties form on which the user can user select the type of grid lines WinLoG User s Guide Location Map Toolbar Axis Tab The Axis Tab sets the horizontal and vertical axis defaults for the pro ject location map Location Map Preferences Form 2 O x Vertical and Horizontal Axis Defaults n Horizontal Axis Minor Tic Interval ID o Yes Major Tic Interval 200 ae Verca EUS Minor Tic Interval i 0 a ie Yes Hajar Tic Interval 200 Line Style Font X Cancel Help The following information can be entered and edited using this tab Show Horizontal Axis This radio button allows the user to turn the Horizontal axis on the location map on or off Show Vertical Axis This radio button allows the user to turn the Verti cal axis of the location map on or off Min Tic Interval This is interval in feet or metres at which small tic occurs on both the horizontal and vertical axis of the location map The units of measurement are specified on the Units tab Max Tic Interval This is interval in feet or metres at which large tics and axis labels occurs on both the horizontal and vertical axis of the location map The units of measurement are specified on the Units tab Line Style Button Clicking the Line Style button opens a Line Proper ties form on which the user can user sel
343. rientation of the arrows will indicate the direction that the boundary can be changed 2 Press and hold the left mouse button down and drag the boundary to its new position 3 While dragging the boundary a rectangle will be displayed showing its current location 4 When the boundary is in the desired location release the left mouse button WinLoG User s Guide 339 Tip If your bitmaps are not in Win dows BMP format there are plenty of free programs that can be used to convert them Check GAEA s web site for links to them 336 Templates Bitmaps Bitmaps contained in Windows bitmap BMP files can be added any where on a template These bitmaps can be used to show company logos site plans legends and other graphical information Bitmaps are displayed over top of any information on the template There is no limit to the number of bitmaps that can be displayed Lj Adding a Bitmap There are two methods that can be used to add a bitmap to a template 1 By clicking on the Bitmap button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the center of the bitmap The Open form below will then be displayed Select the bitmap file and then press the Open button 2 By selecting the Bitmaps menu item from the Edit menu or Popup menu and then clicking on the Add button on the form The Open form below will then be displayed Select the bitmap file and then press the Open button Usin
344. ring borehole data WinLoG User s Guide Headers and Footers Left This is the horizontal position of the title in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the footer is left justified the title will start at this position If the footer is right justified the title will end at this position The units of measurement are specified in the page lay out Top This is the vertical position of the title in inches or millimeters from the top of the page Width This is the horizontal width of the title and borehole data in inches or millimeters If set to zero then the width is not used The width should only be used when specifying footer lines for memo data Height This is the vertical height of the title and borehole data in inches or millimeters If set to zero then the height is not used The height should only be used when specifying footer lines for memo data Layout Tab Template Header and Footer Entry Header W Show Justification Title Font Template rom Tompizte Font Color Lag Font hs Line Style Footer Justification W Show Template Font y Calor im Log Font Line Style x Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide 297 298 Templates The Layout tab and Page 2 Layout tab shown on the previous page can be used to edit the following header information Show Header If checked the header will be displayed on
345. riptions can be edited for this type of well However only the Packing symbols can be edited since the other sym bols are drawn to scale by the program 3 For a Type 3 well there will be 12 symbols for Well Covers 12 sym bols for Well Caps 30 symbols for Casings amp Screens and 12 symbols for Joints amp Miscellaneous Lithologic libraries are used for the seal and packing symbols in this type of well All of the descriptions can be edited for this type of well However none of the symbols can be edited since they are all drawn to scale by the program The well symbols and descriptions in the legend can be changed by selecting the well symbol menu item from the Well Symbols submenu of the Edit menu or click the left mouse button on one of the well sym bols in the legend After one of the above tasks has been performed the Symbol Descriptions form will be displayed This form has two tabs one for the description and one for the symbol This form is identical for lithologic symbols well symbols and sample symbols The use of this form is described in the Symbol Descriptions section below Sample Symbols Symbols for the sample types can be displayed in the legend This option 1s selected when the legend 1s created There are 30 different sample symbols The sample symbols and descriptions in the legend can be changed by selecting the lithologic library from the Sample Symbols menu item of the Edit menu or click the left mouse bu
346. rks Well Macros ee ee Graph Data d Import Export Data Geophysical Data Back Up Winlog Text Intervals Symbol Logs gt H POERA Pa Water Content Data Print Facies Print Setup Constituents ee Members Preferences Paragraph Text Exit Bitmaps Lines Rectangles Deviation Survey Tables Import Excel Log Data Import Excel Project Data Import Deviation Survey a a tor Templates see Chapter 5 Templates are used to control the layout and formatting of borehole logs In general all of the boreholes in a project would use one or two templates to format the logs In this way a con sistent format can be established within a project and across projects boss Bo Ba 25 Borehole Log Toolbar WinLoG User s Guide Creating a New Borehole Log Creating a New Borehole Log After a project has been opened or created borehole logs can be added to the project by importing borehole logs see Chapter 3 or creating new borehole logs To create a new borehole log and add it to the current project either select the New Borehole Log menu item of the Borehole Logs sub menu of the File menu or click the New button on the Borehole Log Toolbar The Select Template form below will be displayed after the new borehole button or menu item has been selected The Templates list box displays the names of all of the templates currently in the Mas ter database Select Template Templates Environmenta
347. rm shown on the next page either select the Columns menu item from the Edit menu or click the left mouse button inside the column of the template The Columns form has two tabs one for the columns and one for the layout of the columns If the template has two pages this form will have four tabs as shown below two for the first page and two for the second page Data entry and editing for the second page is identical to the first page which is described in detail below WinLoG User s Guide 303 304 Templates pe Type of Column Lithologic Description f Horizontal Vertical Lithologic Symbol l Text Mame Description Sample Humber Sample Type Sample Symbol Sample H Yalue l l Sample Recovery e Right Line Type Sample Lithologie Symbol Sample Other Position 2 1 Well Type 1 Well Type 2 Well Type 3 ew Use Default A taum ont Graph Double Graph SPT Graph Water Content Graph Customize Column Bar Graph HA PH HX x Cancel 7 Help The buttons at the bottom of the tabs are used for the following lq The Start button moves to the first column 4 The Previous button moves to the previous column k The Next button moves to the next column PL The End button moves to the last column The Insert button creates a new column a The Delete button deletes the column Columns Tab The Columns tab and Page 2 Columns tab shown above can be used to edit the following informati
348. rmats are discussed in detail in the sections below WinLoG User s Guide Importing Version 1 and 2 WinLoG Data Importing Version 1 and 2 WinLoG Data Borehole logs templates and legends from versions and 2 of Win LoG can be imported by selecting the Import Version 2 Data submenu from the Import submenu of the Import Export Data submenu The borehole logs will be imported into the current project if no project is currently opened then this option will be dimmed and unavailable Templates and legends will be imported into the WinLoG Master Data base and will be available to all projects Borehole Logs To import version 2 borehole logs into a project select the Logs menu item from the Import Version 2 Data submenu The Import Version 2 Log Files form will be displayed as shown below Import ersion 1 and 2 Log Files Ei Ed Look ir E Logs El ce aal EnvtechS log al Geotech log COO log Envtechb log a Geotech3 log E Envtech lag Envtech log Geotech4 log a Envtechz log Geophy log Tutorial log Envteachs log Geophys log E Utility1 log a Envtech4 lag Geotech log Weaterl log Files of type Version 1 and 2 Log Files Cancel Help A single borehole log can be selected by clicking on it and pressing the Open button A range of borehole logs can be selected by clicking on the beginning of the range and then holding down the Shift key while clicking on the end of the range Multiple logs can b
349. ro Dual Piezometer simple Fiezameter 4 4p WM X X Cancel Help An existing well macro can be edited by double clicking on it in the list To add a new well macro click on the plus button at the bottom of the form WinLoG User s Guide Setting Program Preferences The creation and editing of the well macros use the same form as that used for Well Type 3 data This form has four tabs for the Layout Com ponents Water Levels and Annotation For a detailed description on how to use this form see the section entitled Well 3 Type Column in the Borehole Logs chapter Well macros can also be created after the well data has been input for a log using the Save as Well Macro button on the Well form When this button is pressed a form will be displayed where you can specify the name of the well macro setting Program Preferences Using the Preferences menu item of the File menu preferences for file directories and display characteristics can be set for the WinLoG pro gram When this menu item is selected the Preferences form below is displayed This form has six tabs that are described below Preferences Fage Directories Other Location Map Deviation Survey Auto Backup Show Page Shadow Color Page Label Page Page Separator of we Auto scale line width for printing X Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide 143 144 Projects Page Tab The following parameters ca
350. roject list database was backed up Select the database you wish to restore and then press the Ok button WinLoG User s Guide 93 94 Projects Mi select Backup Database Date Time Information File Name 1570172003 3 14 13 AM 3r E36 364951 9329 gaeaproject bak 15 01 2003 10 09 16 AM Sf GS6 425 1056458 gaeaproject bak 1570172003 10 39 16 AM 3r E36 443940451 4 gaeaproject bak 1570172003 5 22 25 PM 3r 636 6406067 708 gaeaproject bak i 1570172003 3 52 28 PM 3r 636 661 4390394_gaeaproject bak S7636 6922 724653 gaeaproject bak y OF x Cancel Help Restoring the Main Database To restore a backup of the Main Database select the Main Database List menu item from the Restore Backup Database submenu of the Projects submenu from the File menu A confirmation form will be displayed select yes to continue and the Select Backup Database form below will be displayed Mi select Backup Database O x pae Tee nomai 72003 9 14 19 AM 37636 3849493866_winlog bak 15 01 2003 10 09 16 AM 37636 4231062153_winlog bak 15 01 2003 10 39 16 AM 37636 4439396412_winlog bak 15 01 2003 3 22 28 PM 37636 6406045718_winlog bak 15 01 2003 3 52 28 PM 37636 6614379977_winlog bak 15 01 2003 4 22 25 PM 37636 6822714236_winlog bak XC Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide Backing Up All WinLoG Data The Select Backup Database form lists all the backup databases for the main database The d
351. round cover with locking cap water depth in the well measured at 8 5 feet on January 31 2000 Before entering the well completion details the start depth of the bore hole needs to be adjusted to allow for the aboveground cover To change the start depth click on the depth column with the left mouse button The Depths amp Elevation form below will be displayed Enter the Start Depth as 2 feet Depths amp Elevations Log Depths Elevation Start Depth E End Depth jis Optional Specify Depth Page f Depth Scale Depth Page jo x Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide Tip Negative depths are interpreted to be above ground by the program To display aboveground well com pletions enter a negative depth 55 56 Tutorial To enter the well completion details click on the well column with the left mouse button The Layout tab of the Well Data form on the next page will be displayed Enter the layout information shown on the tab Well well Data Layout Components Water Levels Annotations Hale Diameter Ik Column Width Ke Seal Line Style _ Edit Name ff OK x Cancel 7 Help Click on the Components tab at the top of the form and enter the well components shown below When selecting the symbol for the bottom seal specify the Horizontal Border as Bottom When selecting the symbol for the sand packing specify the Horizontal Border as T
352. rve hold down the left mouse button and move the mouse When finished drawing the line release the mouse button WinLoG User s Guide Symbol Descriptions The Line button is used to draw a straight line on the symbol When pressed the cursor will change to a pencil To draw a line press and hold down the left mouse button at the start of the line Move the mouse to the end of the line and release the mouse button The Rectangle button is used to draw a hollow rectangle on the symbol When pressed the cursor will change to a cross To draw a rectangle press and hold down the left mouse button at the upper left corner of the rectangle Move the mouse to the lower right corner of the rectangle and release the mouse button The Filled Rectangle button is used to draw a filled rectangle on the symbol When pressed the cursor will change to a cross To draw a rectangle press and hold down the left mouse button at the upper left corner of the rectangle Move the mouse to the lower right corner of the rectangle and release the mouse button The Ellipse button 1s used to draw a hollow ellipse on the symbol When pressed the cursor will change to a cross To draw an ellipse press and hold down the left mouse button at the upper left cor ner of the ellipse Move the mouse to the lower right corner of the ellipse and release the mouse button The Filled Ellipse button is used to draw a filled ellipse on the symbol
353. s played To add anew Text Interval dataset specify a unique name for the dataset and the type of dataset to create The text interval data for this dataset will not be displayed on the borehole log unless the tem plate contains a Text Interval column with the same name Add Text Interval Column Name WinLoG User s Guide 219 220 Borehole Logs Deleting a Text Interval Dataset To delete a text interval dataset from a borehole log select the Delete Text Interval Type menu item of the Text Intervals submenu of the Edit menu The Delete Text Interval form below will be displayed Select the dataset to be deleted and press the Ok button Delete Text Interval Sediment Structure Fossils Grain Size Sorting Contacts Meterage Unlinked Column x Cancel Facies Data Facies data is treated the same way as text interval data The entry and editing of the data is the same as described above Facies columns can also be linked to text interval columns If the Facies column is not linked then the Facies form will be displayed for this column This form is identical to the Text Interval form WinLoG User s Guide Constituents Data Constituents Data Constituents data is treated the same way as facies and text interval data The entry and editing of the data is the same as described above Constituents columns can also be linked to text interval columns If the Constituents column is not linked t
354. s and do not have any page breaks They are usually printed on tracker feed printers and are used for Geophysical and Mud logging applications e Program can now automatically update itself to the most recent ver sion The program searches GAEA Technologies website for any new upgrades to winlog and upgrades the program if the agreed to by the user e Program now has online technical support where it can email techni cal support all relevant files and information if there is a problem e Borehole data can be exported to excel e Project databases can be compressed to save disk space and speed up data access e A new column type has been added to support percent splits This is used to show the percentages of different lithologies in a layer e A new column type has been added to support core photographs This is used to show the pictures of cores or downhole images e All of the WinLoG databases Project Project List Main Database are automatically backed up and can be easily restored WinLoG User s Guide yi Introduction Graphical User Interface Features e Standard pulledown menus and status line e Five floating and dockable toolbars containing the most commonly used commands e Multiple windows support e Oneline context sensitive help e Borehole logs can be zoomed in and out e Borehole logs can be scrolled between pages e Support for all Windows fonts printers and displays e Support for Imperi
355. s are typically used to add comments or a legend that applies to the entire log Adding a Paragraph There are two methods that can be used to add a Paragraph Text box to a log 1 By clicking on the Paragraph button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the upper left corner of the paragraph text box Then while holding the left mouse button down drag the mouse to the location of the lower right corner and then release the mouse button While the mouse button is held down a mar quee box will be drawn to indicate the location of the paragraph box After the button has been released the Paragraph Text form shown in the section below will be displayed 2 By selecting the Paragraph Text menu item from the Edit menu or Popup menu and then clicking on the Add button on the Paragraph Text form This will create a new paragraph Using this method the location of the paragraph must be specified on the form as described below WinLoG User s Guide 245 246 Borehole Logs Editing a Paragraph Existing Paragraph data can be edited by selecting the Paragraph Text menu item of the Edit menu or clicking the left mouse button inside the Paragraph Text of the log After performing one of the above tasks the Paragraph Text form below will be displayed T Arial afo Am Bz ue e EE a Background coal Fram Mo fe Yez Frame Width fi A Frame Color 44 pH A x Canc
356. s chapter describes how to 1 Create a new legend 2 Enter and edit the following information Titles and Layout Lithology Symbols Well Symbols Sample Symbols Paragraph text Bitmaps Lines and arrows Rectangles Page Layout 3 Save a legend 4 Delete a legend 5 Print a legend WinLoG User s Guide 359 Legends These tasks can be performed using menu commands on the File menu and Edit menus or speed buttons on the Legend toolbar shown below File Menu Edit Menu TEE LEGT mpraet E r TNT at at a el AE ratiti Legend Toolbar 360 WinLoG User s Guide Creating a New Legend Creating a New Legend Since legends are stored in the WinLoG master database they can be created and edited at any time no project has to be open To create a legend either select the New Legend menu item of the Legends sub menu of the File menu or click the New button on the Legend Toolbar After one of the above tasks is performed the New Legend form above will be displayed This form has two tabs one for the layout of the leg end and one for the page setup Layout Tab Layout Page Setup Lithologic Libraries Show Well Symbol amp None Common Symbols Igneous and Metamorphic Rocks Well Type 1 Sands and Gravelz sedimentary Rocks C Well Type 2 Silts and Clays USCS Symbols Well Materials British Symbols USGS Sedimentary 1 C Well Type 3
357. s edge to pick the object This setting is used when adjusting the size and position of columns layers lines etc A setting between 5 and 10 is recommended Template Access Click on this button to change the template database to and from read only access The Template Access Form will then be displayed Enter the password Call GAEA for the password Click the type of access you would like the user to have either i Template Access Form a Read only Access the user can only view templates and use them to Password create logs F Read Only Access b Read and Write Access the user Head and Write Access has both read and wrote access on templates legends and symbol XC Cancel libraries Default Lithology Library The default library to use when specifying lithology symbols for soil and rock layers Select the library by clicking on the arrow to the right Default Template This is the default template to use when creating a new borehole log The template can be selected by clicking on the arrow to the right WinLoG User s Guide Tip In many companies it is some times advantageous to have only one or two employees that have access to all the companies Tem plates Lithologies libraries and Text Macros This can be accom plished by the system administra tor changing the read write preferences of the template data base 147 148 Projects Default Well Diameter This is the default
358. s of measurement are specified in the page layout Right This is the position of the right border of the paragraph in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Paragraph button on the toolbar is used to create the paragraph this position will be filled in by the program Top This is the position of the top border of the paragraph in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Paragraph button on the toolbar is used to create the paragraph this position will be filled in by the program Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the paragraph in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Paragraph button on the toolbar is used to create the paragraph this position will be filled in by the program Background Color This is the background color of the paragraph text box When the Background Color button is pressed a Color form is displayed Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color can be specified Frame Select yes to display a frame around the paragraph text Frame Width This is the line width of the frame around the paragraph text If no frame is selected above this field will not be displayed Frame Color This is the color of the frame to display around the para graph text When the Frame Color button is pressed a Color form is dis played Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color can be specified If no frame is selected abo
359. s on the depth axis Labels This is used to turn the depth labels on and off If the labels are turned off the depth axis will be drawn with tics only Number of Digits after Decimal This is the number of digits to dis play after the decimal in the labels For example if the number of digits is 1 then the depth 2 feet will be labeled as 2 0 WinLoG User s Guide 311 312 Templates Elevation Column The style of the elevation column can be changed by selecting the Ele vation column and using the Customize button on the Columns tab When the Customize button is pressed the Customize Elevation Col umn form below will be displayed Customize Elevation Column Show Elevations As Laver Styl f Elevations Only f Depths and Elevations Depths Only Display Unit te Feet Metres Ne Line style Number of Digits after the Decimal jo x Cancel Help The Customize Elevation Column form above can be used to set the following parameters Show Elevations As Elevations can be displayed as layers or tics If layers is selected a line will be drawn across the elevation column at each layer boundary and the elevation displayed If tics is selected the elevation will be displayed at regular intervals similar to the depth column Layer Style If the elevations are displayed as layers then elevation only elevation and depth or depths only can be displayed at each
360. s sub menu of the File menu clicking the right mouse button and select the Open Borehole menu item from the popup menu or clicking the Open button on the Borehole Log Toolbar After the borehole log has been opened and displayed the borehole data can be entered and edited as described in the sections below WinLoG User s Guide General Borehole Data General Borehole Data The General Borehole Data for a log includes information about the borehole number X and Y coordinates well symbol text and memo information Text and memo information can include information such as project name location client date drill method etc The difference between text data and memo data is that there is no limit to the length of memo data and memo data can contain rich text General Borehole data 1s usually displayed in the header and footer of the log The template being used determines the location of the data Unlike previous versions of WinLoG the general data is now tied to the type of data in the template This way if the template 1s edited or a dif ferent template 1s used the data will move depending upon the location within the template For example if the data is for the location of the borehole and in the template the location is the first line of the header If later the template is edited and the location is moved to the third line of the footer when the borehole log 1s displayed the location will show up in the third l
361. s used to create the rectangle the position will be filled in by the pro gram otherwise the user will have to enter in the position Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the rectangle in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the rectangle button on the toolbar 1s used to create the rectangle the position will be filled in by the program otherwise the user will have to enter in the position Line Style Clicking the Line Style button opens a Line properties form on which the user can user select the Line Style Solid Dashed Dash Dot etc thickness and color of the line Fill Color Clicking the Fill Color button open up the Color form from which the user can select the color they wish to have on the interior of the rectangle gt Ellipse Tool The ellipse tool allows the user to place an ellipse anywhere on the location map To use the Ellipse tool select it by clicking once on the Ellipse tool button Then click and hold down the left mouse button at the upper left hand corner of the ellipse and drag the cursor across the screen to the bottom right hand corner of the ellipse Once this is done the program will open the Edit Ellipse form on the next page WinLoG User s Guide Location Map Toolbar Edit Ellipses Ellipses Line Style Fill Color ROD ON X The following can be edited on this form Left This is the position of the left border of the e
362. se 3 Polyline Tool The Polyline tool allows the user to place a polyline anywhere on the location map To use the Polyline tool select it by clicking on the poly line tool button Then click the left mouse button at the first point of the polyline Move the cursor to the second point of the polyline then left click there as well The user can continue to add points to their polyline until all points have been added Then to finish the polyline simply click the right mouse button Once this 1s done the program will open the Edit Polygons form below Edit Polygons a i S Polygons s202 FEE Point 2 124 469 396 Point 3 A 435 000 Paint 6 l r204 Point 7 514 375 392 667 M i ee O Oana Aa Insert Point Delete Point ht Line Style HAP di ea X Cancel Help The following can be edited on this form Point Coordinates All point coordinates are in true grid coordinates 1283 N 284 Eis 1283 284 in meters or feet Line Style Clicking the Line Style button opens a Line Properties form on which the user can user select the Line Style Solid Dashed Dash Dot etc thickness and color of the line WinLoG User s Guide Location Map Toolbar Paragraph Tool To add a Paragraph Text box to the location map click on the Paragraph button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the upper left corner if the paragraph textbox Then while holding the left m
363. se button When clieking on the column make sure you click the mouse on the left side of the column since the column does not extend to the right edge of the template yet In the Columns form shown below change the following parameters Title Well Completion Details Orientation Horizontal Right Line Position 8 By changing the right line position to 8 the well column will now extend to the right side of the template Columns Layout ipe Completion Details Type of Column Lithologic Description Lithologic Symbol Test Hame ell Data Sample Number fe Horizontat C Vertical Ke Right Line Type Position E F Use Default Column Font AL Customize Column 44 PH HX x Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide 41 42 Tutorial After the above parameters are changed and the Ok button is pressed the modified template will appear as shown below ok Fie Edi View winden Help l xi ipa BEAR etheen Sem nel NE EE NEET TE EAA Fiel lose Wag aan ata oO Project No Borehole Number Projet ACME Consulting Company Client Enel e 44 Canadian Oaks Drive nen Viehiiby Onlan Site Location Geologist SUBSURFACE PROFILE SAMPLE n Well Completion 5 a Ine Details Desonplion 3 g 5 0 ppm IEN a ils 200 600 1000 L 5 I I I I i f Echt wel Ciste Cohuni Modied Sheet 1 of 1 Saving the Template After the modifications discussed above have been completed the cus t
364. sed the Import Excel Deviation Survey Form will contain three rows and three columns as shown on the next page WinLoG User s Guide 277 2 8 Borehole Logs Import Excel Deviation Survey File Mame C DevSurven L5 Measured Depth Select Inclination Azimuth y OF x Cancel Help The Row Headers are Measured Depth The measured depth at which a deviation survey reading was taken Inclination This is the dip of the borehole from true vertical Azimuth The azimuth az angle is the compass bearing relative to true geographic north of a point on the horizon directly beneath an observed object The horizon is defined as a huge imaginary circle cen tered on the observer equidistant from the zenith point straight over head The Column Headers are Data Type The data type to be stored in a cell Cells The cells chosen from the spread sheet for a data type In gen eral you should choose the same number of cells for the measured Depth as you do for the Inclination and azimuth Select Clicking the select column once shows the Select button for that row Double clicking it opens up the This column opens up a Excel Spread sheet from which you can select the deviated survey data WinLoG User s Guide Importing Deviation Survey Data To add Measured Depth data click on the Select column and then click on the Select button This will display the Excel spreadsheet on the Excel Spr
365. selected text a The Select All button will select all of the text in the memo field y The Cut button will remove the selected text and place it in the clipboard The Copy button will copy the selected text to the clipboard The Paste button will paste the text in the clipboard at the current position of the cursor in the text field SF The Replace button will replace the specified text in the text field The Symbol button will display a Symbol form This form is used to place a symbol at the current cursor position in the text field To select a symbol use the Font box to select the font containing the sym bol and then select the desired symbol After the desired symbol has been selected press the Ok button to insert it into the text field The WinLoG program comes with a font called GAEA Symbols that con tains a variety of well and other symbols w The Spell Check button will display a Spell Checker form and will check the spelling in the text field The dictionary used to check the spelling is set in the program Preferences see Chapter 3 When the Add button is pressed the word will be appended to the cus tom dictionary 380 WinLoG User s Guide Bitmaps Sizing a Paragraph The size of the paragraph can be changed using the Paragraph Text form above or the mouse To adjust the size using the mouse follow the procedure below 1 Position the cursor at the boundary of the paragraph The cursor sho
366. sert button creates a new title The Delete button deletes the title 204 WinLoG User s Guide Headers and Footers Headers Tab The Headers tab and Page 2 Headers tab shown on the previous page can be used to edit the following information Current Title This is the current title of the header line New Title This is the new title to use for the header line up to 255 characters It defines the type of data for the borehole log The title will be used to prompt for information when entering borehole data If the title is for text data or a checkbox it will be displayed on the bore hole log If the title 1s for memo data it will not be displayed on the borehole log If the title 1s Sheet or Page the sheet number of the bore hole log will be automatically filled in by the program Checkbox If checked a checkbox will be displayed to the right of the title This checkbox can then be checked and unchecked when entering borehole data Left This is the horizontal position of the title in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the header is left justified the title will start at this position If the header is right justified the title will end at this position The units of measurement are specified in the page lay out Top This is the vertical position of the title in inches or millimeters from the top of the page Width This is the horizontal width of the title and borehole data in inches
367. sition with the arrowhead size of their choice The following can be edited from this form Start X This is the horizontal position of the start of the line in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line the program will fill in the position otherwise the user will have to enter in the position Start Y This is the vertical position of the start of the line in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line the program will fill in the position otherwise the user will have to enter in the position WinLoG User s Guide Location Map Toolbar End X This is the horizontal position of the end of the line in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line the program will fill in the position otherwise the user will have to enter in the position End Y This is the vertical position of the end of the line in real grid coordinates either feet or meters If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line the program will fill in the position otherwise the user will have to enter in the position Line Style Clicking the Line Style button opens a Line properties form on which the user can select the Line Style Solid Dashed Dash Dot etc thickness and color of the line _ Rectangle Tool The Rectangle Tool allows the user to place
368. sociated with these types Width This is the width of each column in inches By adjusting the Width and X position more than one set of symbols can be drawn across the page WinLoG User s Guide 365 366 Legends Layout Tab Titles amp Layout Titles Layout hs Line Style Border Position n E Right Top Main Title Font Title Font Well Title Font Bottom Horizontal Bitmap Size 30 Vertical Bitmap Size 20 Th layout tab shown above is used to enter and edit the following infor mation for the legend Main Title Font This is the font to use for the main title of the legend When the button is pressed the Font form below is displayed This form can be used to select the font name style size and color Font Ei Ed Font Font style Size Cancel Arial Black d Italic Fr Arial Narrow Fp Arial Narrow Special G Fr Arial Narrow Special G F Arial Rounded MT Bol FP Arial Special G1 Effects Sample T Strikeout Underline AaB b Yy2z Color Maroon ki Script Wester WinLoG User s Guide Titles and Layout Title Font This is the font to use for the lithologic library title well symbols title and sample symbols title When the button 1s pressed the Font form shown on the previous page is displayed This form can be used to select the font name style size and color Well Title Font This is the font to use for the sub
369. specify two piezometers in a hole 10 inches in diameter One piezometer could have an offset of 3 inches and the other piezometer could have an off set of 3 inches The first piezometer would then be between 2 and 4 inches on the left side of the hole and the second piezometer would be between 2 and 4 inches on the right side of the hole Symbol This is the symbol to use for the component The symbols available will vary depending upon the type of component When the cursor 1s clicked inside this column one of the forms below will be dis played depending on the type of component Cover If the type of component is Cover then the Well Cov ers form on the next page will be displayed Using this form the foreground color line width and symbol of the well cover can be selected Well Covers Foreground 1 Line width 1 Ea Bs oo ERO x Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide Well Data Cap If the type of component is Cap then the Well Caps form below will be displayed This form is used to select the fore ground and background colors line width and symbol Well Caps Line Width fi 4 5 Background af Ok X Cancel 7 Help Casing Screen f the type of component is Casing Screen then the Casings amp Screens form below will be displayed This form 1s used to select the foreground and background col ors line width and symbol for the casing or screen If the inner diamete
370. splayed The arrow buttons at the bottom of the list can be used to move the selection to the start of the list the previous record the next record or the end of the list Print Borehole Logs Borehole Number x Cancel 7 Help A single borehole log can be selected by clicking on it and pressing the OK button A range of borehole logs can be selected by clicking on the beginning of the range and then holding down the Shift key while clicking on the end of the range Multiple logs can be selected by hold ing down the Ctrl key while clicking on the logs WinLoG User s Guide 97 Tip When importing data it 1s possi ble to over write existing data in the database if it has the same name To avoid this the SaveAs button can be used to save the imported data as a new name 98 Projects Importing and Exporting Data WinLoG can import and export data for borehole logs templates leg ends and libraries in a wide variety of formats To import or export data select the Import Export Data submenu from the File menu The following data formats can be imported e Version 1 and 2 WinLoG Data e Version 3 and 4 WinLoG Exchange Files e gINT Data e AGS Data e LogPlot Data e GTGS Data And the following data formats can be exported e Version 3 and 4 WinLoG Exchange Files e Bitmap File e Enhanced Metafile e Windows Clipboard e DXF File e AGS File The importing and exporting of these data fo
371. splayed This form has four tabs one for the water and general well data one for specifying the interval and pipe data one for specifying the fittings for each interval and one for speci fying the packing material for each interval Well well Well Boring Diameter E Water Leve Depth f Depth Symbo f Inverted Triangle C Water Column f Both C None Elevation Edit Name x Cancel 7 Help Before entering the screen and pipe intervals the general informa tion about the well should be entered WinLoG User s Guide Well Data Water and Well Data Tab The Water and Well Data tab shown on the previous page is used to enter and edit water level and general well data The following informa tion can be entered and edited using this tab Well Boring Diameter This is the diameter of the hole The well diameter will be used to scale the screen and pipe within the column For example if the well diameter is specified as 10 inches then a screen diameter of 4 inches will occupy 40 of the column width By specifying these diameters varying screen and pipe diameters can be represented in the monitoring well Water Level This is the depth to the water table The input units can be either depths or elevations these units will be used for the input of the screen and pipe intervals as well Symbol The symbol to use to draw the water table The name of the well dataset can be c
372. ssible to have more than one size of pipe in the monitoring well and to use the reducing and enlarging fittings to switch between pipe diameters Symbol This is the symbol to use for the pipe or screen One of the 8 symbols shown can be selected by clicking on it with the mouse Packing Data Tab well well Water amp Well Data Interval amp Fipe Data Fitting Data Packing Data Top Depth 2 Interval Length fi 0 H 4 PH HX wf Ok x Cancel 7 Help The following information can be entered and edited using the Packing Data tab Top Depth This is the top depth of the well interval layer in the same units as set in the template The top depth of the interval must be entered on the Interval amp Pipe Data tab 194 WinLoG User s Guide Well Data Interval Length This is the length of the interval in the same units as the top depth The interval length must be entered on the Interval amp Pipe Data tab Foreground Color This is the color of the shaded region of the sym bol The color can be changed by clicking on the Foreground button The Color form on the next page will then be displayed and either a basic or a custom color can be selected Background Color This is the color of the unshaded region of the symbol The color can be changed by clicking on the Background but ton The Color form below will then be displayed and either a basic or a custom color can be selected Symbol
373. stom the page vertical length in inches must be specified WinLoG User s Guide Importing gINT Data Orientation This is the orientation of the page either portrait longer side 1s vertical or landscape longer side is horizontal When the Ok button is pressed the new template will be displayed on the screen Then the imported logs should open up on the screen Choose From List Option If Choose From List option was previously selected on the Import gINT Database form then the Open Template form below will be displayed The Open Template form allows the user to select a Template to use for importing the gINT boreholes Select the template to use from the list and then click the Ok button Open Template Templates Army Corps of Engineers Drilling Log Legal Army Corps of Engineers Drilling Log Letter Army Corps of Engineers HTW Drilling Log British Standard BS 5390 Core Log British Standard BS 5930 Borehole Log British Standard BS 5930 Boring Log British Standard BS 5930 Core Boring Loc Completed Tutors Environmental CHT Environmental Monitoring Well Environmental OWA and Well Environmental Three Graphs Environmental Two Graphs Environmental YOC and well Environmental YOC Concentrations Environmental Well Flood Control Geophysical 2 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs man iin TI mn Un al 44 gt bl x Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide 111 112 Projects Importi
374. style WinLoG User s Guide Setting Program Preferences Preferences Fage Directories Other Location Map Deviation Survey Auto Backup show Location Map Show Grid Cono e es Cono e es Fence Line Style Homgontal Spacing 500 Vertical Spacing p00 gt Line sive P g gt Line Style Label Font be Horizontal Vertical Axis gt Line Style _ Font Show Grid This is used to turn the grid on and off Horizontal Spacing This is the spacing between horizontal grid lines as shown on the location map in real grid coordinates of either feet or meters Vertical Spacing This is the spacing between vertical grid lines as shown on the location map in real grid coordinates of either feet or meters Grid Line Style Clicking the line style button opens a Line properties form on which the user can user select the type of grid lines Horizontal Vertical Axis Line Style Clicking the line style button opens a Line properties form on which the user can user select the type of axis line they would like on the location map Horizontal Vertical Axis Font The font button allows the user to edit the size of the axis font WinLoG User s Guide 149 150 Projects Preferences Page Directories Other Location Map Deviation Survey Auto Backup Well Deviation Calculation to Use Average Angle Balanced Tangential Mininum Curvature Radius of Curvature Tangentia
375. t Feet C Metres C Metres Scaling Facto Depth Page f Depth Page FRO C Depth Scale x Cancel Help WinLoG Users Guide 120 Projects Data Format Tab The following information can be entered on the Data Format tab Input Units The user can select to have the input units as either feet or metres Output Units The user can select to have the output units as either feet or metres Scaling Factor The user can select either to scale the template Log as either Depth Page or by using a depth scale Depth Page If Depth Page is selected for the Scaling Factor then the Depth Page field will be displayed This value scales the template log as a number of metres per page 1to _ If Depth Scale is selected for the Scaling Factor then the 1 to _ field will be displayed This would allow the depth scale to lm on screen is equal to metres in real life Default LogPlot Template Format E X SIZE Letter CM Width 5 5 Lena Orientation e Portrait C Landscape MX Cancel Help Page Setup Tab The following information can be entered on the Page Setup tab WinLoG User s Guide Importing LogPlot Data Size This is the page size of the template When the arrow at the right is pressed a list of available page sizes is displayed Inches or Millimeters The units for the width and length of the page These units will be used when specifying the layout of the l
376. t X This is the horizontal position of the start of the line in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line the program will fill in this field The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Start Y This is the vertical position of the start of the line in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line the program will fill in this field End X This is the horizontal position of the end of the line in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line this field will be filled in by the pro gram End Y This is the vertical position of the end of the line in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Line button on the toolbar is used to create the line this field will be filled in by the program Line Style This is the style of the line The line style can be changed by pressing the Line Style button A Line Properties form will then be displayed Using this form the style color and width of the line can be set Arrowhead To display an arrowhead at the start or end of the line select yes Arrow Position This is position to place the arrowhead either at the start or end of the line If no arrowhead is selected above this field will not appear Arrowhead Size This is the size of the arrowhead If no arrowhe
377. t gradational contacts e The program comes with over 100 lithologic symbols e Foreground and background colors can be specified for each litho logic symbol e The lines between layers can be individually customized e Core logs can be specified at separate intervals and with different lithologies than layers Samples e An unlimited number of soil or rock samples can be added e Start depth length sample symbol type blows ft recovery and other text data can be specified for each sample e An unlimited number of other sample columns can be used for a wide variety of text and numeric sample data e The lines between samples can be individually customized e Sample type symbols can be selected from 30 different symbols e Recoveries can be represented as numbers or as a shaded box e Blow counts can be shown on one line or four lines Wells e Added Well Macros that can be used to quickly add standard well components water level information and text annotation to a log Macros can be used for single well installation complex nested wells aboveeground well casings etc Well macros can be created using the Well Macros menu item on the File menu or by saving existing well completion details of a log as a well macro There is no limit to the number of macros that can be used e An unlimited number of wells can be added e Wells can be shown using three different methods with varying levels of complex
378. t t EnO Praject No 2000 Borehole Number 101 Project Tworial ACME Consulting Company Client Encl 4 44 Canadian Oaks Drive binnen Vehiiby Ontani Site Lacatlan Geologist Your Mame SUBSURFACE PROFILE SAMPLE Desonplon ley Well Completion Zinc Details Depry ann BOM aie 200 BOD 1000 ee En Ground Surlace x ae Sand and Gravel Fill iG Loose heterogeneous Ty en en Soe SS O O O Mm PA Ha lo inch sub angular ZE Ke kn ren el Silty Clay ea Mottled brown and grey ae silty clay with ambedded Edt wel Data El Saving the Borehole Log Now that all of the data for the borehole log has been entered the log should be saved To save the log press the Save button on the Borehole Log Toolbar Printing the Borehole Log To print the borehole log press the Print button on the Borehole Log Toolbar After the button is pressed a Print form will be displayed Press the OK button to obtain a printed copy of the log shown on the next page 58 WinLoG User s Guide Copying the Borehole Log Project No 2000 Borehole Number 101 ACME 2 Project Tutorial ACME Consulting Company 44 Canadian Oaks Drive Client Enclosure 1 Whitby Ontario Site Location Geologist Your Name SUBSURFACE PROFILE SAMPLE a me g Ground Surface att cies Sand and Gravel Fill Well Completion Details Depth Elev
379. t the symbol library for the layer When the arrow at the right is pressed a list will display the avail able symbol libraries After a library has been selected the symbols dis played in the tab will be updated Symbol The symbol for the layer can be selected by clicking on one of the 18 symbols displayed for the current library The selected symbol is highlighted with a blue border WinLoG User s Guide Lithology Foreground Color This is the color to use for the shaded parts of the symbol The foreground color can be changed by pressing the Fore ground Color button When this button is pressed a Color form is dis played Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color can be specified Background Color This is the color to use for the unshaded parts of the symbol The background color can be changed by pressing the Background Color button When this button is pressed a Color form is displayed Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color can be specified Fill Size The fill size is used to expand or condense the symbol before it is drawn on the log The size of the symbol is multiplied by the fill size and then the symbol is drawn For example a fill size of 2 will result in the symbol being doubled in size The fill size must be greater than 0 Contact Angle This is the contact angle for the top of the layer and can be used to indicate gradational or dipping contacts A
380. te OI x Headers Footers LOGGED BY top of screen TOTAL DEPTH bot of screen l WATER LEV ATD SURFACE ELEVATII CORD LOCATION CORD LOCATION E WELL pr EIRA Columns Depth Graphic Log Description Sail Class Sample Number Sample Type Blows Ft Remarks PID PPM y DE x Cancel Help Depth Per Page 20 le Le gt WinLoG User s Guide Importing GTGS Data This form allows the user to create a template based on the data that has been extracted from the GTGS Version 3 file The following can be edited on this form Headers This list box contains the list of all headers that were found in the imported GTGS file Footers This list box contains the list of all footers that were found in the imported GTGS file Columns This list box contains the list of all columns that were found in the imported GTGS file Depth Per Page This is the default Depth Per Page that is used when WinLoG creates the template Usually in feet per page Clicking on the Up Arrow button will move the selection up one level in the list box Clicking on the Down Arrow button will move the selection down one level in the list box Clicking the Delete button will delete the selection from the list box Clicking the Left Arrow button will move the selected footer item from the footer list box and over to the top of the header list box Clicking the Right Arrow but
381. te Azimuth column from the list of all columns in the LAS file using the the combo box to the right Import LAS Deviation Survey l Name C NExamples Las S ample las ce Depth Column DEPT Inclination Column INCL Azimuth Column AZHTH XC Cancel Help After all of the above information has been specified press Ok to process the file Importing an ASCII File Deviation Survey To import a deviation survey from an ASCII file select the Ascii File menu item from the Import Deviation Survey submenu This will open up the Import Ascii Deviation Survey form shown on the next page Select the Ascii file to import using the Open button to the right of the Name WinLoG User s Guide Importing Deviation Survey Data Import Ascii Deviation Survey After the file has been specified the form will be updated as shown below Import Ascii Deviation Survey Mame CAD evaurveye dat Number of Header Lines i 0 Depth Colum fi Inclination Colum 2 f4 Azimuth Column f4 x Cancel Help The following information can be entered Number of Columns Number of Header Lines This is the number of lines of header infor mation in the ascii data file that winlog should ignore Number of Columns This is the number of columns of data that exist in the ascii data file Depth Column This is the column of data to use for the measured depth data WinLoG User s Guide 281
382. te button will paste the text in the clipboard at the cur rent position of the cursor in the memo field t The Replace button will replace the specified text The Symbol button will display the Symbol form This form is used to place a symbol at the current cursor position in the text To select a symbol use the Font box to select the font containing the symbol and then select the desired symbol After the desired symbol has been selected press the Ok button to insert it into the text The WinLoG program comes with a font called GAEA Symbols that con tains a variety of well and other symbols va The Spell Check button will display the Spell Checker form and will check the spelling in the text The dictionary used to check the spelling is set in the program Preferences see Chapter 3 When the Add button is pressed the word will be appended to the custom dictio nary WinLoG User s Guide Remarks Lines Tab Text Memos Lines j 100 o HA Pb MAX af Ok x Cancel Help The following information can be entered and edited using the Lines tab shown above Depth This is the depth to display the line in the same units as set in the template Offset This is the percentage offset from the left side of the column to start to draw the line For example an offset of zero will start the line on the left side of the column and an offset of 50 will start the line in the center of the column
383. tering the borehole data To change the color press the Water Color button A Color form will be displayed and either a basic or a custom color can be specified Well Pipe Color This is the color to use when drawing pipes and screens in the well In a Well Type 3 column this can be changed when entering the borehole data To change the color press the Well Pipe Color button A Color form will be displayed and either a basic or a custom color can be specified Pipe Line Thickness This is the width of the line to use when draw ing pipes and screens In a Well Type 3 column this can be changed when entering the borehole data WinLoG User s Guide Graph and Geophysical Columns Fitting Line Thickness This is the width of the line to use when drawing fittings Graph and Geophysical Columns The format of Graph Double Graph SPT Graph Water Content Graph Bar Graph Geophysical Log Double Geophysical Log and Lithologic Cross Plot columns can be changed by selecting the column and using the Customize button on the Columns tab When this button is pressed the Customize Graph Columns form below will be displayed If the column type is a double graph or double geophysical log then the Customize Graph Columns form will have two tabs as shown on the next page Each tab 1s used for one of the graphs or geophysical logs The data entry for both tabs is identical Customize Graph Columns TOY Reading Graph TO Reading Minimum
384. the name of the file edit this name or click on the but ton to the right of the name If the button to the right is pressed an Open bitmap file form will be displayed Select the desired file and then press the Open button Stretch Bitmap Select yes to stretch the bitmap to fit within the speci fied borders If no 1s selected only the center of the bitmap and page can be entered for the position If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to add the bitmap Stretch Bitmap is set to No Maintain Aspect Ratio Select yes to keep the aspect ratio of the bitmap the same as stored in the file If yes is selected the bottom of the bitmap will be automatically adjusted to maintain the aspect ratio If Stretch Bitmap is set to No then this field will not be displayed and it is assumed that the aspect ratio 1s maintained Left This is the position of the left border of the bitmap in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to create the bitmap this field will not be displayed If Stretch Bitmap is set to No then this field will not be displayed The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Right This is the position of the right border of the bitmap in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page If the Bitmap button on the toolbar is used to create the bitmap this field will not be displayed If Stretch Bitmap is set to No then this field will not be displayed
385. the symbol to use to represent the water table When the cursor is clicked on this column the Water Level Symbol form below is displayed This form is used to select the symbol symbol size color and line width Text This is the text up to 255 characters to display above the water level symbol The text will be oriented vertically above the symbol WinLoG User s Guide Well Data Annotations Tab The Annotations tab shown below is used to enter the text describing the well completion details and other information well well Layout Components Water Levels Annotations alot 10 Screen Fight Vertical liel Tr E z a Hr Silica Sand 0 18 5 2 Lett Vertical _ Steel Well Cover 0 2 r5 E Right Vertical 1 Steel Casing 4 0 fi 5 Fight Vertical Ie Concrete 2 0 fps Left Vertical 4 d hw H The buttons at the bottom of this tab are used for the following jg The Start button moves to the first annotation 4 The Previous button moves to the previous annotation The Next button moves to the next annotation p The End button moves to the last annotation The Insert button creates a new annotation 7 The Delete button deletes this annotation WinLoG User s Guide 205 206 Borehole Logs The following information can be entered and edited using this tab Text This is the text to use for annotation up to 255 characters Start Depth This is the starting depth to display
386. the template If this is not checked the Header tab and fields below will not be dis played Justification This sets the justification of the header lines either left or right justified Color This is the background color for the header block When the Color button is pressed the Color form below will be displayed Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color specified Color Basic colors me Bey RR Fe En nn ENEN EERE ee EES AI Custom colors COOL ne pal Sat 0 Green 255 OF Cancel Add to Custom Colors Line Style This is the line style used to draw the border of the header When the Line Style button is pressed the Line Properties form on the next page will be displayed This form can be used to set the line style color and width Line Style Thickness Color Soid rf WinLoG User s Guide Headers and Footers Title Font This is the font to use when drawing the main title of the header The main title is the first line of the header and is normally used for the borehole number When the Title Font button 1s pressed the Font form below will be displayed This form can be used to set the font name font size font style and color Font Ei Ed Font Font style Size Arial Black Fr Arial Narrow Fp Arial Narrow Special G Fr Arial Narrow Special G F Arial Rounded MT Bol Fp Arial Special G1 Effects Sample T Strikeout Underline AaBbYy2z Colo
387. the text the text will be positioned below this start depth If the start depth is zero and the symbol type is not a double arrow the start depth will be ignored and the end depth will be used to position the text End Depth This is the end depth to use for displaying the text The text will be positioned above this depth If the end depth is zero and the symbol type 1s not a double arrow the end depth will be ignored and the start depth will be used to position the text Text Offset This is the offset to place the text from the center of the hole The sign of the offset is ignored and the Side is used to determine which side of the hole to place the text In order for the text to appear outside of the well components the text offset must be greater than the hole radius Offset This is the offset used to position the start of the arrow or circle inside of the well components Offsets to the left are negative and off sets to the right are positive In order for the arrow or circle that leads to the text to start in the well components the offset must be less than the hole radius Side This is the side of the hole to place the text When the cursor is clicked inside of this column a combo box will be displayed and either the left or right side can be selected Orientation This is the orientation of the text When the cursor is clicked inside of this column a combo box will be displayed and the orientation can be set to either h
388. tical Alignmen o ele a Default Line Style m x Cancel Help The Customize Text Column form can be used to set the following defaults Justification The text can be justified left center or right within the column This justification only applies to text lines and will not apply to memos entered in the text column Orientation The text can be oriented either horizontally or vertically This orientation only applies to text lines and will not apply to memos Default Line Style This is the default line style to use for the top and bottom of the text interval To change the line style press the Line Style button A Line Properties form will be displayed shown in the Columns section This form can be used to set the line style width and color WinLoG User s Guide 319 320 Templates Well Columns The colors and line thickness of the water and well materials for Well Types 2 and 3 can be changed by selecting the column and using the Customize button on the Columns tab When the Customize button 1s pressed the Customize Well Column form below will be displayed Customize Well Column Water Color Sp Well Pipe Color En Pipe Line Thickness E x Cancel Help The Customize Well Column form can be used to set the following defaults Water Color This is the color that will be used to draw the water table symbol in the well In a Well Type 3 column this can be changed when en
389. titles of the well symbols For example a Well Type 3 has the following sub titles Well Covers Well Caps Casings and Screens Joints and Miscellaneous When the button is pressed the Font form shown on the previous page is displayed This form can be used to select the font name style size and color Line Style This is the line style to use to draw the border around the legend When the Line Style button 1s pressed the Line Properties form shown below will be displayed This form can be used to set the line style width and color Line Style Thickness Color Soid rf Left Border This is the position of the left side of the border in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Right Border This is the position of the right side of the border in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page Top Border This is the position of the top of the border in inches or millimeters from the top of the page Bottom Border This is the position of the bottom of the border in inches or millimeters from the top of the page WinLoG User s Guide 367 368 Legends Horizontal Bitmap Size This is the size in pixels to draw the bitmap on the legend A size of 40 is recommended Vertical Bitmap Size This is the size in pixels to draw the bitmap on the legend A size of 40 is recommended Lithologic Symbols Each legend can contain one
390. ton will move the selected header item from the header list box and over to the top of the footer list box After the Ok button is pressed the Enter Template Name form will be displayed In this form you can specify the name to save the Generic Template as WinLoG User s Guide 125 126 Projects Use Existing Template Option If the Use Existing Template option was selected previously the Open Template form below will be displayed This form allows the user to select a template to use for importing the GTGS dataset This template can be one that was created when importing previous GTGS datasets that has been modified to suit your needs Select the template you wish to use and then press th Ok button Open Template Templates Army Corps of Engineers Drilling Log Legal Army Corps of Engineers Drilling Log Letter Army Corps of Engineers HTW Drilling Log British Standard BS 5390 Core Log British Standard BS 5930 Borehole Log British Standard BS 5930 Boring Log British Standard BS 5930 Core Boring Loc Completed utorial Environmental CMT Environmental Monitoring Well Environmental OWA and Well Environmental Three Graphs Environmental Two Graphs Environmental YOC and well Environmental YOC Concentrations Environmental Well Flood Control Geophysical 2 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs a P EAE Ea E EEA el 44 gt Pp x Cancel Help Import Version 5 Logs and Templates
391. tton The program will provide a default name based on the filename Enter Template Name Existing Templates Completed T utorial Environmental Three Graphe Environmental Two Graphs Environmental YOC and Well Environmental YOC Concentrations Environmental Well Geophysical 2 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs Geophysical 3 Logs Legal Geotechnical Basic Geotechnical Core Log Geotechnical Core Log Legal Geotechnical PENN DOT Unique Template Mame X Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide Importing Version 1 and 2 WinLoG Data Legends To import version 2 legends into the WinLoG Master Database select the Legends menu item from the Import Version 2 Data submenu The Import Version 2 Legend Files form will then be displayed as shown below Only one legend at a time can be imported into the master data base Select a legend and then press the Open button Import Yersion 2 Legend Files Ed E Look jn C Al HEE Files of type Exchange Legend Files Cancel The Enter Legend Name form below will be displayed showing the current legends in the master database Enter a unique legend name not currently in the database and press the Ok button The program will provide a default name based on the filename Enter Legend Name Existing Legends British USCS Ce Legend Mame af Ok x Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide 103 104 Projects The legend w
392. tton on one of the sample sym bols in the legend After one of the above tasks has been performed the Symbol Descriptions form will be displayed This form has two tabs one for the description and one for the symbol This form is identical for lithologic symbols well symbols and sample symbols The use of this form is described in the Symbol Descriptions section below WinLoG User s Guide 369 370 Legends Symbol Descriptions The method used to edit the descriptions and symbols 1s the same for lithologic symbols well symbols and sample symbols Some types of symbols can not be edited such as certain well symbols In this case the symbol will be displayed but no editing allowed When one of the symbols is selected for editing the Symbol Descrip tions form shown below will be displayed This form has two tabs one for the description and one for the symbol Symbol Descriptions T Arial E E B 7 U a a ES d EB 4 4 gt Pl x Cancel 7 Help The buttons at the bottom of the form are used for the following lq The Start button displays the first symbol d The Previous button displays the previous symbol p The Next button displays the next symbol Fl The End button displays the last symbol WinLoG User s Guide Symbol Descriptions Description Tab The Description tab shown on the previous page is used to enter and edit the description for the symbol There is no limit to the length of the des
393. tton on the toolbar is used to create the paragraph this position will be filled in by the program Bottom This is the position of the bottom border of the paragraph in inches or millimeters from the top of the page If the Paragraph button on the toolbar is used to create the paragraph this position will be filled in by the program Background Color This is the background color of the paragraph text box When the Background Color button is pressed a Color form is displayed Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color can be specified Frame Select yes to display a frame around the paragraph text Frame Width This is the line width of the frame around the paragraph text If no frame is selected above this field will not be displayed WinLoG User s Guide Paragraphs Frame Color This is the color of the frame to display around the para graph text When the Frame Color button is pressed a Color form is dis played Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color can be specified If no frame is selected above this field will not be dis played Sizing a Paragraph The size of the paragraph can be changed using the Paragraph Text form above or the mouse To adjust the size using the mouse follow the procedure below 1 Position the cursor at the boundary of the paragraph The cursor should change to a set of arrows and the Status line should display Edit Size of Paragraph The o
394. tware Project Borehole Number 44 Canadian Oaks Drive Whitby Ontarlo Client Enclosure Canada Site Location Engineer Shear Strength Remarks blowelft 20 4U g Bu 2 a i Sheer 1 of 1 Changing Header Titles The header of the template is the information block at the top of the borehole log The position size number of header lines and line titles can all be customized In this tutorial we will change a title of a header line and the location of the first title the borehole number To edit the header click inside the header block with the left mouse button The Template Header and Footer Entry form on the next page will be displayed Select the Engineer title and enter the new title Geologist Next change the position of the Borehole Number by specifying a Left value of 2 5 and a Top value of 0 7 WinLoG User s Guide Tip The location of the title could also have been changed by placing the cursor over the title and pressing the left mouse button Then while holding down the button dragging the title to the new location 33 34 Tutorial Template Header and Footer Entry Headers Footers Layout Borehole Number 0 7 0 Project Mo O 0 75 0 79 0 Project O 0 75 1 1 0 Client O 0 75 1 39 0 0 Site Location O 0 75 1 69 O Enclosure LJ 3 5 1 42 0 O Geologist O 3 5 1 69 0 O 4 dq he WH A x Cancel Help Next change the font of the Borehol
395. twork Registration Transferring the Registration Using WinLoG Starting WinLoG Menu Bar 00 00 ce eee Popup Menus Toolbars 4 06 64 3 werden da ate hdd Desktop Status Line Chapter 2 Tutorial Customizing a Template Selecting a Template Changing Header Titles Changing the Company Name Adding a Company Logo Customizing the Depth Column Customizing the Graph Column 38 Deleting a Column 40 Customizing the Well Column 41 Saving a Template 42 Closing the Template 43 Creating a Borehole Log 44 Creating a New Project 44 Creating a New Borehole Log 46 Adding General Borehole Data 47 Adding the Borehole Depth 49 Adding the Lithology 50 Adding Sample Data 53 Adding Graph Data 54 Adding Well Completion Details 55 Saving the Borehole Log 58 Printing the Borehole Log 58 Copying the Borehole Log 59 Chapter 3 Projects Creating a New Project 63 Opening an Existing Project 65 Opening the Last Project 66 Closing the Project 66 Deleting a Project 66 Using the GIS Interface 68 Adding a Borehole 68 Editing a Borehole 69 Editing a Cross Section 69 Location Map Toolbar 0 Importing a Proje
396. tyle size and color Line Style This is the line style to use to draw the border around the legend When the Line Style button 1s pressed the Line Properties form shown below will be displayed This form can be used to set the line style width and color Line Style Thickness Color Soid rf Left Border This is the position of the left side of the border in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page The units of measurement are specified in the page layout Right Border This is the position of the right side of the border in inches or millimeters from the left side of the page Top Border This is the position of the top of the border in inches or millimeters from the top of the page Bottom Border This is the position of the bottom of the border in inches or millimeters from the top of the page WinLoG User s Guide 367 368 Legends Horizontal Bitmap Size This is the size in pixels to draw the bitmap on the legend A size of 40 is recommended Vertical Bitmap Size This is the size in pixels to draw the bitmap on the legend A size of 40 is recommended Lithologic Symbols Each legend can contain one lithologic symbol library The library is selected when the legend is created Lithologic symbols are used to rep resent soils rocks ice and well packing material Lithologic symbol libraries are created and edited using the Symbol Libraries submenu and are discussed in detail in Ch
397. uld change to a set of arrows and the Status line should display Edit Size of Paragraph The orientation of the arrows will indicate the direction that the boundary can be changed 2 Press and hold the left mouse button down and drag the boundary to its new position 3 While dragging the boundary a rectangle will be displayed showing its current location 4 When the boundary is in the desired location release the left mouse button Bitmaps Bitmaps contained in Windows bitmap BMP files can be added any where on a legend These bitmaps can be used to show company logos site plans and other graphical information Bitmaps are displayed over top of any information on the legend There is no limit to the number of bitmaps that can be displayed WinLoG User s Guide 381 382 Legends 5 Adding a Bitmap There are two methods that can be used to add a bitmap to a legend 1 Click on the Bitmap button on the Toolbar Next using the left mouse button click on the location of the center of the bitmap The Open form below will then be displayed Select the bitmap file and then press the Open button 2 Select the Bitmaps menu item from the Edit menu or Popup menu and then clicking on the Add button on the form The Open form below will then be displayed Select the bitmap file and then press the Open button Using this method the location of the bitmap must be specified on the form as described below Open i Ed
398. urrent lithology from the next lithology in the Percent Cuttings Graph H Line This is the horizontal line that separates the current lithology from the next lithology in the Percent Cuttings Graph Core Photo Column Core photo columns are used to display photos taken of cores at differ ent depths or can be used to display photos taken inside the borehole itself The photos can be in either BMP or JPEG format and should be tied to a particular depth in the borehole The style of the Core Photo column can be changed by clicking on the column and then on the Customize button on the Columns form The Customize Core Photo Column below will be displayed Fi Customize Core Photo Ce um I O x Image Settings f Do Not Stretch C Stretch to Fit Column Wdith and Height C Stretch while Maintaining Aspect A atio x Cancel Help WinLoG User s Guide 329 330 Templates This form can be used to adjust the Image Settings between the follow ing Do Not Stretch Using this setting the image will not be stretched at all and will be clipped if it extends outside of the column The image will be tied to the specified top depth and will extend to a depth according to the size of the image Stretch to Fit Column Width and Height Using this setting the image will be stretched such that it fits within the width of the column and extends from the specified top depth to the specified bottom depth Stretch While Mai
399. us sample P The Next button displays the next sample P The End button displays the last sample WinLoG User s Guide Core Log Data The Insert button creates a new sample The Delete button deletes the sample Core Log Library Common Symbols Top Depth jo Bottom Depth FilSizef a aie hs Tap Line Style hg gg hg eee re pa el ral ee ee SEE m E E Foreground Col Background coel 44 PW HX X Cancel 7 Help The following information can be entered and edited using this form Top Depth This is the top depth of the sample and should be between the start and end depths of the borehole Bottom Depth The bottom depth of the sample is optional If it 1s not specified or is less than the top depth the top depth of the next sample is used Library This combo box 1s used to select the symbol library for the sample When the arrow at the right is pressed a list will display the available symbol libraries After a library has been selected the sym bols displayed will be updated Symbol The symbol for the sample can be selected by clicking on one of the 18 symbols displayed for the current library The selected symbol is highlighted with a blue border WinLoG User s Guide 231 232 Borehole Logs Foreground Color This is the color to use for the shaded parts of the symbol The foreground color can be changed by pressing the Fore ground Col
400. ve this field will not be dis played WinLoG User s Guide Paragraphs At the top of the Paragraph Text form is the Rich Text toolbar this tool bar can be used to modify the font characteristics of the text Before selecting a speed button the text to be modified should be selected with the mouse OP Arial ajio jm Bz UAA ZEE tE BAS The speed buttons of the toolbar perform the following functions The Font Typeface box is used to E Arial z select the name of the font to use for 10 E aZ T i the selected text The Font Size box is used to set the size of the font for the selected text r The Font Color box is used to select the color of the font for the selected text The Bold button is used to toggle the bold attribute of the selected text on and off The Italics button is used to toggle the italic attribute of the selected text on and off The Underline button 1s used to toggle the underline attribute of the selected text on and off The Superscript button is used to toggle the superscript attribute of the selected text on and off The Subscript button is used to toggle the subscript attribute of the selected text on and off The Left Justify button will left justify the selected text WinLoG User s Guide 3 9 Legends The Center Justify button will center justify the selected text The Right Justify button will right justify the
401. w File Menu Edit Menu Projects Header Footer Borehole Logs Cokin Templates Company F Legends Paragraph Text j j Teo Libraries Bitmaps Lithology Macros oe Well Macros Rectangles Import Export Data Tables Back Up Winlog Page Layout Pocket PC Data i of Pages Print Print Setup Preferences Exit Template Toolbar Dessau se Q2Q04 B w o WinLoG User s Guide Tip To make it easier to edit the template the Template toolbar should be turned on if it is not currently displayed If the Show Template Toolbar option in the View menu is not checked click on the option to display the toolbar If the Tem plate toolbar is displayed in collapsed mode then click on the TEM button to expand the toolbar 289 290 Templates i Creating a New Template Since templates are stored in the WinLoG master database they can be created and edited at any time no project has to be open To create a template either select the New Template menu item of the Templates sub menu of the File menu or click the New button on the Template Toolbar After one of the above tasks is performed the New Template form below will be displayed This form has two tabs one for the template layout and one for the page setup Layout Tab Hew Template Layout Page Setup Heade i No it Yes Foote C Ho it Yes Number of Columns fi 0 A x Cancel Help The following information can
402. will not be displayed Frame Color This is the color of the frame to display around the para graph text When the Frame Color button is pressed a Color form is dis played Using this form a basic color can be selected or a custom color can be specified If no frame is selected above this field will not be dis played WinLoG User s Guide Paragraphs At the top of the Paragraph Text form is the Rich Text toolbar this tool bar can be used to modify the font characteristics of the text Before selecting a speed button the text to be modified should be selected with the mouse OP Arial ajio jm Bz UAA ZEE tE BAS The speed buttons of the toolbar perform the following functions The Font Typeface box is used to E Arial z select the name of the font to use for 10 E aZ T i the selected text The Font Size box is used to set the size of the font for the selected text r The Font Color box is used to select the color of the font for the selected text The Bold button is used to toggle the bold attribute of the selected text on and off The Italics button is used to toggle the italic attribute of the selected text on and off The Underline button 1s used to toggle the underline attribute of the selected text on and off The Superscript button is used to toggle the superscript attribute of the selected text on and off The Subscript button is used to toggle the su
403. y read and the user should get a message indicating that the file has been read properly If however there was a problem then the user should get a message indicating that Winlog could not read the file lol xl Do you wantto use the detault template or chose from alist Choose Fromm List If the read is successful then winlog will open the Import AGS form shown above There are two options e Use Default Template e Choose From List The Use Default Template option will create a default template for the borehole logs And the Choose From List option will allow you to select the template from a list of available templates Each of these options are discussed in the sections below After an option has been selected the Select AGS Borehole form on the next page will be displayed The Select AGS Borehole form displays the list of all boreholes that are available for importing from the AGS file the users wants to import The user has the option to select one or more boreholes to import at a time The user can select a single bore hole by left clicking on a borehole and clicking OK To select multiple boreholes the user must hold down the Ctrl key and click on multiple boreholes WinLoG User s Guide 113 114 Projects Gelect AGS Borehole AGS File BoreHoles 44 gt Bb x Cancel Help Use Default Template Option If the user previously selected to the Use Default Template option the AG
404. ymbol This is the symbol to use for the well interval One of the 16 symbols shown can be selected by clicking on it with the mouse Foreground Color This is the color of the shaded region of the sym bol The color can be changed by clicking on the Foreground button A Color form will then be displayed and either a basic or a custom color can be selected Background Color This is the color of the unshaded region of the symbol The color can be changed by clicking on the Background but ton A Color form will then be displayed and either a basic or a cus tom color can be selected WinLoG User s Guide 189 190 Borehole Logs Well Type 2 Column Well Type 2 columns were first introduced in version 2 of the program and can be used for more complicated well displays All of the cas ings screens and fittings are drawn to scale by the program This type of well column can be used for wells with varying casing and screen diameters but cannot contain multiple piezometers or annotation The data for a Well Type 2 column consists of general water and well data and layers intervals of pipes fittings and packing material Well Type 2 data can be entered and edited by selecting the Well Data submenu of the Edit menu and then selecting the name of the well col umn or clicking the left mouse button inside the well column of the borehole log After performing one of the above tasks the Well Type 2 Data form below will be di
405. ymbols shown in borehole logs WinLoG comes with several pre viously defined legends In addition any number of new legends can be easily created Legends can be customized to display different lithologic symbol libraries well component symbols and sample symbols In addition they can include bitmaps and para graph text A company logo and or site map stored as bitmaps can also be included in a legend Although you can use an unlimited number of lithologic libraries each with 18 symbols only one library can be represented on the legend If you need to show more libraries it is recommended to create additional legends If more symbols are specified then can be fit on the page they will be truncated at the bottom of the page Each symbol also has a default symbol description stored in the library which 1s used when creating legends When a legend is created the default description will be used for the symbol description in the legend If this description is then edited in the legend the new descrip tion will only appear in that legend The new description in the legend will not replace the default description in the library To change the default description in the library the description must be changed in the library as discussed in the next chapter However the actual sym bols are the same in the legend as in the library and if edited in the legend the symbols in the library will change as well Legends Lege
406. zes is displayed WinLoG User s Guide Creating a New Legend Inches or Millimeters The units for the width and length of the page These units will be used when specifying the layout of the legend If the Page Size is Custom the units can be set to either inches or mil limeters Custom Width If the page size is specified as custom the page hori zontal width in inches must be specified Custom Length If the page size is specified as custom the page ver tical length in inches must be specified Orientation This is the orientation of the page either portrait longer side 1s vertical or landscape longer side is horizontal After the Ok button is pressed on the New Legend form the Enter Leg end Name form below will be displayed Enter a unique name for the new legend and press Ok Enter Legend Name Existing Legends British USCS Unique Legend Name y k x Cancel 7 Help WinLoG User s Guide 363 364 Legends i Editing a Legend To enter or edit data in a legend the legend must first be created as described above or an existing legend opened Existing legends can be opened for editing by selecting the Open Legend menu item of the Leg ends sub menu of the File menu or clicking the Open button on the Legend Toolbar After the legend has been opened and displayed the legend can be entered and edited as described in the sections below Titles and Layout The titles i

Version 4 User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents